Mitsubishi Electric GT14 User Manual Download Page 361 | Manualshive

Page: 361 / 1546

background image

17

INST

ALLA

TION O

F

CO

REOS

, BO

OT

O

S AND

ST

AND

ARD M

O

NIT

O

R OS

18

DRA

WING

SO

FTW

A

RE

SE

TTI

N

GS

19

MAINTENANCE AND

INS

P

E

CT

IO

N

20

T

ROUBL

ESHOOTI

NG

21

DIRECT

CONNECTION

T

O

CP

U

22

CO

M

P

U

T

E

R

L

INK

C

O

NNECTION

23

ETHERNET

CONNECTION

24

CC-Link

CONNECTION

(V

ia G

4)

20. TROUBLESHOOTING

20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

20 - 1

20. TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter explains the GOT restoration sheet and the error message/system alarm list.

20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

This section provides restoration methods for the case the GOT does not operate normally, which are listed in check
sheets.
The following explains how to use each sheet.

(1) When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions (GOT status check sheet)

When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions, identify the cause of the malfunction etc. with GOT status
check sheet and take corrective action.
When the GOT is restored, see the status for a while.

(2) When the wiring status needs to be improved (GOT installation status check sheet)

When the noise caused by the GOT wiring status is considered to have caused the malfunction, etc. based on
the check result of (1) above, take corrective action for wiring using GOT installation status check sheet.
When the GOT is restored, see the status for a while.

(3) When corrective action other than (1) and (2) above is required (System configuration check sheet)

If malfunction etc. occurs even after checking with (1) and (2) above, please contact your local Mitsubishi
(Electric System) Service after filling out System configuration check sheet with details about your system.
When sending a troubled product, attach the GOT restoration sheets (GOT status check sheet, GOT installation
status check sheet, System configuration check sheet) checked in this section.
Please keep copies of the restoration sheets.

«
...
359
360
361
362
363
...
»

Summary of Contents for GT14

Page 1: ......

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...ystem where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or m...

Page 4: ...tion cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network the available IP addr...

Page 5: ... fire failure or malfunction may be caused Connect connection cables securely to the specified connectors while the power is turned OFF Imperfect connection may cause malfunction or failure When inserting removing a SD card into from the GOT turn the SD card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the SD card When removing a SD card from the GOT make sure to support t...

Page 6: ...tal pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in ...

Page 7: ... modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit Doing so may damage the unit Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak i...

Page 8: ...y be activated This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations For details on models subject to restrictions refer to the User s Manual for the GOT you are using Before transporting the GOT turn the GOT power on and check that the battery voltage status is normal on ...

Page 9: ...pecifications 3 4 3 4 Battery specifications 3 5 3 4 1 Applicable battery 3 5 3 4 2 Battery specifications 3 5 4 PARTS NAME 4 1 Front Panel 4 1 4 1 1 Name and specifications 4 1 4 2 Back Panel 4 2 4 2 1 Name and specifications 4 2 4 2 2 Opening and closing of environmental protection back cover 4 3 4 3 Top Face Interface 4 4 4 3 1 Names and specifications 4 4 INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mi...

Page 10: ...icable emergency stop SW guard cover 6 8 6 5 2 Installing procedure 6 8 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 6 9 6 6 1 Applicable Connector Conversion Box 6 9 6 6 2 Connector Conversion Box GT16H CNB 42S 6 9 6 6 3 Connector Conversion Box GT11H CNB 37S 6 24 6 6 4 Connector conversion box GT16H CNB 37S 6 29 6 7 With wall mounting Attachment 6 34 6 7 1 Applicable With wall mounting Attachment 6 34 6 7 2 Mou...

Page 11: ...y Display 10 4 10 3 1 Display operation of main menu 10 6 10 3 2 Utility basic configuration 10 8 10 3 3 Basic operation of settings change 10 9 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 11 1 Communication setting 11 1 11 1 1 Communication setting functions 11 1 11 1 2 Display operation of Communication Setting 11 1 11 1 3 Communication setting contents 11 2 11 1 4 Communication set...

Page 12: ...RAM DATA CONTROL 14 1 Data Storage Location 14 1 14 1 1 Data type and storage location 14 1 14 1 2 OS version confirmation 14 3 14 1 3 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location 14 4 14 1 4 Display file 14 4 14 2 Various Data Control 14 5 14 2 1 OS information 14 5 14 2 2 Alarm information 14 11 14 2 3 Project Information 14 17 14 2 4 Hard copy information 14 27 14 2 5 Advanced...

Page 13: ... CONTROLLER SETTING AND COMMON SETTINGS 18 1 Setting the Communication Interface 18 1 18 1 1 Setting connected equipment Channel setting 18 2 18 1 2 I F communication setting 18 12 18 1 3 Precautions 18 14 18 2 Common Settings Dedicated to Handy GOT 18 14 18 3 Writing the Communication Settings and Common Settings onto the GOT 18 15 18 3 1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT 18 15 18 3 2 ...

Page 14: ...le Computer link module 22 4 22 2 System Configuration 22 5 22 2 1 Connecting to MELSEC iQ R series 22 5 22 2 2 Connecting to QCPU Q mode 22 6 22 2 3 Connecting to LCPU 22 8 22 2 4 Connecting to QCPU A mode 22 10 22 2 5 Connecting to QnACPU QnACPU type 22 12 22 2 6 Connecting to QnACPU QnASCPU type 22 15 22 2 7 Connecting to ACPU AnCPU type 22 18 22 2 8 Connecting to ACPU AnSCPU type A0J2HCPU A2CC...

Page 15: ...necting to C controller module Q Series 23 33 23 4 9 Connecting to Ethernet module QnA Series 23 36 23 4 10 Connecting to Ethernet module A Series 23 39 23 4 11 Connecting to Ethernet module FX Series 23 43 23 4 12 Connecting to Built in Ethernet port FXCPU FX3GE 23 47 23 4 13 Connecting to Display I F CNC C70 23 49 23 4 14 Connecting to CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module 23 51 23 4 ...

Page 16: ...ting to FREQROL V500 or V500L series 25 37 25 5 6 Connecting to FREQROL E700 or sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX series 25 37 25 5 7 Connecting to FREQROL D700 F700PJ series 25 38 25 5 8 Connecting to FREQROL F700 F700P 25 39 25 5 9 Connecting to FREQROL A700 series 25 40 25 5 10 Connecting FREQROL A800 F800 series 25 41 25 5 11 Connecting sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX series 25 42 25 5 12 Connec...

Page 17: ...28 2 System Configuration 28 1 28 2 1 Direct connection to CPU 28 1 28 2 2 Ethernet connection 28 3 28 3 Connection Diagram 28 4 28 3 1 RS 232 cable 28 4 28 4 GOT Side Settings 28 5 28 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 28 5 28 4 2 Communication detail settings 28 5 28 4 3 Ethernet setting 28 6 28 5 CNC Side Settings 28 7 28 5 1 Ethernet Connection 28 7 MULTIPLE GOT CONNECT...

Page 18: ... Controller module 31 11 31 4 2 PX Developer GX Configurator 31 12 31 4 3 MT Developer MT Works2 31 13 31 4 4 MR Configurator MR Configurator2 31 14 31 4 5 FR Configurator 31 15 31 4 6 FX Configurator FP FX3U ENET L Configuration tool 31 15 31 4 7 RT ToolBox2 31 16 31 4 8 NC Configurator 31 16 31 5 GOT Side Settings 31 17 31 5 1 Setting communication interface 31 17 31 6 Personal Computer Side Set...

Page 19: ... 1 32 2 System Configuration 32 2 32 2 1 Connecting to X SEL SSEL ASEL PSEL 32 2 32 2 2 Connecting to PCON ACON SCON ERC2 32 4 32 3 Connection Diagram 32 18 32 3 1 RS 232 cable 32 18 32 3 2 RS 422 cable 32 21 32 4 GOT Side Settings 32 23 32 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 32 23 32 4 2 Communication detail settings 32 23 32 5 Robot Controller Side Setting 32 25 32 5 1 Con...

Page 20: ...85 Option board 33 37 33 2 21 Connecting to RS 422A converter 33 37 33 3 Ethernet Connection 33 38 33 3 1 System configuration 33 38 33 3 2 GOT side settings 33 40 33 3 3 PLC side setting 33 42 33 3 4 Precautions 33 43 33 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 33 43 34 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 34 1 Connectable Model List 34 1 34 2 System Configuration 34 2 34 2 1 Connecting to the THERMA...

Page 21: ...ce Communication settings 36 29 36 4 2 Communication detail settings 36 29 36 5 PLC Side Setting 36 30 36 5 1 Connecting to SU 5E 6B 36 30 36 5 2 Connecting to SU 5M 6M 36 31 36 5 3 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 series or DirectLOGIC 06 series 36 31 36 5 4 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 205 series 36 31 36 5 5 Connecting to PZ Series 36 31 36 5 6 Connecting to U 01DM 36 32 36 5 7 Connecting to D0 DCM 36...

Page 22: ...8 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 38 13 38 4 2 Communication detail settings 38 13 38 5 PLC Side Setting 38 14 38 5 1 Connecting to JW 22CU JW 70CUH JW 100CUH or JW 100CU 38 14 38 5 2 Connecting to JW 32CUH JW 33CUH or Z 512J 38 15 38 5 3 Connecting to the link unit JW 21CM 38 15 38 5 4 Connecting to the link unit JW 10CM or ZW 10CM 38 16 38 6 Device Range that Can Be Se...

Page 23: ...4 GOT Side Settings 40 16 40 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 40 16 40 4 2 Communication detail settings 40 16 40 5 Controller Side Setting 40 17 40 5 1 Connecting to LT230 LT300 Series 40 17 40 5 2 Connecting to LT400 LT830 Series 40 17 40 5 3 Connecting to DZ1000 DZ2000 Series 40 17 40 5 4 Connecting to DB1000 DB2000 Series 40 18 40 5 5 Connecting to GT120 Series 40 18 ...

Page 24: ...ecting to TS2000 TS2100 42 7 42 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 42 8 43 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 43 1 Connectable Model List 43 1 43 2 System Configuration 43 1 43 2 1 Connecting to MINAS A4 MINAS A4F MINAS A4L MINAS A5 series 43 1 43 3 Connection Diagram 43 3 43 3 1 RS 232 cable 43 3 43 3 2 RS 485 cable 43 4 43 4 GOT Side Settings 43 5 43 4 1 Setting communication interface Communic...

Page 25: ...to 252 series H series board type or EH 150 series 45 5 45 3 Connection Diagram 45 8 45 3 1 RS 232 cable 45 8 45 3 2 RS 422 cable 45 9 45 4 GOT Side Settings 45 11 45 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 45 11 45 4 2 Communication detail settings 45 11 45 5 PLC Side Setting 45 13 45 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 45 14 46 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 46 1 Connectable Model List ...

Page 26: ... 10 48 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 48 10 48 4 2 Communication detail settings 48 10 48 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 48 11 48 5 1 Connecting to PXR3 4 5 9 48 11 48 5 2 Connecting to PXG4 5 9 48 11 48 5 3 Connecting to PXH9 48 11 48 5 4 Connecting to interface converter RC 77 48 12 48 5 5 Connecting to interface converter SI 30A 48 12 48 5 6 Connecting to inte...

Page 27: ...C11 1N F3LC11 2N F3LC11 2F 50 16 50 2 9 Connecting to PC link module F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F 50 17 50 2 10 Connecting to PC link module LC01 0N LC02 0N 50 18 50 2 11 Connecting to STARDOM 50 19 50 2 12 Precautions 50 20 50 3 Ethernet Connection 50 21 50 3 1 System configuration for connecting to FA M3 M3V 50 21 50 3 2 GOT side settings 50 22 50 3 3 PLC side setting 50 23 50 3 4 Connecting to Ethernet ...

Page 28: ... Connecting to NX series 52 27 52 3 Connection Diagram 52 28 52 3 1 RS 232 cable 52 28 52 3 2 RS 485 cable 52 30 52 4 GOT Side Settings 52 36 52 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 52 36 52 4 2 Communication detail settings 52 36 52 5 Control Equipment Side Setting 52 38 52 5 1 Connecting to DMC10 52 38 52 5 2 Connecting to SDC40A 40B 40G 52 38 52 5 3 Connecting to SDC15 SDC...

Page 29: ...ce Communication settings 53 37 53 4 2 Communication detail settings 53 37 53 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 53 38 53 5 1 Connecting to H PCP J 53 38 53 5 2 Connecting to H PCP A H PCP B 53 39 53 5 3 Connecting to Z TIO Z DIO Z CT 53 40 53 5 4 Connecting to Z COM 53 41 53 5 5 Connecting to CB Series 53 42 53 5 6 Connecting to FB Series 53 42 53 5 7 Connecting to RB Series 53 43 53 5 8 Conne...

Page 30: ...422 cable 55 19 55 4 GOT Side Settings 55 24 55 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 55 24 55 4 2 Communication detail settings 55 24 55 5 PLC Side Setting 55 25 55 5 1 Connecting to Series 90 30 55 25 55 5 2 Connecting to VersaMaxMicro 55 25 55 5 3 Connecting to IC693CMM311 55 26 55 5 4 Connecting to IC697CMM711 55 26 55 5 5 Station number setting 55 26 55 6 Device Range tha...

Page 31: ...e settings 58 6 58 2 5 PLC side setting 58 7 58 2 6 Precautions 58 8 58 3 Ethernet Connection 58 9 58 3 1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 300 400 series Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE 58 9 58 3 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 1200 Ethernet connection type OP communication 58 10 58 3 3 GOT side settings 58 12 58 3 4 PLC side setting 58 14 58 3...

Page 32: ...1 Microcomputer Connection Ethernet 62 1 62 2 System Configuration 62 1 62 2 1 For the microcomputer connection Ethernet 62 1 62 3 Device Data Area 62 2 62 3 1 D devices 62 3 62 3 2 R devices 62 6 62 3 3 L devices 62 7 62 3 4 M devices 62 7 62 3 5 SD devices 62 8 62 3 6 SM devices 62 11 62 4 Message Formats 62 13 62 4 1 Data format type and application 62 13 62 4 2 List of commands 62 14 62 4 3 Fo...

Page 33: ...DBUS TCP equipment 64 1 64 3 GOT Side Settings 64 2 64 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 64 2 64 3 2 Communication detail settings 64 2 64 3 3 Ethernet setting 64 3 64 4 PLC side setting 64 3 64 5 Device Range that Can Be Set 64 4 64 6 Example of Connection 64 5 64 6 1 Connecting to SCHNEIDER PLC Modicon Premium series and Modicon Quantum series 64 5 64 6 2 Connecting to Y...

Page 34: ...A 32 ...

Page 35: ...ed in CD ROM SH 080871ENG 1D7MC5 GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080861ENG 1D7MB1 GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080863ENG 1D7MB3 Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Setting available functions o...

Page 36: ...eviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT155 GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT157 GT156 GT155 GT145 GT1455 Q Abbreviation of GT1455 QTBDE GT1455 QTBD GT1450 Q Abbreviation of GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QMBD GT1450 QLBDE GT1450 QLBD GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455 Q GT1450 Q GT1275 GT127...

Page 37: ... 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z 1 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 3 Interface converter unit GT15 75IF900...

Page 38: ...For GT14 GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSGB GT14 50PSCW GT14 50PSGW For GT12 GT11 70PSCB GT11 65PSCB For GT11 GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW GT11H 50PSC For GT10 GT10 50PSCB GT10 50PSGB GT10 50PSCW GT10 50PSGW GT10 40PSCB GT10 40PSGB GT10 40PSCW GT10 40PSGW GT10 30PSCB GT10 30PSGB GT10 30PSCW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSCB GT10 20PSGB GT10 20PSCW GT10 20PSGW Protective cover for oil GT05 90PCO GT05...

Page 39: ...tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C GPPW E EV SW D5F GPPW E type software package GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN VIEWER E type software package PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SW DNC MTW2 ...

Page 40: ...al Systems Co Ltd SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co Ltd PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller...

Page 41: ...ter Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 5 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the button when settings are completed 5 3 2 Communication detail settings 1 Bus Q 2 Bus A QnA POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings ...

Page 42: ...onfiguration of equipment connected to GOT is shown The configuration of equipment connected to GOT is shown The configuration of the GOT connected to equipment is shown The configuration of the GOT connected to equipment is shown RS422 connection diagram 2 RS 422 connector conversion Cable QCPU GOT Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion ...

Page 43: ...ens are available user screen and utility screen 1 User Screen The user screen is a screen created by drawing software The objects such as Touch switch Lamp display Comment display and Numerical display can be arbitrarily placed on the display Moreover multiple screens created by drawing software can be displayed individually or overlapped with each other For details refer to the following GT Desi...

Page 44: ... 115 2kbps High speed display and high speed touch switch response The operation performance is improved by the analog touch panel 3 More efficient GOT operations including screen design startup adjustment management and maintenance works The 9MB built in flash memory is included as standard SD card interface is included as standard RS 232 interface is included as standard RS 422 interface is incl...

Page 45: ...er3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Wire for the GOT power supply and the controller 9 HANDLING OF POWER WIRING AND SWITCH 21 to 65 Wire for the controller power supply and I O Controller manuals Turn on the power of GOT and controller Install the OS to GOT 17 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Check that t...

Page 46: ...1 4 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features ...

Page 47: ...YSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall Configuration 2 1 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall Configuration The overall configuration of GT14 Handy is as follows The GT14 Handy cannot be connected to a bar code reader or a printer USB memory Battery SD card Drawing PC Commercially available GOT Connector conversion box Protective sheet CC Link interface unit ...

Page 48: ... 16 scales 5 65536 colors Display color type Q 320 240 QVGA Resolution Type D DC24V Power type E Built in Ethernet Communication interface T TFT color High intensity wide angle view M TFT monochrome Display device type B Black HS Handy type GT14 B T D E G T H 50 Dedicated for 5 7 H For Handy GOT 16 Dedicated for GT16 15 Dedicated for GT15 14 Dedicated for GT14 11 Dedicated for GT11 10 Dedicated fo...

Page 49: ... and Relay cable Connector Conversion Box GT11H CNB 37S GT16H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 1 Connector conversion box connection side Relay cable connection side D Sub 37 pin 3m GT11H C60 37P 1 Connector conversion box connection side Relay cable connection side D Sub 37 pin 6m GT11H C100 37P 1 Connector conversion box connection side Relay cable connection side D Sub 37 pin 10m External cable for connec...

Page 50: ...al adaptor connection GT01 C30R2 25P 3m For connecting FXCPU special adaptor D Sub 25 pins and Connector Conversion Box Computer link connection cable GT09 C30R2 9P 3m For connecting computer link module serial communication module and Connector Conversion Box GT09 C30R2 25P 3m Product name Model name Cable length Contents RS 422 cable GT09 C30R40101 9P 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box t...

Page 51: ...P 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to Sharp PLC GT09 C30R20602 15P 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to Sharp PLC Product name Model name Cable length Description RS 422 cable GT09 C30R40501 15P 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to TOSHIBA PLC GT09 C100R40501 15P 10m GT09 C30R40502 6C 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to TOSHIBA PLC GT09 C100R40502 6C 10m GT09 ...

Page 52: ...ble GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to FUJI FA RS 232C interface card RS 232C 485 interface capsule general purpose interface module RS 422 cable GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m Product name Model name Cable length Description RS 232 cable GT09 C30R20901 25P 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to Panasonic RS422 232C conversion adapter GT09 C30R2090...

Page 53: ...0303 6T 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to YOKOGAWA temperature controller GT09 C100R40303 6T 10m GT09 C30R40304 6T 3m GT09 C100R40304 6T 10m RS 232 cable GT09 C30R20301 9P 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to YOKOGAWA CPU port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable GT09 C30R20302 9P 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to YOKOGAWA PC link module GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m For connecting...

Page 54: ...del name Description Battery 4 GT11 50BAT For clock data alarm history recipe data time action setting value advanced alarm advanced recipe logging hard copy and SRAM user area backups Product name Model name Description Protective sheet GT14H 50PSC Display section clear 5 sheets Transparent protective sheet which protects the display section only Product name Model name Description Emergency stop...

Page 55: ... generated in the environment where the equipment is used In pollution degree 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation Item Specifications Operating ambient temperature Display section 0 to 40 Other than display section 0 to 40 Storage ambient temperature 20 to 60 Operating ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH non condensing Storage ambient humi...

Page 56: ...4VDC resistance load Maximum rating 0 3A 24VDC induction load Life 100 000 times Emergency stop switch 1 switch single wiring IDEC XA1E BV303R 3 N C contacts Maximum rating 1A 24VDC resistance load Maximum rating 0 3A 24VDC induction load Life 100 000 times Keylock switch 2 position switch 1 switch single wiring IDEC AS6M 2KT1PB 2 notch type Manual stop at each position A key can be inserted and r...

Page 57: ... panel simultaneously in 2 points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the panel in 2 points or more simultaneously Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section An analog resistive film type touch panel does not require adjustment...

Page 58: ...tions GT1455HS QTBDE GT1450HS QMBDE Input power supply voltage DC24V 10 15 Power consumption 8 4W or less 350mA DC24V 7 5W or less 310mA DC24V At backlight off 7 0W or less 290mA DC24V Inrush current 30A or less maximum load 2ms Permissible instantaneous power failure time Within 5ms Noise immunity Noise voltage 1000Vp p Noise width 1 s by noise simulator of 30 to 100Hz noise frequency Dielectric ...

Page 59: ...ries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States POINT POINT POINT Battery life and replacement time 1 Battery life reference Approx 5 years in actual use Ambient temperature 25 C Battery replacement time reference 4 to 5 years The battery is susceptible to natural discharge Order one when necessary 2 Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility Refer to the following fo...

Page 60: ...3 6 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 Battery specifications ...

Page 61: ...and the user creation screen 3 Operation switch 6 switches Switch for external direct wiring independent contact 4 Emergency stop switch Switch for external direct wiring independent contact 5 POWER LED Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving and backlight not lit Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied 6 Display LED for grip switch D...

Page 62: ...e Handy GOT in hand by putting a hand under the strap Length adjustable 5 Grip switch Switch for external direct wiring independent contact 6 Rating plate The following contents are described The model name current consumption product number H W version F W version and MAC address and G G indicates the ROHS correspondence 7 Battery For clock data alarm history recipe data time action setting value...

Page 63: ...ing of environmental protection back cover Opening Closing 1 Loosen the environmental protection back cover screws at four points to remove the cover 1 Mount the environmental protection back cover and tighten the screws with the following torque Too much tightening may cause damage Tightening torque 0 36 to 0 48 N m Environmental protection back cover screw Environmental protection back cover scr...

Page 64: ... card is inserted 3 USB interface Host For data transfer data storage connector type TYPE A 4 USB interface Device For PC connection connector type MINI B 5 SD card interface For installing the SD card to the GOT 6 SD card access switch Prohibits accessing the SD card removing the card from the Handy GOT ON SD card being accessed SD card removal prohibited OFF SD card not accessed SD card removal ...

Page 65: ... QMBDE series 1 GT16H CNB 37S External cable GT11H C30 37P GT11H C60 37P GT11H C100 37P 4 Cable must be properly installed and routed to ensure protection of the Cable 1 Hardware version B or later 2 Hardware version D or later 3 Version B or later 4 Version D or later POINT POINT POINT Checking method of hard ware version Confirm the hardware version with the products rating plate General notes o...

Page 66: ... shown below 1 The GOT is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel The above test items are conducted in the condition where the GOT is installed on the conductive control panel and combined with the Mitsubishi PLC 2 QP Quasi peak value Mean Average value 3 The above test items are conducted in the following conditions 30M 230MHz QP...

Page 67: ...relieve the noise the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna Note A long conductor will become a more efficient antenna at high frequency 3 Shock protection In order to prevent those who are unfamiliar with power facility e g an operator from getting a shock make sure to take the following measures on the control p...

Page 68: ... cable by the user and configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device POINT POINT POINT 1 System configuration GT14 Handy conforms to the EMC Directive only when used in the connection type above via connector conversion box 2 Connected devices If connecting to the PLC or microcomputer other than Mitsubishi products MELSEC Q series MELSEC L series MELSEC QnA...

Page 69: ... cable GT14H C30 42P GT14H C60 42P GT14H C100 42P GT11H C30 37P GT11H C60 37P GT11H C100 37P Ver C or later 2 Direct connection cable 3 Ethernet connection cable Shielded twisted pair cable STP 4 PLC manufactured by other company microcomputer temperature controller inverter servo amplifier CNC MODBUS R RTU or MODBUS R TCP connection Produce the cable RS 232 cable RS 422 485 cable for connecting t...

Page 70: ... instructions the system may not comply with EMC directives Power and ground wires wiring method 1 Power and ground wires wiring method Connect the power wire and connection cable as shown in the illustration and be sure to attach a ferrite core TDK Corporation type ZCAT3035 1330 within the range shown below Lead the power wire and ground wire as shown in 5 2 1 Control panel 2 Be sure to ground th...

Page 71: ...er the manufacturer of the machinery must finally determine how to make it comply with the EMC Directives if it is actually compliant with the EMC Directives a For RS 422 485 cable Each signal wire excluding SG and FG should be made into a two power wires and connected then twisted Make the SG wire more than two wires and connect b For RS 232 cable Use a twisted pair style for each signal wire exc...

Page 72: ...5 8 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 2 EMC Directive ...

Page 73: ...Results of Third Party SD Cards on GT14 Model Hime T P 0089 separately available or contact your local distributor 6 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card Install remove the SD card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or SD card access switch is OFF Installing Model Description L1MEM 2GBSD SD memory card 2GB L1MEM 4GBSD SDHC memory card 4GB Commercially available SD card 1 1 Open t...

Page 74: ...r in the arrow pointing direction 2 Set the SD card access switch of the GOT to OFF Make sure that the SD card access LED turns off When the SD card access LED turns off the SD card can be installed or removed even during the GOT power on 3 Push in the SD card all the way inside and leave your finger then remove the SD card 4 Close the interface environmental protection cover Front SD card inserti...

Page 75: ... Card 6 3 POINT POINT POINT Precautions for removing the SD card 1 While the SD card access LED is on do not install remove the SD card or power off the GOT To do so may cause data corruption or malfunction 2 When ejecting the SD card support it by hand since it may pop out Failure to do so may cause a fall of the SD card leading to failure or damage of the card ...

Page 76: ...e models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT 1000 series GOT A 0010 separately available or contact your local distributor 6 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 1 When USB memory is accurately inserted to the USB interface the GOT automatically recognizes it Refer to the follow...

Page 77: ...the GT14 Handy is shipped from the factory 6 3 1 Applicable battery The following battery is applicable for GT14 Handy GOT 6 3 2 Battery replacement procedure Periodically replace a battery with reference to 3 4 Battery specifications Model Contents GT11 50BAT Battery for clock data alarm history recipe data time action setting value advanced alarm advanced recipe logging hard copy and SRAM user a...

Page 78: ...ental protection back cover and tighten the screws Tightening torque 0 36 to 0 48 N m Too much tightening may cause damage 7 Turn the GOT power on 8 Check if the battery condition is normal with the utility Refer to the following for the details of battery status display 12 1 Display Setting Connector for battery connection Battery Circuit board Insertion direction Lead Black Lead Red Battery Envi...

Page 79: ...of the protection sheet visually by to the daily inspection The visibility becomes worse when there is too much dirt and cracks causing malfunction Proceeds replacement promptly Product name Model Contents Protective sheet GT14H 50PSC Protective sheet for GOT Clear 5 sheets 1 If the protective sheet has been already attached to the GOT remove the old one from the GOT display section holding the lo...

Page 80: ...ing procedure Product name Model Contents Emergency stop SW guard cover GT14H 50ESCOV Mounting screw M3 6 1 accessory 1 Remove the Handy GOT from the device or turn the entire system power off Make sure that the device does not operate even if the emergency stop of the Handy GOT is activated while mounting the emergency stop SW guard cover 2 Fit the screw holes of the emergency stop SW guard cover...

Page 81: ...VDC When excluding the consumption current of Handy GOT Inrush current 25A or less at max load 2ms Permissible instantaneous power failure time Within 5ms Item Contact rating Specifications Operation switch SW1 to SW6 10mA 24VDC resistance load only Each contact coordinates the operation switch status of Pressed close Not pressed open When the external cable is not connected contacts are always op...

Page 82: ...Handy GOT SW1 to 6 the grip switch DSW 1 2 and the keylock switch KSW 1 2 with M3 terminal and the cover 10 External connection device communication connector RS 232 D Sub 9pin male connector model name JES 9P 2A3A JST or equivalent Cannot be used When the GT14 Handy is used in the RS 232 RS 422 connection use the connector conversion box GT11H CNB 37S 6 6 3 Connector Conversion Box GT11H CNB 37S ...

Page 83: ...IVE 6 OPTION 7 INSTALLATION 8 COMMUNICATION CABLE 6 OPTION 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 6 11 External dimensions of the connector conversion box GT16H CNB 42S Unit mm inch 55 2 17 56 2 21 110 4 34 126 4 97 about 65 2 56 about 130 5 12 External cable connected Space required for connecting the cable ...

Page 84: ...he panel face and fix it with four M4 screws prepared by user In the Connector Conversion Box thread of M4 6 mm in depth is cut in each mounting hole Prepare four M4 mounting screws separately while considering the thickness of the panel face Tighten the mounting screw with the specified torque Tightening screws too much may cause damage Make sure that interfering objects are not located within 65...

Page 85: ... Tightening screws too much may cause damage 3 Installation on the DIN rail Install the Connector Conversion Box on the DIN rail with using its DIN rail hook The clearance between screws for installing the DIN rail should be 150 mm or less Tightening torque 0 69 to 0 88 N m Applicable DIN rail DIN46277 width 35mm M4 screw and nut 4 sets prepared by user 4 4 5 0 18 Unit mm inch 118 4 43 6 DIN rail ...

Page 86: ... assignment and signal names The 42 pin connector of the external cable is converted to the PLC connection connector module jack and the following terminal block Connector for Handy GOT 42pin Connector female Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2 External device communication connector Ethernet RJ 45 ...

Page 87: ...on switches grip switch keylock switch GT16H CNB 42S Application Terminal block 1 Terminal No Signal name 1 24VDC 24VDC power supply 2 FG Frame ground 3 24VDC 24VDC power supply 4 Disable 5 6 7 8 9 ES3B For Emergency stop switch 10 ES3B 11 ES3A 12 ES3A 13 ES2B 14 ES2B 15 ES2A 16 ES2A 17 ES1B 18 ES1B 19 ES1A 20 ES1A GT16H CNB 42S Application Terminal block 2 Terminal No Signal name 1 SW COM For Ope...

Page 88: ...d OFF Connect the external cable with the Connector Conversion Box in the same procedure as connecting the external cable with Handy GOT Refer to the following 8 2 4 Installing and removing of external cable Wire size For power supply 0 75mm2 or more For grounding 2mm2 or more Solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 Applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A Tightening torque 0...

Page 89: ...e the ID number recognition function GT14 Handy acquires the ID number by using the RS 232 interface built in the GT14 Handy to connect with the connector conversion box via MODBUS RTU connection Only when GT14 Handy connects with the connected equipment via Ethernet the ID recognition function is available Although GT14 Handy does not support the multi channel function including both the RS232 co...

Page 90: ...iver MODBUS RTU in addition to the Ethernet communication driver to be used to communicate with the connected equipment 3 Make the connected equipment settings of the RS 232 interface Select MODBUS RTU as the communication driver and set the followings in the connected equipment detailed setting 3 Reading the ID number ID number can be read to Handy GOT by connecting Handy GOT to the Connector Con...

Page 91: ...ored 1 Setting the ID number 2 Switch the serial communication interface of the Handy GOT Open the environment protection cover on the back of the main unit and connect the PLC communication cable connector to the Ethernet connector to establish the Ethernet communication Configuring the setting above enables the communication with the connector conversion box as well 3 Install the communication d...

Page 92: ...No Switching to set the device specifying the station No of the connected PLC Here an example when the GOT internal device GD500 is set is explained 5 Set the status observation function Operation trigger setting Set the GOT internal device GB40 always ON during the GOT operation as the conditional trigger of the status observation function 1 If Common Status Observation from the menu is selected ...

Page 93: ... Operation setting Store the rotary switch value into the station No switching device GD500 The station No switching device value is an unsigned 16bits data where the upper 8bits are the network No and the lower 8bits are the PC No 1 Set Data Set 16bit to Action and Unsigned BIN to Data in the Action tab 2 Set a station No switching device GD500 to Device 3 To set the rotary switch value of the co...

Page 94: ...ed register to access to the rotary switch of the connector conversion box by the MODBUS communication 6 Check that 2 300001 is displayed at Device Indirect in the Action tab 7 Tick the check box of Fixed and enter 256 In this example since N W No is fixed to 1 256 is entered For fixed values enter the value of 256 N W No Click the OK button when entering is completed 8 After checking that both Tr...

Page 95: ...selected the Screen Property dialog box is displayed Tick the check box of Switch Station No in the Basic tab Perform this operation in all screens where the station No is switched 7 Place objects on the screen Finally place objects on the screen Select Host to the network device of the objects When the station No switching device value is 0 the host is monitored The setting is completed with the ...

Page 96: ...andy GOT 3 Mounting hole for M3 screw Allows to fix the Connector Conversion Box on the panel face directly or through a mounting bracket 4 Terminal block for power supply and operation switches Connects the operation switches and the 24V DC power supply of the Handy GOT 5 Terminal block for emergency stop switch grip switch keylock switch Connects the emergency stop switch grip switch keylock swi...

Page 97: ... of the panel face and fix it with four M3 screws prepared by user In the Connector Conversion Box thread of M3 6 mm in depth is cut in each mounting hole Prepare four M3 mounting screws separately while considering the thickness of the panel face Tighten the mounting screw with the specified torque Make sure that interfering objects are not located within 100 mm from the rear face so that the con...

Page 98: ...d torque 2 Mounting on the panel face Mount the Connector Conversion Box on the panel face Drill screw holes on the panel face as follows Tighten the mounting screw with the specified torque Tightening torque 0 49 to 0 68 N m Mounting screw accessory M3 screw 3 pieces Mounting bracket accessory Tightening torque 0 69 to 0 88 N m M4 screw and nut 3 sets prepared by user 10 0 39 32 1 25 32 1 25 84 3...

Page 99: ...ine for PLC communication For wiring refer to the chapter corresponding to the connected controller 2 6 RXD RDA 3 4 RTS RSA 4 8 CTS CSA 5 10 SG 6 3 TXD SDB 7 7 RXD RDB 8 5 RTS RSB 9 9 CTS CSB GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C 37P Application Connector for PLC RS 232 Connector for Handy GOT D Sub 37pin Signal name 1 N C Signal line for PLC communication For wiring refer to the chapter corresponding to the conn...

Page 100: ...pply 2 1 FG Frame ground 3 18 19 DC24 24VDC power supply 4 N C Disable 5 N C 6 34 SW6 For Operation switch 7 33 SW5 8 16 SW4 9 15 SW3 10 14 SW2 11 13 SW1 12 12 SW COM Terminal block 2 1 31 ES 3 3 For Emergency stop switch 2 32 ES 3 3 3 N C Disable 4 30 KSW 2 For Keylock switch 5 29 KSW 1 6 28 KSW C 7 27 DSW 2 For Grip switch 8 26 DSW 2 9 25 DSW 1 10 24 DSW 1 11 23 ES 2 For Emergency stop switch 12...

Page 101: ...andy GOT 3 Installation hole Used to fix the connector conversion box to a panel directly or to a board with the mounting fixtures For M3 screw 4 Terminal block for the power supply and operation switch Connects the 24VDC power supply of Handy GOT and the operation switch SW1 to 6 With M3 terminal and the cover 5 Terminal block for the emergency stop switch the grip switch and the selector switch ...

Page 102: ...ad of M3 6mm in depth is cut in each mounting hole Prepare four M3 mounting screws separately while considering the thickness of the panel face Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Make sure that interfering objects are not located within 50mm from the rear face so that the connector of a PLC cable is not hindered To wire the terminal block keep a space of 25mm or more on ...

Page 103: ...n box Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range 1 Installing on the panel face Install the connector conversion box on the panel face mounting surface Drill a mounting slot of the following size on the panel face Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Tightening torque 0 49 to 0 68N m Tightening torque 0 69 to 0 88N m Mounting screw accessory M3 3 Mountin...

Page 104: ...e D Sub 37pin connector of the external cable is converted to the PLC connection connector module jack and the following terminal block Connector for Handy GOT M2 6 Metric screw thread D Sub 37pin female 1 19 20 37 External connection device communication connector Ethernet RJ 45 Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2 ...

Page 105: ...me ground 3 18 19 DC24 24VDC power supply 4 N C Not used 5 N C 6 34 SW6 For Operation switch 7 33 SW5 8 16 SW4 9 15 SW3 10 14 SW2 11 13 SW1 12 12 SW COM Terminal block 2 1 31 ES 3 For Emergency stop switch 2 32 ES 3 3 N C Not used 4 30 KSW 2 For Keylock switch 5 29 KSW 1 6 28 KSW C 7 27 DSW 2 For grip switch 8 26 DSW 2 9 25 DSW 1 10 24 DSW 1 11 23 ES 2 For Emergency stop switch 12 22 ES 2 13 21 ES...

Page 106: ...hich are packed together Holes of 4 5 are drilled for mounting the with wall mounting Attachment Tighten the mounting screws at a specified torque If the mounting screws are tightened too much not only the mounting screws but also the with wall mounting Attachment may be damaged Make sure that interfering objects are not present in the downward direction so that connection of the external connecti...

Page 107: ...MC DIRECTIVE 6 OPTION 7 INSTALLATION 8 COMMUNICATION CABLE 6 OPTION 6 7 With wall mounting Attachment 6 35 6 7 3 Attachment of GT14 handy GOT The figure shows an image of attaching the GT14 handy GOT to the wall hanging fixture Post Post Mounted image as viewed from the side Panel surface ...

Page 108: ...6 36 6 OPTION 6 7 With wall mounting Attachment ...

Page 109: ...to from the panel Always turn off the power ON OFF switch on the connector conversion box before connecting or disconnecting the GOT to it Connecting or disconnecting the GOT with the power being turned on may result in damage to the unit or malfunctions CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shoc...

Page 110: ...ing on the weight of the GOT approx 0 79kg main unit and the length of the connection cable Take the load into a consideration to attach a fitting on the wall 7 1 3 Placing on a desk or a floor When placing the Handy GOT on a desk or floor pay attention to the following Keep the GOT main unit horizontal to the desktop not to fall from and fix the connection cable to the desk etc Hook for hanging o...

Page 111: ...LC connection cable For the cable selection refer to the following 8 COMMUNICATION CABLE 21 to 65 2 Panel cutting dimensions for Connector Conversion Box The Connector Conversion Box can be installed on the panel face directly or with mounting bracket offered as an accessory For details on installing procedure and panel cutting dimensions refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box Handy G...

Page 112: ...ions for Connector Conversion Box The Connector Conversion Box can be installed on the panel face directly or with mounting bracket offered as an accessory For details on installing procedure and panel cutting dimensions refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box Handy GOT Control panel or operation panel PLC Refer to this section 6 6 for panel cutting dimensions 1 2 3 Name Description 1 ...

Page 113: ...tion method and controller For the cable selection refer to the following 8 COMMUNICATION CABLE If relay cables other than the above are required create them by users To use the external cables which include unfastened cables on one side GT11H C30 GT11H C60 GT11H C100 refer to the following and connect them according to the application 8 COMMUNICATION CABLE Handy GOT Control panel or operation pan...

Page 114: ...wing dimensions Insert a jack socket into a round hole and fix it with a M3 nut supplied with the relay cable 63 5 2 5 59 1 2 33 or more 4 R3 4 0 14 10 11 4 or more 2 3 2 0 1 The part in gray indicates cut portions Unit mm inch Panel thickness 0 8 to 1 3 0 031 to 0 051 Jack socket Connecting to the external cable Cable side M3 nut Mounting panel face M2 6 M3 4 8 0 19 Jack socket ...

Page 115: ...hich connects a Connector Conversion Box and a controller There are several types which can be selected according to a controller However this cable must be prepared by the user depending on the controller to be used Name Model name Length Remark External cable GT14H C30 42P 3m Connector conversion box GT16H CNB 42S con nection side 42 pins GT14H C60 42P 6m GT14H C100 42P 10m GT11H C30 32P 3m GT11...

Page 116: ... GT11H C15R4 8P 1 1 5m For FX PLC connection PLC side MINI DIN 8pin GT11H C15R4 25P 1 1 5m For A QnA CPU FX1 FX2 FX2C PLC connection PLC side D sub 25pin GT11H C15R2 6P 1 1 5m For Q CPU connection PLC side MINI DIN 6pin PLC connection cable for connecting between PLCs and Connecter Conversion Box Select or prepare appropriate cables for the communication method and controllers Name Model name Leng...

Page 117: ...the Ethernet connector The available connection type differs depending on the external cable to be used GT14H C 42P Ethernet connection GT11H C 37P RS 232 connection and RS 422 connection GT11H C RS 232 connection and RS 422 connection The Ethernet connection is selected at factory shipment For switching between the RS 232 connection and RS 422 connection at the Ethernet connection make sure to tu...

Page 118: ...und 11 Not used Not used 12 Core wire 2 AWG28 White red B SW COM common For Operation switch 13 White black B SW1 14 Gray red B SW2 15 Gray black B SW3 16 Pink black A SW4 17 Not used Not used 18 Core wire 4 AWG20 Black DC24G 24VDC power supply 19 Transition wiring with 18 DC24G 20 Core wire 3 AWG25 Purple ES 1 For Emergency stop switch 21 Orange ES 1 22 Gray ES 2 23 Blue ES 2 24 Brown DSW 1 For G...

Page 119: ...ng type Accessories Jack socket Nut 2 for each Ferrite core 1 equivalent to TOKIN ESD R 14S Ferrite core 2 equivalent to TOKIN ESD R 14S 1 5m 4 11 Ferrite core 3 equivalent to TDK ZCAT3035 1330 Label Connector for external cable connection D SUB 37Pin female From the engagement face 19 1 37 20 MINI DIN 8Pin male From the engagement face Connector for FX0 FX0S FX1S FX0N FX1N FX2N FX1NC or FX2NC con...

Page 120: ...e core 2 equivalent to TOKIN ESD R 14S Ferrite core 3 equivalent to TDK ZCAT2035 0930A Label Connector for QnA A FX1 FX2 or FX2C series connection D SUB 25Pin male From the engagement face 1 13 14 25 Connector for external cable connection D SUB 37Pin female From the engagement face 19 1 37 20 FG D SUB 25Pin male D SUB 37Pin female Hood Untied wires Wire for power supply operation switch and emerg...

Page 121: ...operation switches For power supply Ferrite core 1 equivalent to TOKIN ESD R 14S Ferrite core 2 equivalent to TOKIN ESD R 14S Ferrite core 3 equivalent to TDK ZCAT3305 1330 Label Connector for external cable connection D SUB 37Pin female From the engagement face 19 1 37 20 SHELL FG MINI DIN 6Pin male D SUB 37Pin female 4 1 2 3 5 6 Connector for Q series connection MINI DIN 6Pin male From the engag...

Page 122: ... to be used 8 2 4 Installing and removing of external cable Installation procedure of external cable GT14 Handy and GT11H S CCL side 1 Check that the 24VDC power to the external cable is OFF 2 Insert the connector adjusting the triangle marks of the main unit side connector and cable side connector The connectors are locked after the lever is inserted Removal procedure 1 Check that the 24VDC power...

Page 123: ... the connector adjusting the triangle marks of the main unit side connector and cable side connector 3 After inserting the connector push the lock lever The connecters are locked after the lever is pushed into Removal procedure 1 Check that the 24VDC power to the external cable is OFF 2 Pull up the lock lever with inserting a flat blade screwdriver into the release hole of the lock lever 3 The ext...

Page 124: ...8 10 8 COMMUNICATION CABLE 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable ...

Page 125: ...pplying 100 or less which is used exclusively for the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or...

Page 126: ...se filter etc to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high power motor drive circuit b Attach surge killers to the terminals on the No Fuse Breaker NFB electromagnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and generators to suppress noise interference 3 Releasing noise to the ground a Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground b Use a short and thick cable to lowe...

Page 127: ...spla y circuit Display se ction Touch panel CPU memory communi cation For PC connection RS 422 IF GRIP SW LED Output interface SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW COM ES 1 ES 1 ES 2 ES 2 ES 3 ES 3 DSW 1 KSW 1 RS 232 IF Ethernet IF DC24V DC24G FG Power supply Display LED Operation switch Emergency stop switch Grip switch Keylock switch 2 position SW USB IF Device USB IF Host SD card IF Connector for externa...

Page 128: ...24V Inrush current 30A or less at max load 2ms Cable Terminal No 24 24G FG External cable GT11H C 37P 36 37 Short circuit inside of the connector 18 19 Short circuit inside of the connector 1 GT11H C Red core wire 4 Black core wire 4 Shield 1 Relay cable 24 label 24G label FG label Connector conversion box Terminal block 1 1 Terminal block 1 3 Terminal block 1 2 2 To the Handy GOT operation switch...

Page 129: ...able and power line away from each other will help minimize noise interference Connecting the ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment to the panel to which the GOT is grounded When running a single ground cable from the panel that houses such piece of control equipment as a sequencer to the panel to which the GOT is grounded the ground cable may have to be directly connected to t...

Page 130: ...ns noise interference taking Remedy 2 may alleviate it Remedy1 1 Remedy1 2 FG Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible Panel grounding Connection cable Connector conversion box FG Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible Connection cable Panel grounding Connector conversion box FG Ground cable from th...

Page 131: ...3 times if a ferrite core is used If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 2 1 is not feasible follow Remedy 2 2 When using the connector conversion box When using the external cable FG Ferrite core Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible Panel grounding Connection cable Connector conversion box FG Ferrite core Ground cable from the panel that house...

Page 132: ...e power line and communication cable out of the panel make two pullout holes away from each other and pull the cables through Putting both cables through the same pullout hole will increase noise interference Keep the power line and communication cable inside the duct at least 100 mm away from each other If that is not possible the use of a metal separator inside the duct can reduce noise interfer...

Page 133: ...reafter such as no fuse breakers electromagnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and induction motors surge noise interference is suspected If this problem happens keep the ground cable and communication cable away from the load If that is not possible an installation of a surge killer will help reduce noise interference Place the surge killer as close to the load as possible Remedy for AC induc...

Page 134: ...g independent contact 3 Grip switch DSW 1 DSW 2 Switch for external direct wiring independent contact 4 Keylock switch 2 position SW KSW 1 KSW 2 Switch for external direct wiring independent contact 2 Grip switch display LED POWER LED 1 4 3 The following switches require the connection to a PLC or a controller through an external cable Operation switch Emergency stop switch Grip switch Keylock swi...

Page 135: ...ector conversion box GT16H CNB 42S 1 The internal contact is closed when the power switch of the connector conversion box is turned OFF or the Connector Conversion Box is not supplied with the power POWER LED turns off Terminal block 2 1 Terminal block 1 ES3B ES2B ES2B ES1B Internal contact 1 ES1B ES3B For setting emergency stop status when GT14 Handy is removed For avoiding emergency stop status ...

Page 136: ...onversion box GT11H CNB 37S or GT16H CNB 37S Terminal block 1 Terminal block 1 External cable GT14 Handy Connector conversion box SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 KSW C KSW 1 KSW 2 DSW 1 DSW 1 DSW 2 DSW 2 ES 1 ES 1 SW COM ES 2 ES 2 ES 3 ES 3 1 2 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 7 8 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 14 ...

Page 137: ...osed when the power switch of the connector conversion box is turned OFF or the Connector Conversion Box is not supplied with the power POWER LED turns off Terminal block 2 PLC Example of FX series COM Terminal block 1 ES3B ES2B ES2B ES1B Internal contact 1 ES1B ES3B For setting emergency stop status when GT14 Handy is removed For avoiding emergency stop status when GT14 Handy is removed External ...

Page 138: ...minal block 2 PLC Example of FX series COM Terminal block 1 External cable GT14 Handy Connector conversion box SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 KSW C KSW 1 KSW 2 DSW 1 DSW 1 DSW 2 DSW 2 ES 1 SW COM ES 2 ES 3 ES 1 ES 2 ES 3 X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X010 X011 X020 To the external load 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 6 5 4 10 9 8 7 14 13 12 11 1 2 ...

Page 139: ... in the sequence program as general input devices The operation switch is loaded into the PLC as the momentary switch of the a contact In the case of handling the input as the b contact or the alternate switch create the input in the sequence program Model name Terminal No SW COM SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 Connector Conversion Box GT16H CNB 42S Terminal block 2 1 Terminal block 2 2 Terminal block 2 3...

Page 140: ...ox GT16H CNB 42S and CC Link interface unit GT11H CCL contain a parallel circuit to avoid emergency stop while the Handy GOT is being removed CC Link interface unit GT11H CCL does not require the wiring to the parallel circuit The connector conversion box GT16H CNB 42S requires the wiring to the parallel circuit The connector conversion box GT11H CNB 37S or GT16H CNB 37S does not include the paral...

Page 141: ...etween ES As coordinates with those of the emergency stop switch and the external cable When the Connector Conversion Box is not supplied with the power and the power switch is OFF POWER LED turns off Since the internal contact closes and the short circuit status occurs between ES Bs the status between ES As closes regardless of the status of the emergency stop switch and the external cable 2 When...

Page 142: ...e safety standards which are required 3 If a shock which exceeds the general specifications of the Handy GOT is applied a chattering may occurs in the emergency stop switch due to the structure of the switch Check your usage condition and decide whether to use or not Model name Terminal No ES1A or ES 1 ES1B ES2A or ES 2 ES2B ES3A or ES 3 ES3B Connector Conversion Box GT16H CNB 42S Terminal block 1...

Page 143: ... 1 When using the connector conversion box GT16H CNB 42S Set the load up to 24VDC 1A contact specification for each contact 2 When using the connector conversion box GT11H CNB 37S or GT16H CNB 37S Set the load up to 24VDC 1A contact specification for each contact Grip switch When released When half pressed When fully pressed OFF ON OFF Grip switch The grip switch is the 3 position system switch an...

Page 144: ...t Model name Terminal No DSW 1 DSW 1 DSW 2 DSW 2 Connector Conversion Box GT16H CNB 42S Terminal block 2 11 Terminal block 2 12 Terminal block 2 13 Terminal block 2 14 GT11H CNB 37S GT16H CNB 37S Terminal block 2 9 Terminal block 2 10 Terminal block 2 7 Terminal block 2 8 ...

Page 145: ...the grip switch is allocated to b6 7th bit from the lower of the device allocated to the external input and output function output information The LED is lit when the bit value is 1 and not lit when the bit value is 0 External input and output function output information read device 1 For example when D100 is set in the read device of system information the value in b6 of D101 is reflected to the ...

Page 146: ... Switch Wiring Pin layout Model name Terminal No KSW C KSW 1 KSW 2 Connector Conversion Box GT16H CNB 42S Terminal block 2 8 Terminal block 2 9 Terminal block 2 10 GT11H CNB 37S GT16H CNB 37S Terminal block 2 6 Terminal block 2 5 Terminal block 2 4 ...

Page 147: ...lling Standard monitor OS methods 1 When installing the BootOS and standard monitor OS standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance For the installation which uses GT Designer3 refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals For the installation which uses GOT refer to the following 17 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS USB interface o...

Page 148: ...st Inverting colors Operation Setting the buzzer volume and window move buzzer 12 2 Setting the key sensitivity and key reaction speed Changing security levels 12 2 4 Setting the utility call keys 12 2 5 Adjusting the touch panel 12 2 6 Setting the USB mouse and keyboard 12 2 7 VNC server function setting 12 2 8 Transparent mode Setting the channel No to be used for the communication for the FA tr...

Page 149: ... or moving logging files changing logging file names Deleting logging folders or creating a new logging folder 14 2 6 Memory card format Formatting a SD card or USB memory internal SRAM 14 2 7 Memory information Displaying the available memory of the GOT 14 2 8 USB device status display Displaying the status of USB device 14 2 9 SRAM control Confirming the SRAM user area usage backing up or restor...

Page 150: ...he main menu displays the setting screen or following selection screen for the item 2 System message switch button This button switches the language used for the utility screen and system alarms Touching the Language button displays the Select Language screen 1 Touch the button of a desired language and then OK button and the language is selected 2 Touching the button restarts the GOT and the lang...

Page 151: ... the language is switched to the selected one HINT HINT HINT 1 Selectable languages The system message switch button is displayed only for the selectable languages The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For the relation between the selectable languages and the fonts refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 2 5 Specifications...

Page 152: ...gner3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 4 9 GOT Display and Operation Setting GOT Environmental Setting GOT Setup POINT POINT POINT 1 Prohibited simultaneous 2 point presses Do not touch 2 points or more on the GOT screen simultaneously Touching 2 points or more simultaneously may activate a part other than the touched point 2 Pressing time of the utility call key When having set Pressing ...

Page 153: ...refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 4 When powering ON the system The Booting message is displayed after powering up After that keep pressing the upper left corner to display the main menu If the upper left corner is pressed before the display of the Booting message the OS installation function starts Therefore press the upper left corner after the Booting m...

Page 154: ...yed if the Close return button in the right corner of screen is touched returns to the previous screen If this button is touched when directly displayed from monitor screen the screen is closed and returns to monitor screen 3 Scroll button For screens in which the content does not fit on one screen page there is a right or down scroll button on the screen Scroll one line column Scroll window Scrol...

Page 155: ...y for inputting the numerical value Touching this button displays a keyboard on the GOT screen For the operation of keyboard refer to the next page c Move to another setting screen Touching this button moves to another setting screen For the setting method of each setting item refer to the setting operation of each setting screen 2 OK button Cancel button Close Return button Reflect or cancel the ...

Page 156: ...ch will not interrupt the inputting 3 Input numeric with keyboard 0 to 9 Key Input the numeric Enter Key Completes numeric input and closes the keyboard Cancel Key Cancels numeric input and closes the keyboard Key Moves the cursor to the right or left side Available only if any selectable item is at the right left side of the cursor Del Key Del key is used when canceling the input by 1 character k...

Page 157: ...ameters setting 11 1 Communication setting 11 1 1 Communication setting functions 11 1 2 Display operation of Communication Setting Function Description Reference Communication Setting The setting contents of the communication interface can be checked or changed 11 1 Ethernet setting The contents of the Ethernet setting can be checked and the host can be changed 11 13 Function Description Channel ...

Page 158: ...ration b When changing the assignment of the communication driver to the channel in the Utility Without using drawing software the assignment of communication drivers to channels can be changed When changing a communication driver the alternative communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance 2 Standard interface display BOX Display the communication interface included as standard in G...

Page 159: ...ed 5 Assign Ethernet I F The communication settings for the Ethernet connection can be made Only Ethernet interface built in model can display this button Ethernet I F Assignment can assign up to two channels per interface 11 1 4 Assign Ethernet I F operation POINT POINT POINT Precautions for communications between GOT and controller 1 Installing communication driver and downloading Communication ...

Page 160: ...tion After Communication Setting is executed the GOT automatically restarts If the project data is downloaded GOT starts monitoring the communication device after restarting Execute this setting after carefully confirming the safety 1 Install communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QJ71C24 to GOT Download of Communication Setting from drawing software is not required After installing communication dri...

Page 161: ...ated controller device 11 2 Communication Detail Setting 4 The screen returns to the Channel Driver assign screen and touch the OK button 5 Touch button to return to the Communication Setting screen 6 Confirm that the selected communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QJ71C24 is assigned 7 After confirming touch the OK button 8 Touching the button restarts the GOT and the GOT operates with the changed s...

Page 162: ...r the screen shown left is displayed touch the channel number specification menu BOX when changing the channel number 11 1 4 Channel number setting operation 3 For changing the parameter settings touch the driver display BOX 11 2 Communication Detail Setting 4 Touching the OK button reflects the changed settings Touching button returns the screen to the Communication Setting screen 5 Touch the OK ...

Page 163: ...ange the setting at communication detail setting of GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Function Description Communication parameters setting Set various communication parameters of communication devices The settable parameters differ according to the communication device Keyword Register For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be set Keyword D...

Page 164: ...tware Select Common Settings Communication Settings from GT Designer3 to enter the communication parameters for each communication driver When changing the communication parameters after downloading project data change the setting at communication detail setting of GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 Touch the Assign Ethernet I F button in Communication Setting 2 Touch th...

Page 165: ...entals Keyword settings of MELSEC FX On the communication detail setting screen of MELSEC FX registration deletion cancellation or protection of the keyword for FX series PLC can be executed 1 Regist Keyword is registered 1 Touching the Regist key displays the Registration Selection screen For a FX PLC 1 that is not compatible with the customer keyword the keyboard for the keyword input of is disp...

Page 166: ...er to the manual of the PLC used 2 Registration conclition Options can be selected among Read Write Protect Write Protect or All Protect For access restrictions of each setting refer to the manual of the PLC used 3 When Keyword and Customer Keyword is selected on the selection screen for registration and the keyword input is completed the Customer Keyword registration screen is the displayed When ...

Page 167: ...licability of monitoring for each keyword protection level The applicability of monitoring for each protection level is as follows 1 When the T C setting values are specified indirectly changing devices is available 3 Difference between All Protect and All operation prohibition When All Protect is selected both device display and input by the programming tool or GOT are prohibited When All operati...

Page 168: ...en the correct keyword is input and the Enter key is touched the protection is cancelled 4 Protect A keyword with cancelled protection is reactivated for protection 1 Touching the Protect key activates keyword protection Target PLC Setting FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to be deleted FX PLC not compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to be deleted only into keyword 2nd keyw...

Page 169: ... 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 11 3 Ethernet Setting 11 13 11 3 Ethernet Setting 11 3 1 Ethernet setting functions The contents of the Ethernet setting in drawing software can be checked The setting of the host station can be changed For Ethernet setting refer to the following GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 11 3 2 Display operation of Ethernet setting Mai...

Page 170: ... setting screen with the Restore default settings button The changed settings remain until they are canceled with the Restore default settings button The changed settings are not canceled even if writing the project data or OS to the GOT When the project data is written to the GOT without canceling the changed settings those changed settings are reflected to the Ethernet setting of the written pro...

Page 171: ...ING AND DISPLAY 14 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 15 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 16 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 11 3 Ethernet Setting 11 15 Change of host 1 Touch the device to be set as the host 2 Touch the OK button 3 Touching the button restarts the GOT and the GOT operates with the changed settings ...

Page 172: ...11 16 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 11 3 Ethernet Setting ...

Page 173: ...tion Setting the storage locations for backup data and backup settings and setting the maximum number of backup data 12 20 Setting the CPU No setting at backup to YES or NO 12 21 Trigger backup settings 12 22 Behavior of duplicate IPs Setting the GOT operation when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards 12 23 License management license registration ...

Page 174: ...ending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Setting 0 does not hide the title screen The title screen is always displayed for 4 seconds or longer which changes depending on the project data contents ...

Page 175: ... setting at the display setting of GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Screen save time Using the system information function can compulsorily switch the controller to the screen saving status Forced Screen Saver Disable Signal or disable the screen save time Automatic Screen Saver Disable Signal set with Utility GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 3 S...

Page 176: ...gner3 For the setting method of the system language switching device refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 3 Language Switching Device Setting GOT Environmental Setting Language Switching 1 Touching the setting items displays the Select Language screen 2 Touching the button of a desired language selects the language and returns the screen to the Display s...

Page 177: ...thout touching OK button displays the dialogue box shown on the left OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The display setting screen is displayed 3 Closing the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents 1 Touching the setting item changes the setti...

Page 178: ...justment screen 2 Brightness can be adjusted by touching key of brightness adjustment 3 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching button without touching OK button displays the dialogue box shown on the left OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The brightness contrast adjustment screen is displayed ...

Page 179: ...f buzzer sound and buzzer sound at window move To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Function Description Setting range Buzzer volume setting Buzzer volume setting can be changed OFF SHORT LONG At factory shipment SHORT Window move buzzer volume setting Whether turn...

Page 180: ...ON SETTINGS GOT SET UP 12 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 12 2 2 Display operation of Operation GOT setup Operation Touch GOT setup Touch Operation Main menu Touch an item to change settings 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 181: ...hen double touch is made when touching the GOT screen only once Decrease the reaction speed The relation between the Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed is as follows Touch panel calibration For touch panel calibration operation refer to the following 12 2 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration USB mouse keyboard setting For the USB mouse keyboard setting refer to ...

Page 182: ...estrictions on screen display The security level change screen cannot be displayed when project data do not exist in GOT Change the security level after downloading the project data to GOT Display operation of Security level change Security level setting Password setting GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT setup Operation Touch GOT setup Touch Operation Main menu Security l...

Page 183: ...original level after changing security level temporarily When use GOT after temporarily changing the security level do not forget to return the security level to the original level 1 By touching 0 to 9 A to F key the password of the changed security level is input 2 When correcting the input character touch Del key to delete the correcting character and input the password again 3 After inputting p...

Page 184: ...is prevents a switching to the utility by an unintentional operation POINT POINT POINT Operation setting by GT Designer3 Select Common Settings GOT Environment Settings GOT Setup from GT Designer3 to make the settings of the utility call key To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual...

Page 185: ...etting Pressing Time of the utility call key to 1 or more seconds When Pressing Time is set to 0 and the key position is set to the lower left corner the operation is as described below If the positions of the key and the advanced alarm popup display overlap the utility screen appears by switching the display position of the advanced alarm popup display For the advanced alarm popup display refer t...

Page 186: ... position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs correct the position with this function Display operation of Touch panel calibration Before adjustment After adjustment The Run will operate though you intended to touch the Stop button The Stop button can be touched without fail Run Stop Run Stop G...

Page 187: ...eration Setting Settings Regarding Operation 12 15 Touch panel calibration operation Touch the point displayed on the screen with the finger one by one to make the setting 1 Touch the center of the displayed on the upper left precisely 2 Touch the point displayed on the upper right 3 Touch the point displayed on the lower left 4 Touch the point displayed on the lower right 5 Touching the button di...

Page 188: ...B mouse keyboard on the GOT set the USB mouse keyboard Display operation of USB mouse keyboard USB mouse keyboard setting operation 1 To use the USB mouse touch the setting item of Use USB mouse The setting content is changed by touching YES NO Continued to next page GOT setup Operation Touch GOT setup Touch Operation Main menu USB mouse keyboard Touch USB mouse keyboard 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 189: ...ttings Regarding Operation 12 17 2 To move the mouse cursor to the touched position touch the setting item of Interlock with mouse cursor touch operation The setting content is changed by touching YES NO 3 To use the USB keyboard touch the setting item of Use USB keyboard The setting content is changed by touching YES NO 4 To use the USB keyboard touch the setting item of USB keyboard type The set...

Page 190: ...setting VNC server function setting operation 1 Operating priority guaranteed time Function Description Setting range Operating priority guaranteed time The time that the authorized equipment holds the authorization after you operate the authorized equipment can be set The unauthorized equipment cannot obtain the authorization until the set time elapses 0 to 3600 seconds At factory shipment 0 seco...

Page 191: ...ed can be specified For the multi channel function and FA transparent function refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 Display operation of Transparent mode Setting operation of transparent mode Function Description Setting range Ch No The channel No of a controller to which the FA transparent function is executed can be set 1 2 Default 1 1 ...

Page 192: ...can be selected A Built in SD Card E USB memory Default A Built in SD Card Drive for backup data The drive for storing backup data can be selected A Built in SD Card E USB memory Default A Built in SD Card Trigger backup setting The GOT automatically backs up data when triggers Rise Time specified for each backup setting are met None Rise Time Default None Max of backup data Set the maximum number...

Page 193: ...er backup setting refer to the following Trigger backup settings 3 Max of backup data 4 Enable CPU No setting 1 Touching the setting item changes the setting items 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching button returns the screen to the GOT Setup screen 1 Touching the setting items displays the keyboard Input numerical value from the keyboard Setting range 0 to 50 Default 10 Whe...

Page 194: ...g screen 4 When the trigger type is set to Time touching a setting item for Detail switches the screen to the trigger time setting screen In the screen specify the days and time that the GOT executes the backup None Rise Time None The GOT does not execute the trigger backup Rise The GOT backs up data when the trigger device turns on Time The GOT backs up data at the specified time The GOT backs up...

Page 195: ...nnect with the GOT the IP address duplication check may not be performed 2 When the GOT is added to the network in which a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT exists The GOT goes into offline status and displays the following dialog box When changing the IP address of another device which has the same IP address as that of the GOT After changing the IP address of another device whic...

Page 196: ... device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards A system alarm occurs Do not maintain a network connection The GOT is disconnected from the network when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents GOT...

Page 197: ...GOT cannot be communicated by IP address setting mistakes or intended actions by malicious users and the system control may be influenced by those errors Please change the setting of Behavior of duplicate IPs after carefully examining the necessity 2 Precautions for using a switching hub compatible with the spanning tree protocol For the switching hub port connected with the GOT configure the sett...

Page 198: ...ment screen License management function Registers deletes the license of the VNC server function For the details of the VNC server function refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Displaying the License management Item Description Setting range VNC server function Registers deletes the license of the VNC server function GOT setup License management Main Menu Tou...

Page 199: ...e number for the GOT POINT POINT POINT How to acquire a license number For how to acquire a license number please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative 1 Touch the license number input area on the license management screen and then the keyboard appears on the bottom of the screen 2 Touch the Regist button to register the input license number If the button i...

Page 200: ...12 28 12 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 12 6 License Management ...

Page 201: ...setting display screen the changed time is written in a programmable controller even though Adjust or Broadcast is set for Time setting As a result the time of the programmable controller can be changed on the GOT even though Adjust is set for Time setting The clock data of the controller set as Adjust CH No of Time setting in GOT Setup Clock Setting from GOT Environment Settings of GT Designer3 i...

Page 202: ... 2 Setting of clock setting and battery When selecting Broadcast or None in clock setting set the clock of the GOT once with connecting a battery to the GOT 3 Operation setting by GT Designer3 Carry out the setting of clock setting in GOT set up in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of G...

Page 203: ...f The day of the week is displayed automatically according to the input date The effective range of clock setting is as follows Jan 1 2000 to Dec 31 2037 Key Description to Input numeric value in cursor position Move the cursor Move the cursor to the left by one character when Del Key is touched while inputting year month day time minutes seconds Carry out nothing when touched other than when inpu...

Page 204: ...13 4 13 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 13 1 Time Setting and Display ...

Page 205: ...y voltage becomes low 1 The USB memory can be used from Utility 17 3 2 Installing using the program data control function Utility 2 When using the project data stored in the built in SD card A drive with the GOT hold the SD card installed to the GOT The USB memory cannot be activated directly from the E drive It can be used only for data storage Item Data type Storage location BootOS Built in flas...

Page 206: ...ta Extended alarm log file and alarm log file Built in SD card A drive Internal SRAM D drive USB drive E drive 1 Recipe data Advanced recipe file Recipe file Logging Logging file Image file Hard copy function Read Copy Copy PC GT Designer3 A drive Standard SD card SD card when installed in GOT Inserting Removing SD card when installed in PC C drive Built in flash memory D drive Built in SRAM Copy ...

Page 207: ...nitor OS communication driver or Option OS has already been installed the version information of the OS which has been installed and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed Moreover when the different versions will coexist among all OSs Standard monitor OS communication driver and Option OS by installing OS the installation disapproving dialog will be displayed and the ins...

Page 208: ...al number is automatically added to file names 6 Each function does not provide direct storage to the E drive Item Display screen Storage destination Drive name folder name BootOS OS information screen A drive C drive E drive G1BOOT 2 Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS system screen data A drive C drive E drive 3 G1SYS 2 Standard monitor OS system screen management information file Standard m...

Page 209: ...h data on the GOT as the project data will be deleted After installing the Boot OS or the Standard monitor OS reinstall download necessary data 2 Notes on handling OS files When the OS boot drive is set to A Built in SD card installing and uploading OS files are not available Display operation of OS information Function Description Reference Displaying file folder data The file folder type name da...

Page 210: ...ame The file name or folder name which is stored in the selected drive or folder is displayed When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding characters the 21st character or after are not displayed 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time The date and time when each ...

Page 211: ...1 Touching a drive in Select drive displays the information of the first folder of the touched drive 2 Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder 3 Touching a folder name of displays the information of the folder in one upper hierarchy 4 Touching button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching button scrolls up down the screen by one screen 5 Touc...

Page 212: ...all the SD card to which the BootOS or OS to install is written to the GOT For inserting removing method of SD card USB memory refer to the following 6 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 6 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 2 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive 3 Touching Install button starts the install 4 When the installation is completed the dialog...

Page 213: ...aded to the A drive Built in SD card and E drive USB drive The SD card after uploading can be used for installing the OS on another GOT 17 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS This item explains using the A drive 1 Install the SD card used as the uploading destination to GOT For inserting removing method of SD card USB memory refer to the following 6 1 2 Installing and removing pr...

Page 214: ...y one line Touching button scrolls up down the screen by one screen 3 Touching button returns the screen to the previous screen display Item Description Name Displays the file name Size Displays the file size Kind Displays the following items according to the kind of the files Boot BootOS Basic Standard monitor OS Extend Extend function OS Option Optional function OS Comm Communication driver Vers...

Page 215: ...The functions below can be carried out for files The USB drive only stores log files and cannot be displayed For details of Advanced Alarm refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Display operation of Alarm information Function Description Reference Displaying file folder data The file folder name data size and creating date time are displayed 14 12 14 13 ...

Page 216: ...ind Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder The file is indicated with an extension while the folder is indicated with DIR 3 Name Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Copy button etc 14 2 2 Alarm information operation 4 Copy operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to ...

Page 217: ...uching a drive of Select drive displays the information of the touched drive 2 Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder 3 Touching a folder of displays the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy 4 Touching button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching button scrolls up down the screen by one screen 5 Touching a file name selects ...

Page 218: ...llowing dialog box is displayed when touching the following button according to the file type to convert to CVS file G1A CSV Button TXT file G1A TXT Button 3 Touch OK button When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown at left appears without starting the conversion Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the conversion 4 ...

Page 219: ...K DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 16 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 14 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 14 2 Various Data Control 14 15 3 Deletion operation Deletes selected files 1 Touch and select the file to delete 2 Touching Delete button displays the dialog mentioned left Touching OK button deletes the file Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion 3 When the deletion is completed the comple...

Page 220: ... If the copy destination folder is touched the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders 4 Touching Exec button displays the dialog box shown left 5 Touch OK button If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting th...

Page 221: ...available Display operation of Project information Function Description Reference Displaying file folder data The file folder type name data size and creating date time are displayed 14 18 14 19 Delete Deletes project data 14 19 Copy Copies project data can copy the A drive and E drive 14 20 Property display Displays the project data creation date author name and the version of GT Designer3 14 21 ...

Page 222: ...ta Project Folder in the selected drive When the name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters are not displayed The project data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed 7 The size ...

Page 223: ...drive in Select drive displays the project data in the drive 2 Touching project data selects and inverts it 3 For operation of delete copy property data check download upload refer to the following Delete This section 2 Copy This section 3 Property This section 4 Data check This section 5 Download setup This section 6 Upload setup cancel This section 7 4 Touching button closes the screen 1 Touch a...

Page 224: ...GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Install the SD card mentioned above to GOT For inserting removing method of SD card USB memory refer to the following 6 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 6 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 3 Open Project Information screen to select the file to copy Dialog for selecting a copy destination folder 4...

Page 225: ...d without starting the copy If copy in this case the copied file is overwritten to the project data in the copy destination folder Touching OK button starts copy Touching Cancel button cancels the copy 8 When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 1 Touching Property button after selecting the project data to display the property displays t...

Page 226: ...s item explains using the A drive POINT POINT POINT Before download operation 1 Setup cancel When the project data in the A drive is set up the project data cannot be downloaded to the C drive 2 Poject data to be stored in a SD card When storing the project data from GT Designer3 to SD card select C Built in flash memory for Project Data in the Boot Drive 1 Touch Data check button after selecting ...

Page 227: ...ethod refer to the following 6 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 6 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 3 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive 4 Touching Download button displays the screen shown on the left Touching OK button executes the download 5 If there is a project data of the same name in the C drive the screen shown on the left is displayed with...

Page 228: ... data from GT Designer3 to SD card select A Standard SD Card for Project Data in Boot Drive 1 Mount the SD card to GOT For the SD card installation removal method refer to the following 6 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 2 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive 3 Touching Download button displays the screen shown on the left Touching OK button executes the setup 4 When the s...

Page 229: ...be used for downloading project data to another GOT This item explains using the A drive POINT POINT POINT Before upload operation The project data cannot be uploaded to the A drive when the project data of the A drive is set up Execute setup cancel 7 b Setup cancel operation before uploading the project data 1 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive 2 Touching Upload button displays the screen s...

Page 230: ... 1 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive 2 Touching Upload button displays the screen shown on the left 3 Touching OK button executes the setup cancel 4 When the setup cancel is completed the dialog box mentioned left is displayed Touching OK button restarts the GOT After restart the GOT monitors with the project data in the C drive ...

Page 231: ...formation Carries out delete copy and move to the file created by the hardcopy function For details of hard copy function refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Display operation of Hardcopy information Function Description Reference Displaying file folder data The file folder type name data size and creating date time are displayed 14 28 14 29 Delete Fi...

Page 232: ...dicates the type of the displayed name file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR 3 Name Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Copy button etc 14 2 4 Hardcopy information operation 3 Copy operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the o...

Page 233: ...Display operation of Hardcopy information 1 Touching a drive of Select drive displays the information of the touched drive 2 Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder 3 Touching a folder of displays the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy 4 Touching button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching button scrolls up down the screen...

Page 234: ...letes selected files 1 Touch and select the file to delete 2 Touching Del button displays the screen mentioned left Touching OK button deletes the file Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed 4 Touching OK button closes the dialog ...

Page 235: ...opy button displays the message Please select a destination in the left bottom of the screen 3 If the copy destination folder is touched the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders 4 Touching Exec button displays the dialog box shown left 5 Touch OK button If there is a file of the ...

Page 236: ...g Rename button displays the screen shown left Input the file name to be changed By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol 3 Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 Touching OK button starts renaming file 5 When renaming is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog ...

Page 237: ...ction without creating the screen to operate the advanced recipe Advanced recipe setting of GT Designer3 is required Function Description Reference Advanced recipe information screen Displaying file folder data The file folder name data size and creating date time are displayed 14 35 14 37 G1P CSV conversion G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to CSV file 14 38 G1P TXT conversion G1P fil...

Page 238: ...OGRAM DATA CONTROL 14 2 Various Data Control Display operation of Advanced Recipe information Program data control Advanced Recipe information Main menu Touch Program data control Touch Advanced Recipe information 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 239: ... drive can be selected Even if SD card is not installed this message appears 2 Kind Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR 3 Name Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Rename button etc 14 2 5 Advanced recipe in...

Page 240: ...Attribution of record is displayed Attribution of record can be changed with GT Designer3 V Record can be loaded saved Record whose value is selected VP Record only for loading Record whose value is selected and cannot be changed Blank Record only for saving Record whose value is deleted or not selected P Record unusable reserved area Record whose value is not selected and cannot be changed 3 Reco...

Page 241: ...ct drive displays the information of the touched drive 2 Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder 3 Touching a folder name of displays the information of the folder in one upper hierarchy 4 Touching button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching button scrolls up down the screen by one screen 5 Touching a file name selects the file 6 For operat...

Page 242: ...xt file G1P TXT button 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive 4 Touching Exec button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen Example Dialog box if the G1P CSV button is touched 5 When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown a...

Page 243: ...file G1P file 1 To select the file touch the check box of CSV file or Unicode text file to be converted to a G1P file 2 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive 3 Touching Exec button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 4 When the file whose name is the same exists in th...

Page 244: ...left Touching OK button deletes the file folder While executing Processing message appears on the screen Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion When it cannot be deleted the dialog box shown at left appears Only when deleting folder is executed Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute the delete operation again 14 2 6 Precautions 3 When the deletion is completed the completion d...

Page 245: ...e file to copy 2 Touch the Copy button 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders 4 Touching Execute button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 If there is a file of the sa...

Page 246: ...g directly below the drive 4 Touching Execute button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When any file with the same name exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels moving 6 When moving is completed...

Page 247: ...a Control 14 43 7 Rename operation File name to be used in advanced recipe is changed 1 Touch and select the file to change the name 2 Touching Rename button displays the screen shown left Input the file name to be changed By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol 3 Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 Touching OK butto...

Page 248: ...The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol 3 Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 Touching OK button starts creating folder 5 When creating folder is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog ...

Page 249: ...on Advanced recipe file G1P file is created When advanced recipe is only executed on Utility advanced recipe file should be created with this function in advance 1 Touch the Create G1P button 2 The screen to select the advanced recipe setting is displayed Select the advanced recipe setting to be used for new file After selecting touch the Next button 3 As the input key window is displayed input th...

Page 250: ...e name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the creation Touching the OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels creating 6 When creating is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog ...

Page 251: ... PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 14 2 Various Data Control 14 47 10 Record load operation Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller 1 Select the recipe file and touch the Execute button 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment to which you want to load the device value 3 Touching the Load record GOT PLC button displays the dialog box shown left 4 To...

Page 252: ...C GOT button displays the screen shown left For changing the record comment of saving destination input the record comment By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital a z English minuscule 0 9 Numeric Symbol Other than alphanumeric and symbol can not be inputted If record comment is not changed it is not need to input 4 Touching Enter button displays the dialog ...

Page 253: ...cord matches to the device value of the controller After executing loading saving with advanced recipe verifies weather its contents are reflected 1 Select the recipe file and touch the Execute button 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment for matching the device value 3 Touching the Match records GOT PLC button displays the dialog box shown left 4 Touch...

Page 254: ...nd touch the Execute button 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment to be deleted If the data of which attribution contains P can not be deleted 3 Touching the Delete Device Value button displays the dialog box shown left 4 Touching the OK button starts deleting device value The Processing message is displayed on the screen 5 When deleting is completed co...

Page 255: ...name folder name and file name The mark is also counted as one character b Character strings that cannot be set to folder file The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used In addition the folder file name shown below cannot be used The folder name which begins with G1 Folder name and file name which begin with period F...

Page 256: ...pleted Therefore it may take some time to finish the process of advanced recipe folder file The Processing message is displayed on the screen POINT POINT POINT Estimation of processing time The process may take time depending on the setting of advanced recipe file to be operated The more number of blocks increases the longer it takes to process advanced recipe folder file Also the process to creat...

Page 257: ... GOT For details of the logging function refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Display operation of Logging information Function Description Reference Displaying file folder data The file folder name data size and creating date time are displayed 14 54 14 55 G1L CSV conversion G1L file of loggingfile is converted to CSV file 14 56 G1L TXT conversion G1L...

Page 258: ...nsion in case of folder displays DIR 3 Name Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Rename button etc 14 2 6 Logging information operation 6 Rename operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displ...

Page 259: ...mation 1 Touching a drive of Select Drive displays the information of the touched drive 2 Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder 3 Touching a folder name of displays the information of the folder in one upper hierarchy 4 Touching button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching button scrolls up down the screen by one screen 5 Touching a file n...

Page 260: ...utton 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive 4 Touching Execute button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen Example Dialog box if the G1L CSV button is touched 5 When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown at left appears...

Page 261: ...ation Folder and file to be used on logging are deleted 1 Touch and select the file folder to delete 2 Touching Del button displays the dialog mentioned left Touching OK button deletes the file folder While executing Processing message appears on the screen Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed Touching OK button closes the ...

Page 262: ...be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders 4 Touching Execute button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button c...

Page 263: ...on log file is moved 1 Touch and select the file to move 2 Touch the Move button 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive 4 Touching Execute button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When any file with the same name exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown ...

Page 264: ...the screen shown left Input the file name to be changed By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol 3 Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 Touching OK button starts renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When renaming is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button clos...

Page 265: ...PY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 14 2 Various Data Control 14 61 7 Folder create operation An operation log folder is created 1 Touch the Create Folder button 2 The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol 3 Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 Touching ...

Page 266: ...d Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the logging information screen the files other than logging files are not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in SD card or USB memory by using personal computer etc 2 Precautions for operation a Precautions during folder file operat...

Page 267: ...15 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 16 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 14 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 14 2 Various Data Control 14 63 14 2 7 Memory card format Function of the memory card format Format the SD card USB memory Internal SRAM Display operation of Memory card Format Program Data control Memory card Format Move to Memory card format Main menu Touch Program data control ...

Page 268: ...stalling and removing procedures of the USB memory 2 Touch and select the drive to format by drive selection 3 Touching Format button displays the password input screen 4 Typing and touching the Enter key display the dialog box shown on the left The password is fixed to 1111 Confirm the contents of the dialog box and touch OK button when execute the format of SD card or USB memory To cancel the me...

Page 269: ... for the user of each drive and Boot drive empty area size Confirming memory empty space is enabled without connecting a PC Display operation of Memory information Display example of Memory information Program Data control Memory information Main menu Touch Program data control Touch Memory informaton 10 3 Utility Display 1 2 Number Item Description 1 Flash memory empty area size Indicates the mem...

Page 270: ... status display This function displays a list of the USB device connection status in the GOT Also this screen is used to remove the USB device from GOT Display operation of USB device status display Program Data control USB device status display Main menu Touch Program data control Touch USB device status display 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 271: ...OINT POINT USB mouse keyboard recognition When using the USB mouse keyboard install USB mouse keyboard of the extended function OS to the GOT 1 When the USB device is installed to GOT the screen shown left is displayed 2 USB mass storage is displayed in Device and Stop button is displayed in Attach 3 Touching the Stop button displays the dialog box shown left Touching the OK button execute the pre...

Page 272: ...d data in the SRAM user area can be backed up or restored and the SRAM user area is initialized For the available functions in the SRAM user area refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Display operation of SRAM control Program Data control SRAM control Main menu Touch Program data control Touch SRAM control 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 273: ...e For the setting name only characters within the display range are displayed 6 Date and time Displays the creation date and time of each data 7 Number of selected files Displays the information of the items currently selected 8 SRAM area Displays the current free space size or total size of the SRAM user area 9 Drive space Displays the current free space size or total size of the drive selected f...

Page 274: ...d and then touch the Initialize selected area button Example Dialog box when touching the Initialize all button 2 The dialog box shown left appears Check the description of the dialog box To initialize the SRAM user area touch the OK button To cancel the initialization touch the Cancel button 3 When touching the OK button in the dialog box shown left appears for recheck Touching the OK button star...

Page 275: ... data 1 To restore data in the drive to the SRAM user area Select the drive where the data is stored and then touch the Restoration button 2 The dialog box shown left appears Check the description of the dialog box To restore all data in the SRAM user area touch the OK button To cancel the restoration touch the Cancel button 3 When touching the OK button in the dialog box shown left appears for re...

Page 276: ...SRAM user area touch the OK button To cancel the backup touch the Cancel button 3 When touching the OK button in the dialog box shown left appears for recheck Touching the OK button start the backup Touching the Cancel button cancels the backup 4 When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the backup Touching OK button ov...

Page 277: ... function The GOT data package acquisition copies the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the SD card or USB memory OS Boot OS standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS Special data Project data The copied data can be utilized for backup or creating the same GOT system by installing the data For installation function of the GOT refer to the following 17 3 Boo...

Page 278: ... Enables adding editing deleting importing and exporting the operator information 14 74 14 77 Add operation Adds operator information to the GOT 14 78 Edit operation Edits the operator information stored in the GOT 14 80 Delete operation Deletes the operator information stored in the GOT 14 81 Undo Restores the current operator information to the previous saved one 14 82 Import operation Imports t...

Page 279: ...rol 14 75 3 Display example of operator management a Operator information management screen No Item Description a Operator Name Displays operator names b ID Displays operator IDs c Level Displays security levels for operators d Update Displays the last updated dates of the operator information e Operation keys Execution keys for each function f Drive in use Displays and sets the storage location f...

Page 280: ... operator name to be added Up to 16 alphanumeric characters b Operator ID The operator ID to be edited is displayed or input an operator name to be added Setting range 1 to 32766 Maximum number of registrations 255 c Level The operator security level to be edited is displayed or input an operator security level to be added 0 to 15 d Password Input a password Up to 16 alphanumeric characters e Make...

Page 281: ... displayed and then input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Alphabet small letter Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 3 When the administrator password is correctly input the Operator information management screen in displayed For operating operation switches refer to the following Add This...

Page 282: ...haracter types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Alphabet small letter Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key b Touch the OperatorID and then the Operator ID input dialog box is displayed Input an operator ID When the input is completed touch the Enter key c Touch the level and then the Operator level input dialog box is displayed Inpu...

Page 283: ...e For enabling the setting of Make a permanent password touch the check box for Make a permanent password and then the setting is switched Disabled Enabled f For using the external authentication ID touch the check box Use ext auth ID and switch the setting The external authentication ID is not used The external authentication ID is used g Touch Ext auth ID to display the external authentication I...

Page 284: ...Operator information edit screen is displayed and then touch an item to be edited a Level b Password c Make a permanent password d Use ext auth ID e Ext auth ID For how to edit operator information refer to the following This section 4 4 Touch the OK button after all items are input and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input operator information is added Touch the Cancel button ...

Page 285: ...DATA CONTROL 14 2 Various Data Control 14 81 c Delete operation Delete the operator information stored in the GOT 1 Select the operator information to be deleted with touching the operator information 2 Touch the Delete button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed 3 Touch the OK button and then the selected operator information is deleted Touch the Cancel button and then the delete opera...

Page 286: ...then touch the OK button 3 The Admin password authentication screen is displayed and then input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Alphabet small letter Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 4 When the administrator password is correctly input the current operator information is restored to th...

Page 287: ...ion Import the operator information that is already exported to a SD card to the GOT 1 Touch the Import button 2 The dialog box shown left is displayed Touch button and then the Admin password authentication screen is displayed Input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Alphabet small letter Numeric When the inpu...

Page 288: ...n 4 The dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button and then the Admin password authentication screen is displayed Input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Alphabet small letter Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 5 When the administrator password is correctly input the dialog box sho...

Page 289: ...4 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 14 2 Various Data Control 14 85 Password change 1 Password change function The passwords to be used for the operator authentication can be changed For the password change log into the GOT in advance with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed 2 Display operation of password change Main menu Touch Debug self check Debug self check ...

Page 290: ...hen the Password change dialog box is displayed 3 Input the current password on the Password change dialog box Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Alphabet small letter Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 4 Input a new password 5 After inputting a new password input the new password again 6 When the new password is cor...

Page 291: ... when you automatically log out of the GOT can be set 1 to 60 minutes 0 is invalid 14 88 Auth method The authentication method can be switched Operator name password External auth general When External auth general is selected the check box for Operator name password is displayed 14 88 Password expiration date Set the item for regularly changing the password to be used for the operator authenticat...

Page 292: ...eted touch the Enter key 3 When the administrator password is correctly input the Function setting screen in displayed Touch an item to be set a Automatic logout time b Auth method c Password expiration date d Initial position input e Valid byte count input a Touch Automatic logout time and then the Automatic logout time edit dialog box is displayed Input the time When the input is completed touch...

Page 293: ...on date edit dialog box is displayed Input the expiration date When the input is completed touch the Enter key d Initial position input Set the initial position input byte count of external authentication ID from among the data read from the external authentication device e Valid byte count input Set the valid byte count for external authentication ID Only available when the external authenticatio...

Page 294: ... This item explains using the A drive Number Item Description 1 Select drive Displays the drive where OS and data can be copied The A Built in SD card is not displayed when SD card is not installed If the USB memory is not installed E USB drive is not displayed 2 Copy Touching the button starts copying 1 Touching the drive name below Select Drive inverts the touched drive name Touching the Copy bu...

Page 295: ...2 Mbytes Around 18 seconds 5 Precautions for operation a Copying project data If the Boot source drive and copy destination drive for project data is the same the project data cannot be copied If the drives are the same cancel the setup b When project data are copied to the GOT If OS or project data is copied to the GOT using the SD card or USB memory created with GOT data package acquisition the ...

Page 296: ...14 92 14 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 14 2 Various Data Control ...

Page 297: ...o the following manual GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 15 1 2 A list editor MELSEC A list editor allows changing the sequence programs in ACPU QCPU A mode For display contents and operation procedure refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 15 1 3 FX list editor FX list editor allows changing the sequence programs in ...

Page 298: ... controller to GOT or delete backup data with the backup restoration GOT data package acquisition is also possible For details of backup restoration refer to the following manuals GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 Debug self check Debug Touch Debug self check Touch Debug Main Menu Backup restoration function Touch Backup restoration 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 299: ...internal SRAM Password 15 3 Drawing check Carries out missing bit check color check and drawing check 15 6 Font check Displays the character data on the screen to check visually 15 10 Touch panel check Checks whether there are no dead zone area in the Touch key minimum unit 2 dots 2 dots 15 12 I O check Carries out RS 232 RS 422 connecting target confirmation and self loopback check 15 14 Function...

Page 300: ...The following example explains about Memory Check using built in flash memory C drive For the Built in SD card A drive memory check install the SD card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory For the USB drive E drive memory check install the USB memory before carrying out the check operations 1 Select a drive to check in the Select Drive screen in Memory check and tou...

Page 301: ...TION CLEAN 15 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 15 2 Self Check 15 5 POINT POINT POINT 1 Password change The password cannot be changed When input password error the cancel dialog box is displayed Touching OK returns to the Memory check screen 2 When error is found in memory When error is found by memory check the dialog box indicating the area in which the error occurred is displayed In case of...

Page 302: ...issing bits is occurred in the following cases There are parts drawn in different color with the filled color There are parts of basic figure and drawing patterns which are not drawn according to the layout and procedures described in 15 2 2 Display operation of drawing check When missing bits occurs contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service Debug self check Self check Touch Debug Self...

Page 303: ...een is displayed in color blue black red purple green light blue yellow and white Also for GT1450 Q monochrome 16 scales the screen color is reduced to monochrome 16 scales and displayed This section explains in the case of GT1455 Q 65536 colors a Missing bit Color Check By touching the upper right part of the screen the entire screen color changes in the following order blue black red purple gree...

Page 304: ...gures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal Pattern 2 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal To Pattern 2 Pattern 1 To Pattern 3 Pattern 2 ...

Page 305: ...F CHECK 15 2 Self Check 15 9 Pattern 3 Shape transformation color check The overlapped shapes of pattern 1 and pattern 2 are displayed If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal Pattern 4 Shape check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and interval are displayed visually in order it is normal Touching the upper right part of the s...

Page 306: ...udged as normal if the following characters are correctly displayed UNICODE If the characters above are not displayed correctly the fonts may not be installed Install the standard monitor OS again Alphabetic characters etc 0x0000 to 0x04F9 From basic Latin to Kirill Hangul characters 0xAC00 to 0xD7A3 Hangul Hangul auxiliary Kanji 0x4E00 to 0x9FA5 CJK integrated Kanjis Debug self check Self check T...

Page 307: ...e character data of the built in font in the built in flash memory can be checked visually to confirm the font drawings by displaying the character data serially on the screen 1 Before execute font check Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during Font check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen The installed f...

Page 308: ... Touch panel check POINT POINT POINT Notes on Touch panel check If the touched part is not filled with yellow color there are the following two possible causes 1 Display part failure 2 Touch panel failure In that case contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service Debug self check Self check Touch Debug self check Touch Self check Main menu Touch panel check Touch Touch panel check Touch OK...

Page 309: ...ck 15 13 Touch panel check operations Touching Touch panel check of self check displays a black filled screen over the entire screen area POINT POINT POINT Checking the upper left part of the screen Only the upper left part of the screen cannot be filled with yellow If returns to the self check by touching the upper left part judge that the upper left area operates normally 1 Touch a part of the s...

Page 310: ...heck When the following communication drivers are used the I O check cannot be executed Display operation of I O Check Connection type Communication driver Connection to MITSUBISHI PLC Ethernet connection Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Connection to YASKAWA PLC YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Ethernet YASKAWA Connection to YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Ethernet YOKOGAWA Connection to ...

Page 311: ...ifying that it is on checking until the connecting target confirmation communication ends normally 2 When the connecting target confirmation communication ends its result is notified by dialog box If the connecting target confirmation communication ends normally the dialog box notifying of the normal termination mentioned left is displayed Touching OK button after confirming the result returns to ...

Page 312: ...onnector When the GOT cannot receive the data during the data transmission the dialog box shown left appears and the GOT restarts in five seconds When the dialog box shown left appears check the following Check if the pins of the connector for self loopback check are incorrectly shorted Check if the channel number for the RS 232 interface is set to 0 None in the communication setting of the GOT ut...

Page 313: ...K 16 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 15 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 15 2 Self Check 15 17 4 When the all checks ended normally the dialog box shown left is displayed And the GOT restarts in five seconds 5 When an error occurs the dialog box that shows the GOT abnormal termination and the byte with the error appears and then the GOT restarts in five seconds When the dialog box shown left app...

Page 314: ...ction Ethernet status check is a function that sends a ping to check the connection status with the equipment on the Ethernet Display operation of Ethernet status check Debug self check Self check Touch Debug self check Touch Self check Main menu Ethernet status check Touch Ethernet status check 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 315: ...5 2 Self Check 15 19 Operation of Ethernet status check 1 If touch the select button of IP address of the other terminal a keyboard is displayed Enter the IP address of the other terminal with the keyboard Default 192 168 3 39 2 If touch the Ping transmission button a ping is sent to the IP address entered in IP address of the other station The timeout time is about 5sec When GOT and PLC are in co...

Page 316: ...ntroller or network System alarms can be reset on the System alarm display screen For details of system alarm refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Display operation of System alarm display Main menu Debug self check System alarm display Touching Reset resets the system alarm display in the GOT error Touch Debug self check Touch System alarm display ...

Page 317: ...larm cause before resetting the system alarm display in the GOT error If not eliminated the system alarm display in the GOT error will not be reset even after the reset operation 2 Processings with reset operation The following data in the system information are also reset GOT error code Write device GOT error detection signal System Signal 2 1 b13 1 Eliminate each cause of the system alarm being ...

Page 318: ... start time function GOT start time is the function to display the following date and time Start time of GOT Current time of GOT Operating hours of GOT Display operation of GOT start time Start time Touch Debug self check Touch GOT start time Main Menu Debug self check 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 319: ... displayed irrespective of Start Time and Current Time When changing the clock of the GOT Operating hours does not match with the difference between Current Time and Start Time Operating hours is not the time calculated from Current Time and Start Time The time displayed at Operating hours is a reference for the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communicat...

Page 320: ...15 24 15 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 15 4 GOT start time ...

Page 321: ...sing neutral detergent POINT POINT POINT Precautions for cleaning Do not use chemicals such as thinner organic solvents and strong acids since they may cause the protective sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on the surface to peel off In addition do not use spray solvents since they may cause the electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices Display operation of Clean Even if tou...

Page 322: ...16 2 16 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN ...

Page 323: ...lation using GOT 1 When execute installation with USB memory standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance For the writing of OS in GT Designer3 refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals POINT POINT POINT CoreOS In 17 1 to 17 4 of this chapter only BootOS and standard monitor OS are described For CoreOS refer to the following 17 5 CoreOS GOT SD card...

Page 324: ...1BOOT SD card that stores data with OS boot drive set to the A drive A G1BOOT Standard monitor OS Required for the GOT operation as the monitoring function of GOT installation and deletion of the OS file or project data touch key control or display function of the screen and guidance Required for display and operation of the user created screen and utility screen Not installed in GOT at factory sh...

Page 325: ...igner3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Uploading from other GOT BootOS or standard monitor OS has been installed 14 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 3 Using SD card that stores data with OS boot drive set to A drive GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals POINT POINT POINT Precautions on writing BootOS standard monitor OS in SD card or USB memory When writing...

Page 326: ...o the status at factory shipment All OS and project data are erased 2 Copying project data using SD card or USB memory After installing BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS download the project data At this time match the version of the standard monitor OS in the GOT with the version of the standard monitor OS with which the project data was created 3 When OS and project data are in the SD card...

Page 327: ...h the SD card access switch to OFF and install the SD card where the BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the SD card interface of the GOT 2 Switch ON the SD card access switch of GOT 3 Power on the GOT while pressing upper left corner of the GOT screen 1 point press installation function 4 The BootOS or standard monitor OS is installed in the built in flash memory The SD card a...

Page 328: ...in the USB interface of the GOT The BootOS cannot be stored in the USB memory where the standard monitor OS or project data is stored 2 Power on the GOT while pressing upper left corner of the GOT screen 1 point press installation function 3 The BootOS or standard monitor OS is installed in the built in flash memory Do not pull out the USB memory or power off the GOT while install execution 4 The ...

Page 329: ...tion of standard monitor OS after purchasing GOT Install standard monitor OS by the following two methods 1 GT Designer3 2 Installing when starting the GOT Operation procedure 1 When installing with SD card 1 Power OFF the GOT After SD card access LED is off install the SD card in which BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the SD card interface of GOT 2 Switch ON the SD card acc...

Page 330: ...SB interface of GOT 2 Display the data control function screen Utility on the GOT and install BootOS standard monitor OS 3 Do not pull out the USB memory or power off the GOT while install execution 4 The GOT restarts automatically after the installation is completed 5 After confirming normal restart display the USB device status screen and remove the USB memory from the USB interface of GOT 14 2 ...

Page 331: ...y BootOS is stored in the SD card or USB memory 2 When BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS are stored in the SD card or USB memory 3 When the version is the same or newer regardless of the data stored in the SD card or USB memory conditions 1 and 2 above 1 The message indicating disabled installation is displayed 2 Touch the OK button to cancel installation After canceling installation restart...

Page 332: ...S information of the utility For details refer to the following 14 2 1 OS information Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating plate on GOT rear face When the installation process is discontinued When the installation process is normally executed Standard monitor OS 1 Communication driver 2 Optional function OS 2 Standard monitor OS 2 Communication driver 2 Op...

Page 333: ...once it cannot be canceled on the way Do not attempt the following to cancel the installation on the way The GOT may not operate Powering off the GOT If the GOT does not operate please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative If the GOT does not recover even when installing the CoreOS the error may be caused by a hardware failure Please consult your local Mits...

Page 334: ...the screen on the left To cancel the installation power the GOT off and remove the SD card 4 Turning the SD card access switch off executes CoreOS installation 5 When the installation is completed the dialog as shown on the left is displayed The POWER LED of the GOT blinks green orange at the installation completion 6 Confirm that the message is displayed and power the GOT off 7 Remove the SD card...

Page 335: ...he writing from the GT Designer3 to the SD card may not have been completed normally Execute the writing from the GT Designer3 to the SD card again The message is displayed on the GOT GOT error Contact your local sales office The GOT main unit is broken Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative SD card error Check whether the SD card can be used Installa...

Page 336: ...17 14 17 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 17 5 CoreOS ...

Page 337: ... of MELSOFT Navigator For details of the parameter functions of MELSOFT Navigator refer to the following Help of MELSOFT Navigator 1 The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green Set items which are displayed in green cells from the MELSOFT Navigator When changing in GT Designer3 refer to the following 3 2 When setting the communic...

Page 338: ...ected to the GOT Setting 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting dialog box appears Select the channel No to be used from the list menu 3 Refer to the following explanations for the setting POINT POINT POINT Channel No 2 Use the channel No 2 when using the Multi channel function For details of the Multi channel function refer to the following 30 MULTI CHANNEL FUNC...

Page 339: ...ot displayed confirm if Manufacturer Controller Type and I F are correct For the settings refer to the following Setting the communication interface section in each chapter Item Description Use CH Select this item when setting the channel No 2 Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Type Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT For the se...

Page 340: ...CPU MELSEC QnU DC Q17nD M NC DR 1 Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU MELSEC QnU DC Q17nD M NC DR 1 Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU Q04UDPVCPU Q06UDPVCPU Q13UDPVCPU Q26UDPVCPU Q12DCCPU V Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q2...

Page 341: ...r MELSEC QnU DC Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 for the type regardless of the host PLC CPU type MELSEC L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P NZ2GF ETB MELSEC A A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU S1 A2ACPUP21 S1 A2ACPUR21 S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 Type Model name MELSEC A A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR...

Page 342: ...QROL V500L FREQROL E700 FREQROL F700 FREQROL F700P FREQROL F700PJ FREQROL A700 IAI X SEL Controller XSEL J XSEL K XSEL KE XSEL KT XSEL KET XSEL P XSEL Q XSEL JX XSEL KX XSEL KTX XSEL PX XSEL QX SSEL ASEL PSEL IAI ROBO CYLINDER PCON C PCON CG PCON CF PCON CY PCON SE PCON PL PCON CA PCON PO ACON C ACON CG ACON CY ACON SE ACON PL ACON PO SCON C SCON CA ERC2 Type Model name AZBIL SDC DMC Series DMC10 ...

Page 343: ... 06DA D0 06AR D0 06AA D0 06DD1 D D0 06DD2 D D0 06DR D JTEKT TOYOPUC PC Series PC3JG P CPU PC3JG CPU PC3J CPU PC3JL CPU PC2JC CPU PC2J16P CPU PC2J16PR CPU PC2J CPU PC2JS CPU PC2JR CPU Type Model name SHARP JW JW 21CU JW 31CUH JW 50CUH JW 22CU JW 32CUH JW 33CUH JW 70CUH JW 100CUH JW 100CU Z 512J Shinko Technos Controller Series ACS 13A C5 JCS 33A C5 JCR 33A C5 JCD 33A C5 JCM 33A C5 JIR 301 M C5 PCD ...

Page 344: ...16 HITACHI S10mini S10V LQP510 LQP520 LQP800 LQP000 LQP010 LQP011 LQP120 FUJI MICREX F Series F55 F70 F120S F140S F15 S Type Model name FUJI PXR PXG PXH PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 PXR9 PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 FUJI MICREX SX SPH SPH200 SPH300 SPH3000 SPH2000 YASKAWA GL PROGIC8 PROGIC 8 GL120 GL130 GL60S GL60H GL70H YASKAWA CP9200SH MP900 Series MP920 MP930 MP940 CP 9200SH YASKAWA CP9200 H CP 9200 H YASKAWA CP9300M...

Page 345: ...ced Series UT320 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT420 UT450 UT520 UT550 UT551 UT750 UP350 UP351 UP550 UP750 UM330 UM331 UM350 UM351 US1000 UT130 UT150 UT152 UT155 UP150 UT2400 UT2800 UT32A UT35A UT52A UT55A UP35A UP55A UM33A Type Model name RKC SR Mini HG H PCP J H PCP A H PCP B Z TIO Z DIO Z CT CB100 CB400 CB500 CB700 CB900 FB100 FB400 FB900 RB100 RB400 RB500 RB700 RB900 PF900 PF901 HA400 401 HA900 901 RMC500...

Page 346: ...363 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 IC697CPU731 IC697CPX772 IC697CPX782 IC697CPX928 IC697CPX935 IC697CPU780 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 IC697CPU788 IC697CPU789 IC697CPM790 IC200UAA003 IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 IC200UAR028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212 IC200UDR005 IC200UDR006 IC200UDR010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDR064 IC200UAR014 IC200UDD104 IC200UDD112 ...

Page 347: ... Model name Manufacturer MODBUS NFCP100 YOKOGAWA NFJT100 TSX P57 203M Schneider Electric TSX P57 253M TSX P57 303M TSX P57 353M TSX P57 453M 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 534 14U 140 CPU 651 50 140 CPU 651 60 140 CPU 671 60 140 CPU 113 02 140 CPU 113 03 140 CPU 434 12A 140 CPU 534 14A Microcomputer connection Microcomputer Ethernet interface RS 232 interface RS 422 interface Ethernet inte...

Page 348: ...ed Setting 1 Select Common I F Communication Setting from the menu 2 The I F Communication Setting dialog box appears Make the settings with reference to the following explanation POINT POINT POINT When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator When setting Controller Setting in GT Designer3 using the parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator all of I F Communication Setting are g...

Page 349: ...s Standard I F 1 Standard I F 2 Standard I F 3 Standard I F 4 CH No Set the CH No according to the intended purpose The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used 0 Not used 1 to 4 Used for connecting a controller of channel No 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment Channel setting 8 GOT extended computer 9 Used for connecting Host PC Used for gateway function and Ethernet downl...

Page 350: ...d When setting of Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed GT Designer3 displays the device that cannot be converted no corresponding device type or excessive setting ranges as In this case set the device again b When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network The network will be set to the host station c When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to ...

Page 351: ...ommon settings onto the GOT For details on writing to GOT refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual 18 3 1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT 1 Select Communication Write to GOT from the menu 2 The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the OK button when the settings are ...

Page 352: ... using GT Designer3 For reading from the GOT refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual 1 Select Communication Read from GOT from the menu 2 The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the OK button when the settings are completed 3 The GOT Read tab appears on the Communicate with GOT...

Page 353: ...sulting in injuries or fires Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not dis...

Page 354: ...heck No foreign matter sticking Remove clean No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action 1 Surrounding environment Ambient temperature Make measurement with thermometer or hygrometer Measure corrosive gas 0 to 40 For use in control panel temperature inside control panel is ambient temperature Ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH Atmosphere No corrosive gas 2 Power supply voltage check 24 VDC Mea...

Page 355: ...a clean condition To clean the GOT wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent For the display operation of the Clean screen refer to the following 16 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN POINT POINT POINT Precautions for cleaning Do not use chemicals such as thinner organic solvents and strong acids since they may cause the protective sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on t...

Page 356: ...T UP By using system alarm the message that notifies the battery voltage has decreased can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT To display the message in the system alarm set Battery alarm display to on 12 1 1 Function of Display For details of the system alarm display refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals POINT POINT POINT Batte...

Page 357: ...ignal from a FX series PLC to an external device with system information Condition The Write Device is D20 and all data is used the button is clicked on the setting screen of drawing software for the system information assignment D36 b12 Battery voltage low System Signal 2 2 Turned on upon a battery voltage drop Used as shown below in the sequence program For details of system information refer to...

Page 358: ...osed of separately from other wastes 2 Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC requires the following when marketing or exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states To print the symbol on batteries devices or their packaging To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products a Labeling To market or export batteries and or devices with bui...

Page 359: ...is turned on You can issue a backlight shutoff of the GOT from the PLC to external devices such as the lamp or buzzer using system information To avoid any screen touch operation by the user who misunderstands it is in screen saving mode install an external alarm and interlock the loads that would cause danger For details of the system information refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Scree...

Page 360: ...19 8 19 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 19 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection ...

Page 361: ...tus check sheet and take corrective action When the GOT is restored see the status for a while 2 When the wiring status needs to be improved GOT installation status check sheet When the noise caused by the GOT wiring status is considered to have caused the malfunction etc based on the check result of 1 above take corrective action for wiring using GOT installation status check sheet When the GOT i...

Page 362: ... of the read device When no problem is found in the setting proceed to 1 d Blinks in green orange The backlight has run out Replace the backlight If the GOT is not restored proceed to 1 d Not lit The power is not supplied Check if the power is supplied If the GOT is not restored proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation When the power is supplied the GOT hardware may be faulty d Screen display T...

Page 363: ... Error code system alarm Example 460 Communication unit error When the system alarm display function can be used take the action for the error code system alarm displayed If the action cannot be taken proceed to 2 b Disabled The system alarm display function cannot be used Proceed to 2 c b Executing of I O check from the GOT utility Communication error Display details Example A message indicating ...

Page 364: ...ke the action of 4 g b Reset or power ON OFF the PLC CPU Restored Not restored Proceed to c c Power the GOT and PLC CPU ON OFF simultaneously Restored Not restored Proceed to d d Connect the cable again Restored Not restored Proceed to e The cable connection may be faulty Securely connect the cable If an error occurs again proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation e Reinstall the project data Re...

Page 365: ...the communication cable are mixed in the duct Mixed Not mixed Measure for the cables mixed Wiring the power line and communication cable in the panel without mixing them in the duct can reduce the influence of noise Effective Ineffective Current status The power line and communication cable are installed together Installed together Not installed together Measure for the cables installed together F...

Page 366: ...uch as MCCB electromagnetic contactor relay solenoid valve or induction motor When a surge suppressor is used fill out the entry area below with the surge suppressor model name and the name of the equipment for which the surge suppressor is used Used Not used Measure for the equipment without a surge suppressor used Attaching the surge suppressor on the cable close to the load can reduce the influ...

Page 367: ...ed Not connected Measure for the FG cables connected Fig A Perform independent grounding at two places as shown in Fig A Independent grounding can reduce the influence of noise If independent grounding is not allowed be sure to perform shared grounding as shown in Fig B Effective Ineffective Fig B GOT FG Connection cable Panel grounding Panel grounding FG FG CN1B CN1A CN3 CN2 LG a PLC Servo GOT FG...

Page 368: ...in Fig B Effective Ineffective Fig B Fig C Attaching the ferrite core to the ground cable connected to the panel having the GOT as shown in Fig C reduces the influence of noise When wiring as shown in Fig C is difficult perform wiring as shown in Fig D Effective Ineffective Fig D Connection cable GOT FG Ground cable led from the panel having the control equipment GOT Ground to the panel Ground cab...

Page 369: ...T I O equipment such as relay and power equipment such as servo amplifier Used Not Not used Measure for the equipment for which the power from the same system is used Connecting an isolation transformer as well as separating the wiring of the GOT power from that of the power of the I O equipment and power equipment reduces the influence of noise Effective Ineffective Main power AC200V PLC power I ...

Page 370: ... the PLC a Power supply module b CPU module c Serial communication unit computer link module Used Not used d Network module Used Not used e Interrupt module Used Not used f Positioning module Used Not used g Number of extension stages stages h If any other module etc is used please describe it Entry area for recurrence when the malfunction occurred after the action is taken 3 Describe the operatio...

Page 371: ...GOT special register GS262 to 264 For details of the system information and GOT special register refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 20 2 1 Error contents display This section describes the example for displaying error code and error message on GOT Popup displaying the error code and error message Advanced alarm popup display System alarm If an err...

Page 372: ...e cannot be confirmed in the system alarm regarding file access however it can be specified by confirming the file access error signal b7 to 10 of system signal 2 2 Error source Error code Description Channel No storage destination 1 Reference Controller 0 to 99 Value of D9008 Error code of CPU for ACPU GS263 User s manual of the ACPU connected with GOT 100 to 299 Error code of the following contr...

Page 373: ...upper limit Delete restored alarm The number of alarm histories that can be observed by the alarm history display function has exceeded the maximum points Delete the restored history to decrease the number of alarm histories 312 No of sampling has exceeded upper limit Delete collected data The collection frequency exceeded the upper limit when Store Memory and Accumulate Average were set in the sc...

Page 374: ...e power supply of the printer 341 Printer error Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been turned on 1 Confirm the printer 2 Turn on the power supply of the printer 345 BCD BIN conversion error Correct data Any value that cannot be converted to a BCD BIN value is being displayed input Change the device data to be displayed to the BCD value Correct the input value to the 4 digits in...

Page 375: ...the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name other peripherals carry out the process to the file register Wait until the processing of other peripherals end and execute the recipe function again 360 0 divisor division error Confirm operation expression Zero division occurred by the data operational expression Review the data operational expression so that the divisor should no...

Page 376: ...ter local station are specified at the CC Link connection via G4 A PLC CPU other than QCPU is accessed Confirm the station number of the project data 407 Accessed other network Change network setting When monitoring other networks Reconfigure the Routing Information Setting of GT Designer3 or the Routing parameters of GX Developer 410 Cannot perform operation because of PLC run mode stop the PLC T...

Page 377: ...tion number set in the Ethernet setting Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer When using the station No switching function check the data of the switching station No device 425 A duplicate IP address has been detected Confirm the setting The IP address of the GOT is the same as that of t...

Page 378: ...ering area size 521 Insufficient user memory RAM capacity The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the user memory RAM Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified buffering area size 522 Unnecessary file deleted to create new file The old file of different contents has been deleted and a new file has been created Note that the old file is deleted and the new file is created if...

Page 379: ... memory Confirm whether the attribute of saving file is for reading only 584 Advance recipe file save error An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file writing Do not pull out the SD card or USB memory while the Advanced Recipe is operating 585 Advanced recipe file upload error An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file reading Do not pull out the SD card or USB memory while t...

Page 380: ...ck the Server The settings for the SNTP server are wrong or the network to the SNTP server is made up incorrectly Check the operating conditions of the STNP server Check the network to the SNTP server 640 An error occurred in a FTP client process Reconfigure the GOT FTP client setting Check the operating status and network line of the FTP server For the error details check the GOT special register...

Page 381: ...or GT Works3 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Accessible range for monitoring GOT1000Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING How to monitor redundant system GOT1000Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNDANT SYSTEM 21 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 21 1 22 COMP...

Page 382: ......

Page 383: ... TO CPU 21 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Continued to next page Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU RS 232 RS 422 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU R120SFCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series R16MTCPU RS 232 RS ...

Page 384: ...U Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU RS 232 2 21 2 1 Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V 4 Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q26DHCCPU LS RS 232 2 21 2 1 MELSEC QS QS001CPU MELSEC L L02CPU 3 L06CPU 3 L26...

Page 385: ...A1NCPU 1 RS 422 21 2 4 A1NCPUP21 1 A1NCPUR21 1 A2NCPU 1 A2NCPUP21 1 A2NCPUR21 1 A2NCPU S1 1 A2NCPUP21 S1 1 A2NCPUR21 S1 1 A3NCPU 1 A3NCPUP21 1 A3NCPUR21 1 MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU RS 422 21 2 4 A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU 1 A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A A0J2HCPU 2 RS 422 21 2 4 A0J2HCPUP21 2 A0J2HCPUR21 2 A0J2HCPU DC24 2 A2CCPU 2 RS 422 21 2 4 A2CCPUP21 ...

Page 386: ... cable Communicati on type Cable model MELSEC Q RS 232 GT11H C30R2 6P 3m GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FA CNV2402CBL 0 2m FA CNV2405CBL 0 5m RS 422 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m GT01 C100R4 25P 10m 13 5m RS 422 connector conversion cable QCPU GOT Connection cable External cable PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connec...

Page 387: ...0m 13 5m L02SCPU L02SCPU P RS 232 GT11H C30R2 6P 3m GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FA CNV2402CBL 0 2m FA CNV2405CBL 0 5m RS 422 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m GT01 C100R4 25P 10m GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13 5m Communication driver Serial MELSEC RS 422 connector conversion cable LCPU Adapter Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable...

Page 388: ... GT11H C PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Adapter Communication type L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L6ADP R2 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422connection diagram 3 13 5m 1 GOT for 1 PLC ...

Page 389: ...version box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model MELSEC QnA RS 422 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m GT01 C100R4 25P 10m GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC Communication driver Serial MELSEC QnACPU Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable QnACPU Connection cable GOT Exter...

Page 390: ...el MELSEC A RS 422 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m GT01 C100R4 25P 10m GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC Communication driver Serial MELSEC ACPU GOT Connector conversion box Connection cable External cable ACPU Connection cable GOT External cable PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication t...

Page 391: ...Number of connectable equipment 1 Model Expansion board Expansion adapter Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number FX5U FX5 422 BD GOT RS 422 GT01 C10R4 8P 1m GT01 C30R4 8P 3m GT01 C100R4 8P 10m GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 Expansion board RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC built in port FX5 485 BD RS 422 RS4...

Page 392: ...version box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment 1 Model Expansion board Expansion adapter Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number FX5UC RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC built in port FX5 485ADP RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 13m 1 GOT for 1 Expansion adap...

Page 393: ... PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment 1 Model Expansion board Expansion adapter Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FX5U FX5 422 BD GOT RS 422 GT11H C15R4 8P GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 Expansion board RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 5 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC built in port FX5 485 BD R...

Page 394: ...d a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Works3 installed can be connected to them individually PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment 1 Model Expansion board Expansion adapter Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FX5UC FX5 232ADP RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 Expansion board ...

Page 395: ...d a peripheral such as a PC with GX Works3 installed can be connected to them individually GOT External cable Expansion adapter FX5UCPU Expansion board PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment 1 Model Expansion board Expansion adapter Communication type FX5U RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 6 13 5m 1 GOT for 1 PLC built in ...

Page 396: ... adapter are connected a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Works3 installed can be connected to them individually PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment 1 Model Expansion board Expansion adapter Communication type FX5UC FX5U 232 ADP RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 Expansion adapter ...

Page 397: ...ial adapter PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Function expansion board 1 Function adapter 1 Communi cation type Cable model FX0 FX0S FX0N RS 422 GT01 C10R4 8P 1m GT01 C30R4 8P 3m GT01 C100R4 8P 10m GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FX1 FX2 FX2C RS 422 GT01 ...

Page 398: ...X2N FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board FX1N CNV BD FX2N CNV BD FX2NC 232ADP RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 6m 1 GOT for 1 function adapter FX0N 232ADP RS 232 GT01 C30R2 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 4 6m FX1NC FX2NC FX2NC 232ADP RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS...

Page 399: ...model FX3GC D FX3GC DSS RS 422 GT01 C10R4 8P 1m GT01 C30R4 8P 3m GT01 C100R4 8P 10m GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC built in port PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment 1 Model Function adapter Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number FX3GC D FX3GC ...

Page 400: ... the function adapter and the FXCPU individually PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment 1 Model Function adapter Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number FX3UC D FX3UC DS FX3UC DSS FX3U 232ADP FX3U 232ADP MB RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT fo...

Page 401: ...FXCPU 2 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Function expansion board 1 Function adapter 1 Communication type Cable model FX0 FX0S FX0N RS 422 GT11H C15R4 8P GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FX1 FX2 FX2C RS 422 GT11H C1...

Page 402: ... number FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board FX1N CNV BD FX2N CNV BD FX2NC 232ADP RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 function adapter FX0N 232ADP RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m FX1NC FX2NC FX2NC 232ADP RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m ...

Page 403: ...S RS 422 connection PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model FX3GC D FX3GC DSS RS 422 GT11H C15R4 8P GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC built in port PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment 1 Model Function adapter Commu...

Page 404: ... installed can be connected to the function adapter and the FXCPU individually PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment 1 Model Function adapter Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FX3UC D FX3UC DS FX3UC DSS FX3U 232ADP FX3U 232ADP MB RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 function adapter ...

Page 405: ...otal distance Number of connectable equipment Model Function expansion board 1 2 Function adapter 2 Communication type FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board FX1N CNV BD FX2N CNV BD FX2NC 232ADP RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 function adapter FX0N 232ADP R...

Page 406: ...eveloper installed can be connected to the function adapter and the FXCPU individually PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment 1 Model Function adapter Communication type FX3GC D FX3GC DSS FX3U 232ADP FX3U 232ADP MB RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 function adapter PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of co...

Page 407: ...T CONNECTION TO CPU 21 2 System Configuration 21 25 21 2 7 Connecting to WSCPU 1 When using the connector conversion box PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model MELSEC WS RS 232 WS0 C20R2 2m GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 5m 1 GOT for 1 PLC MELSEC WS Communication driver WSCPU GOT Con...

Page 408: ...ies are the same as those for connecting to the QCPU 21 2 1 Connecting to QCPU PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Q170MCPU RS 232 GT11H C30R2 6P 3m GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 motion controller CPU Communication driver A QnA L Q CPU LJ71C24 QJ71C24 Q170MCPU GOT ...

Page 409: ...DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG FX PLC side Function expansion board or function adapter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS External cable GT11H C 37P side Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG FX PLC side Function expansion board or function adapter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CD RD RXD SD...

Page 410: ...minating resistor of the PLC side to 330Ω RS422 connection diagram 5 1 Set the terminating resistor of the PLC side to 330Ω Connector conversion box side PLC side terminal block SDA SDB RDA RDB SG 2 7 1 6 5 3 4 8 9 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB External cable GT11H C 37P side PLC side terminal block SDA SDB RDA RDB SG 1 6 7 2 3 10 4 8 5 9 FG Shield RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB External ...

Page 411: ...eparing a cable 1 Cable length The total distance between the GOT and a controller of RS 232 cable must be total distance or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External ...

Page 412: ...me further than the Normal setting when connecting to Q00UJ Q00U Q01U Q02UCPU or Q00J Q00 Q01CPU However the monitor speed may be reduced 3 Set the format to 1 2 MELSEC FX 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 115200bps When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected ...

Page 413: ...etting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmi...

Page 414: ...on speed in GX Works2 1 Click PLC parameter Adapter Serial Setting 2 Set RS 422 485 in Adapter Type 3 Set GOT Connection in Select Function 4 Adjust Communication Speed Setting with the GOT communication setting 21 4 2 Communication detail settings POINT POINT POINT L6ADP R4 adapter For details on the L6ADP R4 adapter refer to the following manual MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design ...

Page 415: ...etting and then transfer the parameter to the programmable controller After the transfer turn off the programmable controller and then turn on the programmable controller again Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system the following time is taken until when the PLC runs QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70 18 seconds ...

Page 416: ...he following manual MELSEC iQ F Series User s Manual Module parameter settings as a default value MELSOFT Connection If it sets up other than a default value it becomes impossible to communicate with GOT 1 Module parameter setting When using FX5 485 BD POINT POINT POINT When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again or rese...

Page 417: ...n module controlled by another CPU on the multiple CPU 2 Mount a safety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version If their pair versions differ the RnSFCPU does not operate Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU RS 232 RS 422 22 2 1 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCP...

Page 418: ...1 Q06HCPU 1 Q12HCPU 1 Q25HCPU 1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU RS 232 RS 422 22 2 2 Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base RS 232 RS 422 22 2 2 Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU RS 232 RS 422 22 2 2 Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q...

Page 419: ...R21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU S1 A2NCPUP21 S1 A2NCPUR21 S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU RS 232 RS 422 22 2 8 A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU 1 A2SCPU 1 A2SHCPU 1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU 1 MELSEC A A0J2HCPU 1 RS 232 RS 422 22 2 8 A0J2HCPUP21 1 A0J2HCPUR21 1 A0J2HCPU DC24 1 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 RS 232 RS 422 22 2 8 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2...

Page 420: ...SEC iQ R Series C Controller module 7 MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71C24 RJ71C24 R2 RJ71C24 R4 MELSEC Q Q mode Motion controller CPU Q Series MELSECNET H remote I O station CNC C70 Robot controller CRnQ 700 QJ71C24 2 QJ71C24 R2 2 QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71CMO 3 QJ71CMON 3 MELSEC L LJ71C24 LJ71C24 R2 MELSEC Q A mode A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SJ71C24 R2 A1SJ71C24 R4 A1SJ71C24 P...

Page 421: ...ber of connectable equipment Model Serial communication module 1 Communic ation type Cable model MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71C24 RJ71C24 R2 RS 232 GT09 C30R2 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 2 GOTs for 1 serial communicati on module RJ71C24 RJ71C24 R4 RS 422 GT09 C30R4 6C 3m GT09 C100R4 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37...

Page 422: ...ctable equipment Model Serial communication module 1 Communication type MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71C24 RJ71C24 R2 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 2 GOTs for 1 serial communication module RJ71C24 RJ71C24 R4 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 3 13m PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Nu...

Page 423: ...ule side refer to the following manual Modem Interface Module User s Manual 2 Two GOTs can be connected with the function version B or later of the serial communication module GOT Serial communication module QCPU Q mode Connection cable External cable PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Serial communication module 1 Communication type ...

Page 424: ...del MELSEC L LJ71C24 LJ71C24 R2 RS 232 GT09 C30R2 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 2 GOTs for 1 serial communicati on module LJ71C24 RS 422 GT09 C30R4 6C 3m GT09 C100R4 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Communication driver Serial MELSEC GOT Serial communication module LCPU Connection cab...

Page 425: ... on the system configuration on the serial communication module side refer to the following manual MELSEC L Serial Communication Module User s Manual Basic GOT Serial communication module LCPU External cable PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Serial communication module 1 Communication type MELSEC L LJ71C24 LJ71C24 R2 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m ...

Page 426: ...71C24 PRF RS 232 GT09 C30R2 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 computer link module A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71C24 R4 RS 422 GT09 C30R4 6C 3m GT09 C100R4 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Communication driver Serial MELSEC GOT Computer link module QCPU A mode Connection cable Connector...

Page 427: ... on the computer link module side refer to the following manual Computer Link Module Com link func Print func User s Manual GOT Computer link module QCPU A mode Connection cable PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Computer link module 1 Communication type MELSEC Q A mode A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71C24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SJ71C24 PRF RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H ...

Page 428: ...C24N AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24N R2 RS 232 GT09 C30R2 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 serial communicati on module AJ71QC24 R4 AJ71QC24N R4 RS 422 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m GT01 C100R4 25P 10m GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24 R4 AJ71QC24N R4 RS 422 GT09 C30R4 6C 3m GT09 C100R4 6C 10m or RS422 con...

Page 429: ...User s Manual When connecting to a computer link module set the communication driver to AJ71C24 UC24 GOT Serial communication module Computer link module QnACPU QnACPU type Connection cable External cable PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Serial communication module 1 or Computer link module 2 Communication Type Cable model MELSEC Qn...

Page 430: ...C24 GOT Serial communication module Computer link module QnACPU QnACPU type External cable PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Serial communication module 1 or Computer link module 2 Communication type MELSEC QnA QnACPU AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24N R2 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 6m 1 GOT for 1 serial communic...

Page 431: ...ink module QnACPU QnACPU type Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Serial communication unit 1 or computer link module 2 Commun ication Type Cable model MELSEC QnA QnACPU A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N1 A1SJ71QC24 R2 A1SJ71QC24N R2 A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 RS 2...

Page 432: ...ernal cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Serial communication unit 1 or computer link module 2 Communication type Cable model MELSEC QnA QnACPU A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N1 A1SJ71QC24 R2 A1SJ71QC24N R2 A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 serial communication module MELSEC QnA QnACPU A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71...

Page 433: ...nc User s Manual GOT Serial communication module Computer link module QnACPU QnACPU type External cable PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Serial communication unit 1 or computer link module 2 Communication type MELSEC QnA QnACPU A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N1 A1SJ71QC24 R2 A1SJ71QC24N R2 A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 con...

Page 434: ...l MELSEC A AnCPU AJ71UC24 RS 232 GT09 C30R2 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 computer link module AJ71UC24 RS 422 GT09 C30R4 6C 3m GT09 C100R4 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m AJ71C24 UC24 Communication driver GOT Computer link module ACPU AnCPU type Connection cable Connect...

Page 435: ... distance Number of connectable equipment Model Computer link module 1 Communication type MELSEC A AnCPU AJ71UC24 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 6m 1 GOT for 1 computer link module AJ71UC24 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 3 13m PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connec...

Page 436: ...cation type Cable model MELSEC A AnSCPU A0J2H A2CCPUC A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71C24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SJ71C24 PRF A1SCPUC24 R2 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 computer link module A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71C24 R4 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m GOT Computer link module ACPU AnSPUtype A0J2HCPU...

Page 437: ... 9 pin PLC side External cable GT11H C 37P side PLC side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS External cab...

Page 438: ...al cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 22 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection Diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SDA RDA RSA CSA SG SDB RDB RSB CSB FG RDA SDA SG RDB SDB FG R Connector conversion box side PLC side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FG R Ext...

Page 439: ...ctor refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable Connecting terminating resistors 1 Serial communication module or computer link module side Connect the terminating resistors 330Ω 1 4W orange orange brown on the serial communication module or com...

Page 440: ... monitor screen logging recipe function etc However the range may affect the sequence scan time when connecting to Q00UJ Q00U Q01U Q02UCPU or Q00J Q00 Q01CPU If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time do not set High This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above 2 Set this range if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the Normal setting ...

Page 441: ...undamentals Switch No CH1 side CH2 side Switch 1 0000H Switch 2 0000H Switch 3 0000H Switch 4 0000H Switch 5 0000H 0000H Format 1 Format Transmission Speed 2 38400bps Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 19200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data Bit Set this it...

Page 442: ...LC CPU OFF then back ON again or reset the PLC CPU 2 Connection of multiple GOTs To some serial communication module models two GOTs can be connected using both CH1 and CH2 Transmission specifications Settings Data bit 8bits Parity bit Yes Odd Stop Bit 1bit Sum Check Enable Transmission speed Set the same transmission speed on both the GOT and the PLC Model Refer to Serial communication module MEL...

Page 443: ...transmission specifications 2 The serial communication module operates at the transmission speed set on the GOT 3 When the value of switch setting is other than 0 the setting of Format and Transmission Speed on the GOT side are required to be changed 22 4 2 Communication detail settings Switch No Bit Description Set value 3 Position Specified value Switch 1 b0 OFF CH1 transmiss ion settings 1 Oper...

Page 444: ... communication module QnA Series For details of the serial communication module QnA Series refer to the following manual Serial Communication Module User s Manual Modem Function Additional Version Switch setting on serial communication module Set the Station number switches the Mode switch for the channel used for GOT connection and the Transmission specifications switches 1 Mode setting switch 1 ...

Page 445: ...0bps in the case of A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 When the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is within 115200bps within 230400bps in the case of A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 a controller other than GOT can be connected to the computer link module When only one device is connected to either of the interfaces a maximum transmission speed of 115200bps can be set to the one where the device is connected In this ins...

Page 446: ... 1 2 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SJ71C24 R2 A1SJ71C24 PRF 8 0 2 3 5 7 8 0 2 3 5 7 8 9 0 3 4 B CD F A1SJ71UC24 R4 SCAN SCAN E SET E SIO E ST DWN MD L NEU NAK ACK C N P S PRO SIO COM MD RUN RD SD CPU SW 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 10 STATION NO 1 MODE SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG NC RS 422 485 A1SJ71UC24 R4 1 3 2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71C24 R4 PULL MELSEC A1SCPU24 R2 STOP RUN RESET RESET L CLR RUN E...

Page 447: ...5 Transmission speed setting Consistent with the GOT side specifications See descripti ons below SW06 SW07 SW08 Data bit setting 8bits ON SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON SW10 Even odd parity setting Odd OFF SW11 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW12 Sum check setting Set ON Setting switch Transmission speed 1 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps SW05 OFF ON OFF SW06 OFF OFF ON SW07 ON ON ON Transmission specification...

Page 448: ...0bps 9600bps 19200bps SW05 OFF ON OFF SW06 OFF OFF ON SW07 ON ON ON Transmission specifications setting switch Setting switch Description Set value 1 Write during RUN enabled disabled setting Enabled ON 2 Transmission speed setting Consistent with the GOT side specifications See description s below 3 4 5 Data bit setting 8bits ON 6 Parity bit setting Set ON 7 Even odd parity setting Odd OFF 8 Stop...

Page 449: ...r or when resetting Therefore it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available a system alarm occurs Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual When monitoring the Q170MCPU Set CPU No to 2 in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area ...

Page 450: ...22 34 22 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 22 6 Precautions ...

Page 451: ...t page 1 Mount a safety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version If their pair versions differ the RnSFCPU does not operate Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU Ethernet 23 2 1 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU...

Page 452: ...CPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Ethernet 23 2 1 23 2 2 Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V 3 ...

Page 453: ...t 23 2 1 A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A A0J2HCPU Ethernet 23 2 1 A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU S3 A1FXCPU Motion controller CPU Q Series Q172CPU 1 2 Ethernet 23 2 1 Q173CPU 1 2 Q172CPUN 1 Q173CPUN 1 Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU S1 Ethernet 23 2 ...

Page 454: ...thernet module 1 MELSEC iQ R Series Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series C Controller module 2 MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71EN71 MELSEC Q Q mode MELSEC QS Motion controller CPU Q Series CNC C70 Robot controller CRnQ 700 QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 MELSEC QnA AJ71QE71N3 T AJ71QE71N B5 AJ71QE71N B2 AJ71QE71N T AJ71QE71N B5T AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71 B5 A1SJ71QE71N3 T A1SJ71QE71N B5 A1SJ71QE71N B...

Page 455: ...1 Ethernet 10BASE T Shielded twisted pair cable STP or Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP Category 3 4 and 5 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable STP Category 5 and 5e GT16H CNB 42S GT14H C30 42P 3m GT14H C60 42P 6m GT14H C100 42P 10m 100m 2 128 GOTs 6 recommend ed to 16 units or less GT16H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m MELSEC Q Q mode MELSEC QS Motion controller CP...

Page 456: ...l Basic For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual For A Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual 4 Select one of the following Type in Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71EN71 Ethernet module Q Series QJ71E71 Ethernet module QnA Series AJ71QE71 Ethernet module A Series AJ71E71 For Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 23 3 3 Ethernet setting 5 Whe...

Page 457: ...pair cable STP Category 5 and 5e GT16H CNB 42S GT14H C30 42P 3m GT14H C60 42P 6m GT14H C100 42P 10m 100m 2 2 GOTs GT16H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m MELSEC FX FX3UC FX3UC 1PS 5V FX2NC CNV IF FX3U ENET L 5 GT16H CNB 42S GT14H C30 42P 3m GT14H C60 42P 6m GT14H C100 42P 10m GT16H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m MELSEC FX FX3U FX3U CNV BD FX...

Page 458: ...lowing manuals For FX Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual 4 Select one of the following Type in Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 Ethernet module FX Series FX For Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 23 3 3 Ethernet setting 5 When using an Ethernet module with the FX3UC series FX3UC 1PS 5V or FX2NC CNV IF is required 6 When using an Ethernet module with the FX3U series FX3U CNV BD FX...

Page 459: ...10m MELSEC QnUDE H 4 5 MELSEC QnUD P V 4 5 GT16H CNB 42S GT14H C30 42P 3m GT14H C60 42P 6m GT14H C100 42P 10m GT16H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series GT16H CNB 42S GT14H C30 42P 3m GT14H C60 42P 6m GT14H C100 42P 10m GT16H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m C Controller module Q Series GT16H CNB 42S GT14H C...

Page 460: ...odes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 For the system configuration of Built in Ethernet port QCPU refer to the following manual QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 5 Select QnUD P V QnUDEH for Ty...

Page 461: ... repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 For the system configuration of the CNC C70 refer to the following manual C70 Series SET UP ...

Page 462: ...nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 For the system configuration on the CC Link IE Field Network module refer to the CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module manual 4 Select QJ71E71 for Type in Ethernet of GT D...

Page 463: ...e peripheral I F of Q170MCPU or Q17nDCPU S1 set as shown below Use the GT Designer3 Version1 12N or later Use Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Gateway for the communication driver Select QnUDE H for Controller Type in Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 23 3 3 Ethernet setting 3 Use sub version C or later for GT11H C 37P PLC 2 Connection cable 1 Connector co...

Page 464: ...rnet setting 4 When the drive is Ethernet FX Gateway the range is 1 to 64 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 3 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 120 4 GOT IP Address 2 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 2 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connec...

Page 465: ... FX5CPU 5562 fixed RJ71EN71 Q17nNC QJ71E71 AJ71QE71 5001 fixed FX 5551 When using FX3U ENET L 5556 When using FX3U ENET ADP When using built in Ethernet port FXCPU 5556 3 When selecting the FX in Controller Type the communication type is the TCP fixed 4 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 23 3 2 ...

Page 466: ...ting parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station For the setting refer to the following 23 4 PLC Side Setting 2 Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator a The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green Set items which are displayed in green cells from the MELSOFT Navigator b When the settings of Transfer netw...

Page 467: ...PU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU S1 23 4 5 23 4 6 23 4 15 C Controller module Q12DCCPU V Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q26DHCCPU LS 23 4 8 Built in Ethernet port LCPU L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT 23 4 5 23 4 6 Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71EN71 23 4 3 Ethernet module Q Series QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 23 4 7 Ethernet module L Series LJ71E71 100 ...

Page 468: ...ings 2 Ethernet setting When connecting Built in Ethernet port RCPU to a GOT the setting items for the network No and station No do not exist at the PLC side However these virtual values must be set on the GOT side Therefore set the network No and station No Set the network No that does not exist on the network system and any station No 1 Controller setting 2 Ethernet setting 1 Set the same value ...

Page 469: ... following manual Manuals of MELSEC iQ R Series Manuals of MELSEC iQ F Series 23 4 2 Connecting to Built in Ethernet port CPU multiple connection This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration POINT POINT POINT Built in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built in Ethernet port CPU refer to the following manual Manuals of ME...

Page 470: ...alue as that of GOT N W No 2 Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No and the PLC No of other PLCs on the same network 3 In the case of MELSEC iQ F series it is FX5CPU 4 In the case of MELSEC iQ F series it is 5562 fixed 5 In the case of MELSEC iQ F series it is TCP fixed Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP Address 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask Default Gateway Online Program C...

Page 471: ...OINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a Ping test from the PLC For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 refer to the following manual Manuals of MELSEC iQ R Series 23 4 3 Connecting to Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series in the following case o...

Page 472: ...eters to the PLC CPU turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again or reset the PLC CPU Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP Address 192 168 3 19 Subnet Mask Default Gateway Setting Method of Network No and Station No Do Not Use IP Address Network No 1 1 Station No 2 2 Transient Transmission Group No Use default value Online Program Change Permission Protection Setting Communication Dat...

Page 473: ... Ethernet module turns on when the module is ready to communicate For confirming the communication state refer to the following Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 1 Controller setting 2 Ethernet setting POINT POINT POINT Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the...

Page 474: ... settings of the GOT and C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series in the following case of system configuration Use CW Configurator for the C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series communication settings POINT POINT POINT C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series For details of C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series refer to the following manual Manuals of C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series System co...

Page 475: ... do not exist at the PLC side However these virtual values must be set on the GOT side Therefore set the network No and station No Set the network No that does not exist on the network system and any station No 1 Controller setting 2 Ethernet setting 1 Set the same value as that of GOT N W No 2 Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No and the PLC No of other PLCs on the same network Item ...

Page 476: ...GOT and Built in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration POINT POINT POINT Connecting to Built in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built in Ethernet port CPU refer to the following manual QnUCPU User s Manual Communication via Built in Ethernet Port MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In Ethernet Function System configuration For connecting one Built in Ethernet port QC...

Page 477: ...ws Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C Ping 192 168 3 39 Reply from 192 168 3 39 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 32 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 3 39 Request timed out 2 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network p...

Page 478: ...re set to the default Network No 1 PLC No 1 IP address 192 168 0 18 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Network No 1 virtual PLC No 2 virtual IP address 192 168 0 1 Port No 5006 fixed Communication format UDP fixed Connecting to Built in Ethernet port CPU The settings other than the following are set to the default 1 Network No 1 virtual PLC No 3 virtual IP address 192 168 0 2 Port No 5006...

Page 479: ...Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C Ping 192 168 0 1 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 32 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 0 1 Request timed out 2 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network paramet...

Page 480: ...g Q170MCPU set it according to the system configuration 2 Set the same network No as that of the GOT 3 Do not set the same station No as that of the GOT 4 Set when using Ethernet module in a redundant QnPRHCPU system GOT The settings other than the following are set to the default 1 Network No 1 PLC No 1 IP address 192 168 0 18 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Network No 1 PLC No 2 IP a...

Page 481: ...kinds of Transfer Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following 23 3 4 Routing parameter setting 4 Communication confirmation The INIT LED on the Ethernet module turns on when the module is ready to communicate For confirming the communication state refer to th...

Page 482: ... check the followings and execute the Ping command again Mounting condition of Ethernet module Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU faulty or not IP address of GOT specified by Ping command POINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC For det...

Page 483: ...ry As necessary Not necessary 1 If the IP address of the C controller module Q Series has been changed input the changed IP address or host name 2 If the account of the C controller module Q Series has been changed input the changed user name and password b Online operation Necessary As necessary Not necessary GOT The settings other than the following are set to the default Network No 1 PLC No 1 I...

Page 484: ...n IP Address 192 168 3 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway IP address setting CH2 Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Points occupied by empty slot Use default value Remote reset Output mode at STOP to RUN Intelligent function module settings Initial settings of intelligent function module WDT Watching timer setting Error check Operation mode at the time of error Module sync...

Page 485: ...nt from that of the GOT PLC No and the PLC No of other PLCs on the same network Checking communication state of C controller module Q Series 1 When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C Ping 192 168 3 1 Reply from 192 168 3 1 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 32 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 3 1 Request timed o...

Page 486: ...on format UDP fixed Network No 1 PLC No 2 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Ethernet module The settings other than the following are set to the default 1 IP address 192 168 0 19 Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 Switch settings of Ethernet module Network parameter of GX Developer Operation mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Online...

Page 487: ... reset the PLC CPU Network parameter of GX Developer 1 Network parameter Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 Set the same network No as that of the GOT 2 Do not set the same station No as that of the GOT POINT POINT POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU turn off and then on or reset the PLC CPU Exchange condition setting switch Setting swit...

Page 488: ...T POINT POINT Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 23 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Range Target network No 1 to 239 Relay network No 1 to 239 Relay station No 1 to 64 RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 RDY BSY SW ERR COM ERR CPU R W TEST TEST ERR BSY SW ERR COM ERR CPU ...

Page 489: ...OT The settings other than the following are set to the default 2 2 1 Network No 1 PLC No 1 IP address 192 168 0 18 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Network No 1 virtual PLC No 2 virtual IP address 192 168 0 19 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Ethernet module The settings other than the following are set to the default Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 Switch se...

Page 490: ...CP timeout error OFF SW2 Data code setting binary code OFF fixed SW3 CPU exchange timing setting Enable write at RUN time ON fixed SW4 Initial timing setting OFF Device Application M102 COM ERR turned off command D100 IP address of Ethernet module D110 Application setting D111 Port No of Ethernet module D112 to D113 IP address of GOT D114 Port No of GOT D200 Initial fault code Buffer memory addres...

Page 491: ...hen on or reset the PLC CPU IP address of Ethernet module 192 168 0 19 Initial request COM ERR turned off request Clear the initial fault code Set to the permit of communication while stopping the PLC CPU Communication format UDP IP Port No of Ethernet module 5001 IP address of GOT When GOT is used FFFFFFFFH Port No of GOT When GOT is used FFFFH Read the initial fault code Request to open Normal c...

Page 492: ...signer3 refer to the following 23 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 RDY BSY SW ERR COM ERR CPU R W TEST TEST ERR BSY SW ERR COM ERR CPU R W TEST ERR TEST RDY RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 A1SJ71E71N3 T A1SJ71E71N B5 A1SJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N T A1SJ71E71N B5T A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 AJ71E71N3 T AJ71E71N B5 AJ7...

Page 493: ...onfiguration tool 1 Ethernet setting Set the Ethernet parameter with FX3U ENET L Configuration tool For using FX3U ENET L Configuration tool install GX Developer Ver 8 88S or later on the personal computer For details on FX3U ENET L Configuration tool refer to the following manual FX3U ENET L Configuration tool Operation manual Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 Set the number of the Ethernet ...

Page 494: ... then on or reset the PLC CPU 3 Open settings POINT POINT POINT When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral devices The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs and devices must be set Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Communication data code 1 Use default value IP address 192 168 0 19 Initial timing 1 Use default value Send frame setting TCP Existence confirmation s...

Page 495: ...l according to the installation position of FX3U ENET ADP on the CPU body 2 The default value of IP address is 192 168 1 250 Set the IP address according to the system configuration POINT POINT POINT When changing Ethernet parameter After writing Ethernet parameters to the PLC CPU turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again 2 Open Setting POINT POINT POINT When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripher...

Page 496: ... abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Mounting condition of Ethernet module Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU faulty or not IP address of GOT specified by Ping command POINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of FX3U ENET L Configuration tool Ethernet diagnosti...

Page 497: ...E GX Works2 Ver 1 91V or later is required For details on the setting of FX3GE refer to the following manual FX3GE SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS HARDWARE MANUAL Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 The default value of IP address is 192 168 1 250 Set the IP address according to the system configuration POINT POINT POINT When changing Ethernet parameter After writing Ethernet parameters to the ...

Page 498: ...NT Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 23 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Protocol TCP Open System MELSOFT Connection Item Setting Use default value GOT NET No 1 GOT PLC No 1 GOT IP Address 192 168 0 18 GOT Port No Communication 5019 G...

Page 499: ...CPU faulty or not IP address of GOT specified by Ping command 23 4 13 Connecting to Display I F CNC C70 This section describes the settings of the GOT and Display I F CNC C70 in the following case of the system configuration POINT POINT POINT Display I F CNC C70 For details of the Display I F CNC C70 refer to the following manual C70 Series SET UP MANUAL System configuration IP address settings of...

Page 500: ... a When normal communication C Ping 192 168 0 19 Reply from 192 168 0 19 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 64 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 0 19 Request timed out 2 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Mounting condition of CNC C70 Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation st...

Page 501: ...Routing parameter setting Set the followings as necessary Up to 64 Transfer Network No s can be set However the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more multiple times Therefore the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Transfer Network No s GOT Use default value for settings other than the following Network No 3 PC No 1 IP address 192...

Page 502: ...e fourth octet PLC No of the Ethernet adapter module IP address 3 Set according to the Ethernet adapter module IP address 3 Routing parameter setting 1 Set the same value as the Ethernet adapter module network No 2 Set according to the third octet PLC No of the Ethernet adapter module IP address 3 Set according to the fourth octet PLC No of the Ethernet adapter module IP address Item Set value Net...

Page 503: ...ort CPU refer to the following manual User s Manual of Q173D S CPU Q172D S CPU and Q170MCPU System configuration Leave the Built in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU settings as default in the following system configuration Set Ethernet for Controller Setting on GT Designer3 and then connect Built in Ethernet port QCPU to the GOT 1 For the settings when using system devices including a hub and a...

Page 504: ...ing the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C Ping 192 168 3 39 Reply from 192 168 3 39 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 32 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 3 39 Request timed out 2 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Cable connecting condition Confi...

Page 505: ...ION 24 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 23 ETHERNET CONNECTION 23 4 PLC Side Setting 23 55 POINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 GX Developer refer to the following manual GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common GX Developer Version 8 Oper...

Page 506: ...SD memory card becomes available When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available a system alarm occurs Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting PLC No When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each PLC No to the GOT 23 3 1 Setting communication int...

Page 507: ...rnet module to the PLC and set the routing setting to monitor as other network Use the multi channel function to set each channel with the network No to be monitored When connecting to Built in Ethernet port of Built in Ethernet port CPU Connect a GOT after turning ON the power of the network equipment such as a Built in Ethernet port CPU or a HUB to enable the communication When the communication...

Page 508: ...23 58 23 ETHERNET CONNECTION 23 5 Precautions ...

Page 509: ...4 24 1 Connectable Model List 24 1 1 PLC Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models Continued to next page Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU CC Link G4 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU R120SFCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Se...

Page 510: ...UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V 2 Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q26DHCCPU LS RS 232 24 2 1 MELSEC QS QS001CPU MELSEC L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P CC Link G4 24 2 2 MELSEC Q A mod...

Page 511: ...HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU S3 A1FXCPU Motion controller CPU Q Series Q172CPU 1 2 CC Link G4 24 2 1 Q173CPU 1 2 Q172CPUN 1 Q173CPUN 1 Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU S1 Q173DCPU S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU 3 Q170MSCPU 4 Q170MSCPU S1 4 Motion controller CPU A Series controller CPU A Series A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU S3...

Page 512: ...BT11N 4 The distance from the GOT to the peripheral connection module Connection cable 2 External cable PLC Connection cable 1 Peripheral connection module Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Model CC Link module 1 Cable model Max distan ce Model Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number MELSEC Q CCon...

Page 513: ... following CC Link Partner Association s home page http www cc link org 3 The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the transmission speed For details refer to the following manual CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual QJ61BT11N 4 The distance from the GOT to the peripheral connection module Connection cabl...

Page 514: ...le 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Model CC Link module 1 Cable model Max distance Model Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number L02CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L26CPU PBT LJ61BT11 CC Link dedicated cable 2 3 AJ65BT R2N RS 232 GT09C30R2 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 ...

Page 515: ...n cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT LCPU PLC Connection cable 1 Peripheralconnection module Connection cable 2 External cable GOT Model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Model CC Link module 1 Cable model Max distance Model Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number L02CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L26CPU PBT LJ61BT11 CC Link dedicated cable 2 3 AJ65BT R2N RS 232...

Page 516: ...fications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable Connector conversion box side D Sub 9 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PLC side 7 3 2 6 5 4 1 8 9 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS RS RTS SD TXD RD RXD DR DSR SG ER DTR CD CS CTS External cable GT11H C 37P side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PLC side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS C...

Page 517: ...nt POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3...

Page 518: ...etting switch and operation setting DIP switch 1 Station number setting switch Necessary As necessary Not necessary 2 Data link transmission speed setting switch Necessary As necessary Not necessary Model Reference Peripheral connection module AJ65BT G4 S3 24 5 1 AJ65BT R2N 24 5 2 CC Link module QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N 24 5 3 CC Link module 1 Station type Station No Mode All connect count Transmission ...

Page 519: ...e CC Link module refer to the following manual CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual QJ61BT11N MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual 3 CC Link function built in CPU For details on the CC Link function built in CPU refer to the following manual MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual System configuration 1 The Start I O No of the CC Link module is se...

Page 520: ...ion mode setting switch to 5 MELSOFT connection mode 2 RS 232 transmission setting switch Turn OFF SW1 through SW8 of the RS 232 transmission setting switch If any switch of SW1 through SW8 is ON a setting error will occur RUN LED turns off Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection AJ65BT R2N station number setting 1 to 64 Data link transmission speed ...

Page 521: ...ecessary Not necessary Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting master station 0 fixed Transmission rate mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Transmission rate mode setting 0 156kbps 1 625kbps 2 2 5Mbps 3 5Mbps 4 10Mbps 1 2 QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connec...

Page 522: ...on The GOT starts to monitor after the L RUN LED of AJ65BT G4 S3 turns on It does not monitor while the L RUN LED turns off 24 5 5 Parameter setting when connecting to C controller module Q Series Use SW3PVC CCPU J Ver 3 04E or later for the C Controller module setting utility 1 Target module Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 If the IP address of the C controller module Q Series has been chan...

Page 523: ...ing of GT Designer3 For the setting method of Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 24 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No of boards in module 1 Target unit 1 Start I O No 0000H Channel No Use default value Operation setting Type Master station fixed Mode 1 Remote net Ver 1 mode Expanded cyclic setting...

Page 524: ...ts before the SD card becomes available a system alarm occurs Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Connection to Q17nDCPU Q170MCPU CNC C70 and CRnQ 700 The Q17nDCPU Q170MCPU CNC C70 and CRnQ 700 are applicable to the CC Link network system Ver 2 only For connecting to the CC Link Via G4 network system set the CC L...

Page 525: ...MITSUBISHI FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS 25 INVERTER CONNECTION 25 1 26 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 26 1 27 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 27 1 28 CNC CONNECTION 28 1 ...

Page 526: ......

Page 527: ...Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series name Model Clock Communication type Refer to FREQROL FREQROL A500 A500L RS 422 25 2 1 FREQROL F500 F500L FREQROL V500 V500L FREQROL E500 RS 422 25 2 2 FREQROL S500 S500E FREQROL F500J FREQROL D700 FREQROL F700PJ FREQROL E700 RS 422 25 2 3 FREQROL A700 RS 422 25 2 4 FREQROL F700 FREQROL F700P FREQROL A800 F800 RS 422 25 ...

Page 528: ...iagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter FREQROL A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L FR A5NR RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 3 Inverter Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Computerlink option Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L 1 RS 4...

Page 529: ...tion Communication type FREQROL A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L FR A5NR RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 5 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter Inverter Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 3 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number M...

Page 530: ...ion cable 1 Distributor 3 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number FREQROL A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 13 RS422 connection diagram 6 BMJ 8 Recomme nded RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37...

Page 531: ...gram number FREQROL A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L FR A5NR RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 14 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 10 inverters for 1 GOT Inverter Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Computerlink option Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L ...

Page 532: ...el Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Computer link option Communication type FREQROL A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L FR A5NR RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 16 13m 10 inverters for 1 GOT Inverter Computer link option Inverter Computer link option External cable GOT ...

Page 533: ...xternal cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL E500 S500 S500E F500J D700 F700PJ 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter Inverter Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Comm...

Page 534: ...nection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 3 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number FREQROL E500 S500 S500E F500J D700 F700PJ 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 13 RS422 connection diagram 6 BMJ 8 Recomme nded RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT...

Page 535: ... the inverter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable Inverter Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 2 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 3 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number FREQROL E500 S500 S500E F500J D700 F700PJ 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 13 RS422 connection diag...

Page 536: ...422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter FREQROL E700 sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX 2 FR E7TR 2 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 10 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m Inverter Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Control termin...

Page 537: ...uipment Model Control terminal option Communication type FREQROLE700 sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX 1 FR E7TR 1 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 12 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter Inverter Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 2 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 3 Number of connectable equipment Model Commu...

Page 538: ...n cable 1 Distributor 2 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 3 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number FREQROL E700 sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 13 RS422 connection diagram 6 BMJ 8 Recomme nded RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 ...

Page 539: ...nt Model Control terminal option Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL E700 sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX 1 FR E7TR 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 20 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 10 inverters for 1 GOT Inverter Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Control terminal option Communic...

Page 540: ...60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 22 13m 10 inverters for 1 GOT Inverter Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL A700 F700 F700P PU port RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 i...

Page 541: ... equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL A700 F700 F700P PU port RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter FREQROL A700 F700 F700P Built in RS485 terminal block RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 8 Inverter External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type ...

Page 542: ...2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number FREQROL A700 F700 F700P PU port RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 13 RS422 connection diagram 6 BMJ 8 Recomme nded RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 10 in...

Page 543: ...Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable Inverter Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number FREQROL A700 F700 F700P PU port RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 13 RS422 connection diagram 6 BMJ 8 Recomme nded R...

Page 544: ...al block RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 17 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 10 inverters for 1 GOT FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Connection cable Inverter Connector conversion box External cable GOT Inverter Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Co...

Page 545: ...ES 25 INVERTER CONNECTION 25 2 System Configuration 25 19 3 When using the external cable GT11H C Inverter External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type FREQROL A700 F700 F700P Built in RS485 terminal block RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 19 13m 10 inverters for 1 GOT Inverter Inverter External cable GOT ...

Page 546: ...1H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter FREQROL A800 F800 Built in RS485 terminal block RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 7 Inverter Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL A800 F800 PU port RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10...

Page 547: ...ication type FREQROL A800 F800 Built in RS485 terminal block RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 9 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter Inverter Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number Model Connect...

Page 548: ...am number FREQROL A800 F800 PU port RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 13 RS422 connection diagram 6 BMJ 8 Recomme nded RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 10 inverters for 1 GOT Inverter Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number FR...

Page 549: ...quipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL A800 F800 Built in RS485 terminal block RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 18 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 10 inverters for 1 GOT Inverter External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type FREQROL A800 F800 Built in RS485 terminal block RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT1...

Page 550: ...diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter Inverter Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number MD CX522 K A0 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter Inverter External cab...

Page 551: ... Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable Inverter Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 2 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 3 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number MD CX522 K A0 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 6 RS422 connection diagram 6 BMJ 8 Recom...

Page 552: ...Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number MD CX522 K A0 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 6 RS422 connection diagram 6 BMJ 8 Recomme nded RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 10 inverters for 1 GOT Inverter Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 2 External cable GOT model ...

Page 553: ...P side FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG 3 6 8 2 5 4 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RDA RDB P5S P5S SDA SDB SG Inverter or Distributor side Modular connector RS422 connection diagram 3 1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR A5NR RS422 connection diagram 4 RS422 connection diagram 5 RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG ...

Page 554: ...A SDB RDA RDB P5S P5S SG Inverter side or distributor side Modular connector Distributor side Modular connector RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 SDA1 TXD1 SDB1 TXD1 RDA1 RXD1 RDB1 RXD1 SG GND Connector conversion box side Inverter side RS485 terminal block built into the inverter 1 External cable GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9...

Page 555: ...om the GOT RS422 connection diagram 12 1 Turn ON 100Ω the terminator switch of the FR E7TR farthest from the GOT RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG Connector conversion box side FR E7TR side 1 terminal block External cable GT11H C 37P side SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB FG Shield 2 3 6 7 10 4 5 8 9 1 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FR E7TR side 1 terminal block Exter...

Page 556: ...22 connection diagram 14 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDR 1 6 2 7 5 3 8 4 9 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDR RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDR 1 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB FG FR A5NR side terminal block Station No 0 FR A5NR side terminal block Station No 1 FR A5NR side terminal block Station No n Connector conversion box side RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDR 2 3 6 7 10 4 5 8 9 1 FR A5NR side terminal block Station No 0 RDA RDB SD...

Page 557: ... GND Built in RS 485 terminal block Station No 1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 GND SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 GND Built in RS 485 terminal block 1 Station No n Connector conversion box side SG SDB SDA RDB RDA RSA RSB CSA CSB FG Shield SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 GND GND RDB1 RDA1 SDB1 SDA1 10 3 2 7 6 4 5 8 9 1 Built in RS 485 terminal block Station No 0 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 GND SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 GND Built in RS 485 termi...

Page 558: ...R side terminal block Station No 0 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG SDB SDA RDB RDA SG FR E7TR side terminal block Station No 1 SDA SDB RDA RDB SDB SDA RDB RDA SG SG FR E7TR side terminal block 1 Station No 2 Connector conversion box side SG SDB SDA RDB RDA RSA RSB CSA CSB FG Shield SDA SDA SDB RDA RDB SG SDA SDA SDB RDA RDB SG SG RDB RDA SDB SG RDB RDA SDB 10 3 2 7 6 4 5 8 9 1 FR E7TR side terminal block 2 Sta...

Page 559: ...nectors and cables shown in the table below or the comparable products Refer to the manual for the inverter 5 Terminal block layout in the FR A5NR computer link option Attach this option to the A500 and F500 Series 6 Terminal block layout in the FR E7TR control terminal option Mount the FR E7TR to the E700 series Pin No Signal name Remark 1 GND SG 2 P5S Not used 3 RXD RDA 4 TXD SDB 5 TXD SDA 6 RXD...

Page 560: ... manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective HINT HINT HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example faulty station that has co...

Page 561: ... with the GOT is disabled 1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL E500 series 2 Settings on the GOT can be changed When changing the settings on the GOT be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings 3 Inverter default values No need to change 4 There is no setting for this item on the inverter side 5 The setting is required for ...

Page 562: ...d when the GOT is connected to the PU connector on the inverter side 5 There is no setting for this item on the inverter side 6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR A5NR is used GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 FR A5NR Option unit Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Settings...

Page 563: ... GOT can be changed When changing the settings on the GOT be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings 3 Inverter default values No need to change GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 342 FR A5NR Option unit Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Settings...

Page 564: ...on station number and Communication EEPROM write selection can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side 1 When the value of Pr 999 is monitored 9999 is always monitored GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 340 Pr 342 Pr 549 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Settings PU communication s...

Page 565: ...n the value of Pr 999 is monitored 9999 is always monitored GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 340 Pr 342 RS 485 terminal Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Pr 549 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Settings PU connector RS 485 terminal PU communication station number RS 485 communication station number Pr 117 Pr 331 0 to ...

Page 566: ... destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 340 Pr 342 RS 485 terminal Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Pr 549 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Settings PU connector RS 485 terminal PU communication station number RS 485 communication station number Pr 117 Pr 331 0 to 31 25 5 13 Station number setting PU communication speed RS 485 communicat...

Page 567: ...ector on the inverter side GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 340 Pr 342 RS 485 terminal Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Pr 549 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting PU connector RS 485 terminal PU communication station number RS 485 communication station number Pr 117 Pr 331 0 to 31 25 5 13 Station num...

Page 568: ...nge the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings 3 Sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX series default values No need to change Parameter No Set value Description Operation in parameter setting mode Pr 999 1 10 GOT Initial settings PU connector AUTO GOT 1 Write 11 GOT initial setting RS 485 terminal GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79...

Page 569: ... specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 155 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification wi...

Page 570: ...change Do not make any change for each communication parameter of the inverter side from GOT If changed communication with the inverter will no longer be possible 2 When setting 8888 or 9999 to inverter parameter Pr 8888 and 9999 designate special functions When specifying the values from the GOT1000 it will be as follows Screen switching devices and system information devices Make sure to use GD ...

Page 571: ...ER CONNECTION 26 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models 1 For the RS 422 communication use MELSERVO J4 of software version A3 or a later version Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to MELSERVO J2 Super MR J2S A RS 232 RS 422 26 2 1 MR J2S CP MR J2S CL MELSERVO J2M MR J2M P8A RS 232 RS 422 26 2 1 MR J2M DU MELSERVO J3 MR J3 A RS 232 RS 422 26 2 2 MR J3 T M...

Page 572: ...nnectable equipment Series name Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number MELSERVO J2 Super 1 RS 232 MR CPCATCBL3M 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier MELSERVO J2M 1 Servo amplifier Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series name Communication type Cable model Connection d...

Page 573: ...ipment Series name Communication type MELSERVO J2 Super 1 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier MELSERVO J2M 1 Servo amplifier Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series name Communication type Connection diagram number MELSERVO J2 Super 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagr...

Page 574: ...H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 32 axes for 1 GOT Multi drop communication MELSERVO J2M 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 6 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 0 to 31 stations for 1 GOT Servo amplifier External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series name Communication type MELSERVO J2 Super 1 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connec...

Page 575: ... 37P 1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3 2 The distance from the GOT to the interface converter or the conversion cable Connection cable External connection cable Servo amplifier Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Series name RS 422 232 interface converter RS 422 232 conversion cable Communication ty...

Page 576: ...Connection cable 3 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 3 Number of connectable equipment Series name Communic ation type Connection diagram number Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number MELSERVO J4 1 J3 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 8 RS422 connection diagram 4 BMJ 8 Recom mended RS422 connection diagram 3 BMJ 8 Re...

Page 577: ...External connection cable Servo amplifier Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 2 Connection cable 2 Distributor 2 Connection cable 3 External cable GOT model Total distance 3 Number of connectable equipment Series name Commu nication type Connection diagram number Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number MELSERVO J4 1 J3 1 RS 422 RS422 conn...

Page 578: ... RS422 232 interface converter Servo amplifier Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 3 Connection cable 2 Distributor 3 RS 422 232 interface converter 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Series name Connection diagram number Connection diagram number Model Connection diagram number Model Model Commu nication type MELSERVO J4 ...

Page 579: ...al cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series name Communication type Connection diagram number MELSERVO JE 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 9 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 32 axes for 1 GOT Multi drop communication Servo amplifier Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Seri...

Page 580: ...ervo amplifier to CN1 Servo amplifier External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series name Communication type MELSERVO JE 1 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 11 13m Up to 32 axes for 1 GOT Multi drop communication Connection cable Servo amplifier Servo amplifier GOT ...

Page 581: ... the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable RS232 connection diagram 1 RS232 connection diagram 2 Connector for interface units or servo amplifier s CN3 1 3 9 2 5 7 8 6 4 Connector conversion box side Plate 2 1 12 11 CD SD TXD RD RXD SG RS RTS CS CTS DR ...

Page 582: ... 7 1 6 4 8 SDA RDA RSA CSA SG SDB RDB RSB CSB FG RDP SDP P5D LG LG RDN SDN NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Servo amplifier side or Distributor side Modular connector External cable GT11H C 37P side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG LG P5D RDP SDN SDP RDN LG NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Distributor side Modular connector Distributor side Modular connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LG P5D RDP SDN SDP...

Page 583: ...SA RTS RSB CTS CSA CTS CSB 2 7 1 6 5 3 8 4 9 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate Connector for interface units or 1st axis servo amplifier s CN3 Connector for interface units or 32nd axis last axis servo amplifier s CN3 SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE SD 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate 1 External cable GT11H C 37P side SG 6 SDB 7 SDA 2 RDB 3 RDA 10 RSA 8 RSB 9 CSA 4 CSB 5 FG Shield 1 SDP SDN RDP RDN...

Page 584: ...ate 1 O R A O BK A W R A W BK A PK R A Y R A Y BK A GY R A GY BK A Shield RS422 connection diagram 8 1 Perform terminal processing on the part between RDP 3 pin and RDN 6 pin with a 150Ω resistor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Distributor side Modular connector LG P5D RDP SDN SDP RDN LG NC 1 Connector conversion box side SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE SD Connector for interface units or 2nd axis servo amplifier s CN3...

Page 585: ...G TRE SD 13 14 39 40 3 28 30 34 31 Plate 13 14 39 40 3 28 30 34 31 Plate 13 14 39 40 3 28 30 34 31 Plate Connector for interface units or 1st axis servo amplifier s CN3 Connector for interface units or 32nd axis last axis servo amplifier s CN3 SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE SD 1 External cable GT11H C side SG SDB SDA RDB RDA RSA RSB CSA CSB FG Shield SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE SD Connector for interface...

Page 586: ...r For details refer to the following The instruction manual of the servo amplifier to be used a Modular connector of the servo amplifier Pin layout in the Modular connector Connector of the servo amplifier connection cable side Use the commercial connectors and cables shown in the table below or the comparable products Refer to the manual of the servo amplifier to be used Pin No Signal name Remark...

Page 587: ...CE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective HINT HINT HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut f...

Page 588: ...When changing the parameter Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective the new parameter Model Refer to MELSERVO J2 Super Series 26 5 1 MELSERVO J2M Series 26 5 2 MELSERVO J4 J3 Series 26 5 3 Item Set value Basic parameter No 15 Station No setting 0 to 31 Default 0 1 Basic parameter No 16 Serial communication function selection Default 0000 1 Serial communication baud rate selection 2 0 ...

Page 589: ...000 1 Serial communication transmission speed selection 1 0 9600bps 1 19200bps 2 38400bps 3 57600bps 2 Serial communication I F selection 0 RS 232 1 RS 422 3 Communication response delay time selection 0 Invalid 1 Valid Response after 800 s or longer delay Basic IFU parameter No 10 Interface unit serial communication station No selection 0 to 31 Default 0 2 Basic IFU parameter No 11 Slot 1 serial ...

Page 590: ...station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the servo amplifer 3 All station specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation...

Page 591: ...vo system Make sure to establish servo system with the station number set with the host address For details of host address setting refer to the following 26 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings GOT clock control Since the servo amplifier does not have a clock function the settings of Adjust or Broadcast by GOT clock control will be disabled Servo amplifier test operation usi...

Page 592: ...26 22 26 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 26 7 Precautions ...

Page 593: ... node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For th...

Page 594: ...tting 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 64 GOT IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set...

Page 595: ...changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Item Description Range Host The host is displayed The host is...

Page 596: ...face Communication settings Model Refer to Robot controller CRnD 700 27 4 1 Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection NETIP 192 168 0 19 GOTPORT 5001 GOT The settings other than the following are set to the default 2 Network No 1 PLC No 1 IP address 192 168 0 18 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Network No 1 PLC No 2 IP address 192 168 0 19 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP ...

Page 597: ... not The IP address of the CRnD 700 specified for the Ping command 27 5 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 27 6 Precautions When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at th...

Page 598: ...27 6 27 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 27 6 Precautions ...

Page 599: ...to SIO 3 To be prepared by the user referring the following C6 C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP B2255 F311 Cable Manufacturing Drawing 4 The distance from the GOT to the CNC F311 cable Connection cable External connection cable Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to MELDAS C6 C64 1 FCA C6 FCA C64 RS 232 RS 422 28 2 1 Ethernet 28 2 2 CNC Connection cable Connector conversion box Ex...

Page 600: ...nect the connector of the CNC side to TERMINAL CNC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Model F311 cable Communication type Cable model MELDAS C6 C64 1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC MELDAS C6 C64 2 3 RS 422 GT11H C15R4 25P 1 5m GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m CNC External cable GO...

Page 601: ...n 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 For the system configuration of the expansion unit refer to the following manuals C6 C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP B2255 C6 C64 NETWORK INSTRUCTIO...

Page 602: ...r the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS GND SD RD GND ER DTR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 6 16 11 18 MELDAS C6 C64 side 1 20 pin half pitch Connector convers...

Page 603: ...pleted POINT POINT POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 18 1 2 I F communication setting 28 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used fo...

Page 604: ...s set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway 1 Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected Only for connection via router Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Ethernet Download Port No 1 Set the GOT port No for Ethernet download Default 5014 1024 to 5010 5014 to 65534 Except for 5011 5012 5013 and 49153 GOT Communication Port No Set the ...

Page 605: ...ameter setting Set the network parameters by peripheral device and write them on CNC An example of parameter setting by GPPW is as follows Set the start I O No as follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit is inserted a Unit No Ethernet 192 168 1 xx CNC 1 Communication with GOT N W No 239 PLC No 2 IP address 192 168 1 2 CNC 2 N W No 239 PLC No 3 IP address 192 168 1 3 GOT N W No 1 P...

Page 606: ...t the IP address by the 7 segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side referring to the next page 2 CNC side parameter setting Confirm the CNC side parameter setting with the settings of IP address gateway address subnet mask and port No by the 7 segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side For details of the parameter setting operation refer to the following C6 C64 NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BN...

Page 607: ...MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTION FUNCTION 29 MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTION FUNCTION 29 1 ...

Page 608: ......

Page 609: ...onversion box 1 When connected to the Computer link the multiple connection function supports only RCPU QCPU Q mode and LCPU PLC GOT 1st Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT 2nd Number of connectable equipment Connection type Communication type Model Communication type Cable model Model Max distance For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following...

Page 610: ... configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 1 RS 232 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 2 GOTs PLC GOT 1st External cable GOT 2nd Number of connectable equipment Connection type Communication type Model Communication type Model Max distance For the system configuration betwee...

Page 611: ...ection type Communication type Model Communication type Cable model Model Max distance For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 1 RS 422 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 2 GOTs PLC GOT 1st Connection cable External cable GOT 2nd Number of connectable equipment Connection type Com...

Page 612: ... GOT 1st External cable GOT 2nd Number of connectable equipment Connection type Communication type Model Communication type Model Max distance For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 1 RS 422 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 2 GOTs GOT 1st PLC Varies according to the connection type ...

Page 613: ...or For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable GOT side GOT side N C RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 2 6 5 4 8 7 N C SD TXD RD RXD DR DSR SG ER DTR CS CTS RS RTS E...

Page 614: ... cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable GOT side SDA RDA RSA CSA SG SDB RDB RSB CSB 2 1 4 3 5 7 6 9 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GOT side RDA SDA CSA RSA SG RDB SDB CSB RSB External cable GT11H C 37P side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 GT14 Handy side 2 7 4 9 1 6 3 8 5 FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG RDA RDB ...

Page 615: ...rding to the Controller Type to be connected Serial MELSEC MELSEC FX 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 29 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the button when settings are completed 2 Settings of communication interface connecting to the second GOT 1 Select Common I F Communication S...

Page 616: ...on interface connecting to the PLC Click the button when settings are completed 29 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 Serial MELSEC 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 115200bps When the setting exceeds the limit of ...

Page 617: ...n settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 115200bps When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the co...

Page 618: ...g the FA transparent function When multiple GOTs are connected the FA transparent function is not available even if the USB interface is used for the connection When connecting a personal computer to the first GOT the FA transparent function can be used Monitoring stop condition for the GOT in the multiple GT11 connection In the system where multiple GOTs are connected performing either of the fol...

Page 619: ...MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 30 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 30 1 ...

Page 620: ......

Page 621: ...edure to use the multi channel function based on the following system configuration example 30 2 System Configuration 2 System configuration when the multi channel function is used The system configuration between GOT and the controllers is the same as that of when not using the multi channel function For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers refer to the following Each chapter ...

Page 622: ...le equipment Channel No Model FXCPU Ethernet For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers refer to the following Each chapter indicating the system configuration 1 2 controllers for 1 GOT 2 channels QCPU 2 MELSEC FX Communication driver Ethernet connection Channel No 1 Ethernet connection Channel No 2 Connection cable Connection cable GOT FXCPU QCPU Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 ...

Page 623: ...he first time 30 3 1 General flow from system selection to drawing System selection for using the multi channel function is explained below Make selection and setting for the multi channel function by following the order shown below System selection Determine the connection type and the channel No to be used 30 3 2 Determining the connection type and channel No System selection Interface selection...

Page 624: ...pes There are no special cautions to be attended to for determining channel Nos Set the channel No by selecting Common Controller Setting from the menu in GT Designer3 18 DRAWING SOFTWARE SETTINGS CONTROLLER SETTING AND COMMON SETTINGS Ethernet connection Ethernet connection Third party PLC connection Ethernet connection MODBUS TCP connection Robot controller connection CNC connection Ethernet con...

Page 625: ...e Ethernet interface built in the GOT For the connection via the connection type selected in 30 3 2 select interfaces to be used Select the interfaces according to the connection type by referring to the following Ethernet interface Selected connection type Reference for required interface and communication unit Ethernet connection This section GOT interface used for Ethernet connection Third part...

Page 626: ...th the Ethernet interface built in the GOT one channel Refer to the explanation below to check if the number of channels for the multi channel function to be used is restricted or not If it is restricted review the system configuration Type Interface built in GOT Interface built in GOT Ethernet interface 1 30 5 Multi channel function check sheet Write down the following items selected in this sect...

Page 627: ...heet Write down the following items to the check sheet 1 After writing down the names of communication units write down the CH No to be assigned to each communication interface based on the entry in Check Sheet No 1 selection of connection type and interface 2 After writing down CH No write down the communication driver name for each connection type For the communication drivers used for the respe...

Page 628: ...on check sheet Make settings for Communication Settings by GT Designer3 referring to the check sheet where the necessary information has been written The position that the settings should be made on the communication settings screen are specified on the check sheet by numbers This completes the setting for Communication Settings Create a screen with GT Designer3 Ethernet interface ...

Page 629: ...when using the multi channel function Device settings It is necessary to set the device to be used together with the CH No GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Accessible range for monitoring The accessible range for monitoring is not changed even when the multi channel function is used GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 Clock function Set the controller for which adjust broadcas...

Page 630: ... changed by the Utility To execute the FA transparent function for other CH No change the CH No using the Utility Station No switching function Set the controller for which the station No switching function should be executed by the CH No GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual FA transparent function is executed for CH No 1 CH No 1 FXCPU CH No 2 QCPU QCPU FXCPU CH No 1 CH No 2 Station No switc...

Page 631: ... system alarms with the same error code occur in different channels the GOT treats the alarms as the same system alarm Therefore if the system alarms with the same error code occur one by one the time of later system alarm occurrence is not reflected to the GOT Confirmation of the channel No at which a system alarm occurred When a system alarm occurred confirm the channel No where the alarm occurr...

Page 632: ...lete the setting for the multi channel function Shows items and contents to be written on the check sheet Also describes an example of the check sheet Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet Selection of connection type Write down the name of connection type to be used The following symbols are used for each purpose Indicates parts where items and details are to ...

Page 633: ...0 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 31 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION APPENDICES 30 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 30 5 Multi channel function check sheet 30 13 Check sheet No 1 selection of connection type and interface Channel No of controller CH No 1 to 2 CH No Selection of connection type 30 3 2 Interface selection 30 3 3 1 Connection name 2 Connection name ...

Page 634: ... side interface Assigning the channel No Ethernet interface only one connection Connecting a controller Without multi channel Ethernet connection Driver name Connecting a controller With multi channel Ethernet connection 1 Driver name Multi channel Ethernet connection Multi Driver name CH No CH No CH No 1 ...

Page 635: ...FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 31 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 31 1 ...

Page 636: ......

Page 637: ... not affect the range accessible by the software For details on accessible range refer to the manual for the respective software 2 The software settings when using FA transparent function For the software settings refer to the following when using FA transparent function 31 6 1 Accessing by GX Works3 31 6 2 Accessing by CW Configurator 31 6 3 Accessing the PLC by GX Developer PX Developer or GX Co...

Page 638: ...ired to use the FA transparent function 8 RT ToolBox2 Version 1 1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function 9 GX Configurator QP Version2 32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function 10 MT Works2 Version 1 00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function 11 GX Works2 Version 1 03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function 12 MELSOFT Navigator V...

Page 639: ...rent function 3 GX Configurator QP Version2 32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function 4 GX Works2 Version 1 03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function 5 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1 04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function 6 GX Developer Version 8 88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function 7 GX Works2 Version 1 11M or later is r...

Page 640: ...e the FA transparent function 16 MR Configurator2 Version 1 09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function 17 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection 18 Setting Monitoring tool for C Controller module Version 4 00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function 19 GX Works2 Version 1 98C or later is required to use the FA transparent fun...

Page 641: ...4 11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function MX Sheet please use the MX Component Version 4 11M or later Series Model Target software Connection type Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU GX Works3 MX Component MX Sheet R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU 1 R08ENCPU 1 R16ENCPU 1 R32ENCPU 1 R1...

Page 642: ...ware Connection type Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU GX Developer GX Works2 GX Configurator PX Developer MX Component MX Sheet Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q0...

Page 643: ...onfiguration Tool L06CPU L26CPU L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU BT L02CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P MELSEC Q A mode Q02CPU A GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A MELSEC QnA QnACPU Q2ACPU GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU MELSEC QnA QnASCPU Q2ASCPU GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 MELSEC A AnCPU A2UCPU GX Developer M...

Page 644: ...U S1 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU 1 A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A A0J2HCPU GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU S3 A1FXCPU Motion controller CPU Q Series Q172CPU MT Developer Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU MT Developer MR Configurator 1 Q173HCPU...

Page 645: ...on Motion controller CPU A Series A171SCPU S3N GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 MELSEC FX FX0 GX Developer GX Works2 FX Configurator FP MX Component MX Sheet FX0S FX0N FX1 FX2 FX2C FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC FX3G C FX3S FX3GE GX Developer FX Configurator FP MX Component MX Sheet GX Works2 FX3U C GX Developer FX Configurator FP FX3U...

Page 646: ...et connection CC Link IE field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF ETB GX Works2 MX Component CNC CNC C70 Q173NCCPU GX Developer NC Configurator 1 2 MELDAS C6 C64 GX Developer Robot controller CRnQ 700 Q172DRCPU CR750 Q Q172DRCPU CR751 Q Q172DRCPU RT ToolBox2 3 CRnD 700 CR750 D CR751 D FREQROL FREQROL A500 A500L FR Configurator FREQROL F500 F500L FREQROL V500 V500L FREQROL E500 FREQROL S500 S500...

Page 647: ...ng Monitoring tool for C Controller module is not supported 2 GX Works3 is not supported PLC GOT Connection cable PC Number of connectable equipment Connection type Model Interface Cable model Max distance Software For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 1 2 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 1 ETHERNET CONNECTION USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20USB...

Page 648: ...pendant Communication driver PLC GOT Connection cable PC Number of connectable equipment Connection type Model Interface Cable model Max distance Software For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20USB 5P 2m 3m PX Developer GX Configurator 1 personal computer for 1 GOT ...

Page 649: ...ries does not support the direct CPU connection PC RCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R series QCPU Motion controller CPU Q series Connection cable Varies according to the connection type GOT Connection type dependant Communication driver PLC GOT Connection cable PC Number of connectable equipment Connection type Model Interface Cable model Max distance Software For the system configuration betw...

Page 650: ...NET H RCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R series QCPU Motion controller CPU Q series PC Connection cable Varies according to the connection type GOT Connection type dependant Communication driver PLC GOT Connection cable PC Number of connectable equipment Connection type Model Interface Cable model Max distance Software For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following...

Page 651: ... equipment Connection type Model Interface Cable model Max distance Software For details on the system configuration between GOT and Mitsubishi inverter refer to the following INVERTER CONNECTION USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20USB 5P 2m 3m FR Configurator 1 personal computer for 1 GOT PC PLC Varies according to the connection type Connection cable GOT MELSEC FX Communication driver PLC GOT Connecti...

Page 652: ...tem configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 1 ETHERNET CONNECTION USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20USB 5P 2m 3m RT ToolBox2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT Q173NCCPU GOT PC Varies according to the connection type Connection cable Connection type dependant Communication driver PLC GOT Connection cable PC Number of connectable equipment Connection type Model ...

Page 653: ...tton when settings are completed POINT POINT POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 18 1 2 I F communication setting Communication setting with personal computer Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer 1 Select Common Peripheral Setting PC DataTransfer from the menu 2 The setting di...

Page 654: ...el function specify the channel No on which the FA transparent function is executed 1 Select Common GOT Environmental Setting GOT Setup from the menu 2 Check Enable GOT Setup 3 Select the Transparent tab 4 As necessary check CH1 or CH2 Default CH1 Click the button when settings are completed POINT POINT POINT Transparent setting on the utility screen Transparent setting can be performed by the GOT...

Page 655: ... 1 Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection a When connecting to RCPU 1 Click Online Connection Destination on GX Works3 2 Connection Channel Setup is displayed 3 Set Connection Channel Setup PC side I F USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting No Specification 4 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 5 On the PLC side I F Detailed Setting o...

Page 656: ...ction Destination in GX Works3 2 The Specify Connection Destination 1 is displayed 3 Set the Specify Connection Destination 1 PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting No Specification 4 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting 5 Check mark either of the following in PC side I F Serial Setting Mark the RS 232C checkbox Mark the USB checkb...

Page 657: ...ss same as the IP address assigned to the built in Ethernet port CPU 10 The screen returns to Specify Connection Destination Connection1 Click Connection Test to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the FX5UCPU 1 Click Online Specify Connection Destination on GX Works3 2 The Specify Connection Destination 1 is displayed 3 Set the Specify Connection Destination 1 PC side I F Serial USB PLC side...

Page 658: ...ansparent mode in PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 8 The screen returns to Specify Connection Destination Connection1 Click Connection Test to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the FX5UCPU 1 Click Online Connection Destination on GX Works3 2 Connection Channel Setup is displayed 3 Set Connection Channel Setup PC side I F USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting No Specification 4 Doub...

Page 659: ...ng the GOT and personal computer with USB 1 Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection 5 Check mark C24 in PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 6 The screen returns to the Connection Channel Setup Click Connection Test to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU 7 The screen returns to the Connection Channel Setup Click Connection Test to check if GX Works3 has been connected to th...

Page 660: ...Transparent Setting is displayed Here set the built in Ethernet port CPU which is firstly connected via a GOT 7 Set Ethernet Built in CPU for PLC Type 8 Specify the number for Network No and Station No same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module 9 Specify the IP address for IP Address same as the IP address assigned to the built in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module 10 The screen returns...

Page 661: ...Set the PLC Series to QCPU Q mode 3 The Transfer Setup is displayed 4 Set the Transfer Setup PC side I F Serial USB COM PLC side I F PLC module Other station No specification 5 Double click Serial of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial setting 6 Check the following for PC side I F Serial Setting Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 7 Double click PLC module of th...

Page 662: ...ial PLC side I F C24 Other station No specification 5 Return to Transfer setup and double click C24 of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F detailed setting of C24 6 Check via GOT transparent mode for PLC side I F detailed setting of C24 7 Double click Serial of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial setting 8 Check the following for PC side I F Serial Setting Mark the USB checkbox 9 Th...

Page 663: ... setting 6 Check the following for PC side I F Serial Setting Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 7 Double click PLC module of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module 8 On the PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module mark the via GOT Ethernet transparent mode checkbox and click Set 9 By clicking Set the GOT Ethernet transparent setting i...

Page 664: ...ick to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU Q mode 1 Click Online Read from PLC in GX Developer 2 Set the PLC Series to FXCPU 3 The Transfer Setup is displayed 4 Set the Transfer Setup PC side I F Serial PLC side I F PLC module Other station No specification 5 Double click Serial of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial setting 6 Check the following for PC side I F Serial S...

Page 665: ...t function of GX Works2 When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 1 Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection a Connecting to QCPU Q mode 7 The screen returns to the Transfer Setup Click the to check if GX Developer has been connected to the FXCPU 1 Click the Connection Destination view Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 2 The Transfer ...

Page 666: ...nected to the QCPU Q mode Direct CPU connection 1 Click the Connection Destination view Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 2 The Transfer Setup is displayed 3 Set the Transfer Setup PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other station No specification 4 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting 5 Check ma...

Page 667: ...LC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 On the PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT mark the via GOT Ethernet transparent mode checkbox and click Set 8 By clicking Set the GOT Ethernet transparent setting is displayed Here set FX3U ENET ADP or Ethernet Module which is connected via a GOT 9 Set FX3U ENET ADP or Ethernet Module for PLC Type 10 Specify the IP address assigned to FX3U ENET ADP or Ethern...

Page 668: ...nsfer Setup PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other station No specification 4 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting 5 Check the following for PC side I F Serial Setting Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 6 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 Check mark C24 in PLC side I F...

Page 669: ...Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other station No specification 4 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting 5 Check the following for PC side I F Serial Setting Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 6 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 On the PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT mark the v...

Page 670: ... assigned to the Ethernet module When QnUDE H is set for PLC type the setting is not required 11 Specify the IP address assigned to the built in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module for IP address 12 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU Q mode Network No 3 PC No 1 IP address 192 168 3 18 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Ethe...

Page 671: ...of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting 5 Check the following for PC side I F Serial Setting Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 6 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 Set the CPU mode to LCPU for PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT ark the via GOT Ethernet transparent mode checkbox and click Set 8 By cli...

Page 672: ...twork master local module of the system configuration example the setting is as follows Network No 1 Station No 0 15 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU Q mode 1 Click the Connection Destination view Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 2 The Transfer Setup is displayed 3 Set the Tran...

Page 673: ... the IP address and port No to the same as the one in the Ethernet download setting 31 5 1 Setting communication interface 8 Check mark C24 in PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 9 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU Q mode 1 Click Show Assistant Dialog for View on GX LogViewer 2 The Assistant dialog box is displayed 3 Click LCPU Show...

Page 674: ...nection setup Interface USB When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 4 Set the PLC in Connection setup PLC type Q series PLC type Multi PLC specification Non choice No 1 to 4 Mark the via GOT transparent mode checkbox Interface PLC Type Direct coupled Interface C24 5 Set the Module connecting I O address in Transfer setup Specify the actual I O address of the module 6 The screen returns to the Tran...

Page 675: ...unction of MT Developer with an example of connecting to motion controller CPU Q series 1 Click Communication Communication Setting in MT Developer 2 Check mark the following in Serial port Mark the USB checkbox 3 Click Detail When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 4 Check mark the following in PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module via GOT direct coupled transparent mode 5 As necessary sele...

Page 676: ...uble click Serial of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial setting 5 Check the following for PC side I F Serial Setting Mark the USB checkbox 6 Double click GOT of the CPU side I F to display CPU side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 Check mark the following in CPU side I F Detailed Setting of GOT Mark the via GOT direct coupled transparent mode checkbox Mark the via GOT Ethernet transparent ...

Page 677: ... MR Configurator2 Make the FA transparent settings in the MT Works2 communication settings For details of MT Works2 refer to the following 31 6 8 Accessing by MT Works2 31 6 11 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator This section explains the setting method of the FA transparent function of FR Configurator with an example of connecting to FREQROL A700 F700 series 1 Click Settings Communicati...

Page 678: ...uration tool 1 Click Connection setup for Online on FX Configurator FP 2 Check mark the following in PC side Mark the USB GOT transparent mode checkbox 3 Click Comm Test 4 The communication test is executed Check that the GOT is correctly connected to the FXCPU When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 1 Click Transfer setup on the FX3U ENET L Configuration tool 2 Mark the Serial port USB checkbox i...

Page 679: ... of RT ToolBox2 with an example of connecting to CRnQ 700 Connecting the GOT and controller in direct CPU connection CRnQ 700 only 1 Right click a project name to be a target on the project tree of RT ToolBox2 Click Edit Project 2 Set Method to CRnQ 3 Click Detail 4 Check mark the following in Serial port Mark the USB checkbox 5 Click Detail 6 Check mark the following in PLC side I F Detailed sett...

Page 680: ... connecting the GOT and PC with USB 6 Check mark the following in PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module via GOT Ethernet transparent mode 7 Clicking Setting The GOT Ethernet transparent setting is displayed 8 Set Type to QJ71E71 9 Specify the numbers assigned to the Ethernet module for Network No Station No and IP Address in Unit 10 Specify the numbers assigned to the GOT for Network No and ...

Page 681: ...FT Navigator The following explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of MELSOFT Navigator 1 Click File Open 2 The Open is displayed 3 Select NC on the upper left of the screen and set the following NC series C70 M or C70 L Connect pattern Set the pattern according to the connect pattern IP address Set as necessary 4 By clicking Open data is read from CNC and displayed 1 Click Onlin...

Page 682: ...t PC side I F Serial Setting and PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT in Transfer Setup For details refer to the following 31 6 4 Accessing by GX Works2 31 6 18 Accessing by Setting Monitoring tool for C Controller module The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of Setting Monitoring tool for C Controller module Q Series with the C Controller module Q24DHCCPU V connecte...

Page 683: ...Setting of GOT 5 On the PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT mark the via GOT Ethernet transparent mode checkbox 6 By clicking Set the GOT Ethernet transparent setting is displayed Here set the C Controller module Q Series Q24DHCCPU V which is firstly connected via a GOT 7 Specify the IP address assigned to the C Controller module Q Series Q24DHCCPU V for IP Address 8 The screen returns to Transfe...

Page 684: ...check the following 1 Whether the PLC CPU operates normally Refer to the User s Manual of the PLC CPU you use 2 Whether the PLC CPU and GOT are connected normally 21 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 22 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION When monitoring the PLC CPU from a PC When monitoring the PLC CPU from a PC the GOT and PC refresh the display slower Software available for the FA tranparent function When multiple...

Page 685: ...s 3 Writing to PLC results in a system alarm occurrence and displays the message 315 Device writing error Correct device 4 While setting the monitor conditions do not perform any operation which makes the GOT restart e g downloading project data changing utility data Doing so may display a system alarm 402 Communication timeout Confirm communication pathway or modules when the GOT restarts When th...

Page 686: ...on on GX Works3 GX Works2 GX Developer No message is displayed The TC set value space is blank With no file operation being executed on GX Works3 GX Works2 GX Developer re execute the TC monitor File access failure Please retry With no TC set value being read re execute the file operation Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side Error messages on GX Works3 GX Works2 GX Developer Correct...

Page 687: ... PLC write using the FA transparent function may be failed due to some reasons such as cable disconnection When this occurs re execute the PLC write from the same PC or reset the motion controller CPU When a cable disconnection has occurred When the cable between the GOT and the motion CPU is disconnected it takes time until a timeout error occurs in MT Works2 MT Developer 31 7 4 When using MR Con...

Page 688: ...31 52 31 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 31 7 Precautions ...

Page 689: ...ION 28 CNC CONNECTION 29 MULTIPLE CONNECTION FUNCTION 30 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 31 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION APPENDICES APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 1 APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensions of Handy GOT Unit mm inch 145 5 71 79 3 3 13 185 7 28 ...

Page 690: ... 11 60 6000 236 22 100 10000 393 7 Handy GOT side Relay cable side About 70 2 76 28 1 11 9 4 0 38 M2 6 Label L 45 1 78 16 0 63 71 Handy GOT side About 70 2 76 28 1 11 9 4 0 38 Label L GT11H C 37P GT11H C Connector conversion box side Handy GOT side About 70 2 76 28 1 11 9 4 0 38 Label L About 50 1 97 GT14H C 42P Unit mm inch ...

Page 691: ...ION 30 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 31 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION APPENDICES APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 3 Value of Length L mm inch 30 3000 118 11 50 5000 196 85 80 8000 314 96 130 13000 511 81 Handy GOT side About 70 2 76 28 1 11 9 4 0 38 Label L CC Link interface unit side 28 1 11 About 70 2 76 GT11H C 32P Unit mm inch ...

Page 692: ...5 1 78 about 48 1 89 200 7 88 40 1 58 13 1 58 16 0 63 71 2 80 GT11H 500 19 69 1500 59 06 Label M2 6 Label Lead wire for grounding 8 0 32 24 0 95 16 0 63 55 2 17 36 1 42 200 7 88 53 2 09 16 0 63 71 2 80 GT11H C15R4 25P 500 19 69 1500 59 06 Label Label Lead wire for grounding 6 0 24 about 45 1 78 about 48 1 89 13 0 52 200 7 88 40 1 58 16 0 63 71 2 80 GT11H ...

Page 693: ...ternal Dimensions App 5 External dimensions of Connector Conversion Box 55 2 17 56 2 21 ON ID No ES1A ES2A ES2B ES3A ES3B FG ES1B U RS 232 10BASE T 100BASE TX RS 422 L OFF ES1A ES2A ES2B ES3A ES3B INPUT 24VDC ES1B SW COM SW6 SW4 KSW1 DSW1 DSW2 SW2 SW1 SW5 KSW2 KSW COM DSW1 DSW2 SW3 110 4 34 126 4 97 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H CNB 37S 37 5 1 47 82 3 22 113 4 44 82 3 22 37 5 1 47 113 4 44 Terminal block co...

Page 694: ...n Box Mounting Bracket External dimensions of With wall mounting Attachment 82 3 23 30 1 19 30 1 19 32 1 25 32 1 25 10 0 39 Drill 3 4 5 27 1 07 10 0 39 20 0 78 9 0 36 11 6 0 46 Unit mm inches 60 2 37 58 5 2 31 100 3 94 145 5 71 Post 4 4 5 With wall mounting Attachment mounting hole 106 4 18 ...

Page 695: ...o the network afterwards Display Switching message languages Setting the startup screen display time and screen saving time Setting the backlight to ON or OFF during screen saving Setting the battery alarm display to ON or OFF Setting the detect level detect time of human sensor Adjusting brightness and contrast Operation Setting the buzzer volume and window move buzzer Setting the key sensitivity...

Page 696: ...setting at backup to YES or NO Memory data control Backup restoration GOT data package acquisition Copying the OS special data and project data to a CF card or USB memory CNC data I O Memory card format Formatting a CF card or USB memory Memory information Displaying the available memory of the GOT USB device status display USB device status display SRAM control Back up restoring and initializing ...

Page 697: ...iles changing logging file names Deleting logging folders creating a new logging folder Operation log information Converting operation log files in G1O format CSV TXT format Deleting copying moving operation log files changing operation log file names Deleting operation log folders creating a new operation log folder Hard copy information Deleting copying hard copy files changing hard copy file na...

Page 698: ...App 10 APPENDICES Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function ...

Page 699: ...ix 3 1 Relevant models The battery for the GOT1000 Series is classified as shown in the table below Appendix 3 2 Transportation guidelines Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and other local ...

Page 700: ...is added Jan 2015 JY997D50201 JY997D50202 G Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 126G C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series is supported MELSEC iQ F Series is supported FA Transparent Function MELSEC iQ R Series MX Component MX Sheet are supported C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series CW Configurator is supported Servo amplifier connection MELSERVO J4 A RJ compatible Apr 2015 JY997D50201 JY997D502...

Page 701: ... in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product c Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged in the following cases Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range 1 1 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technic...

Page 702: ...egistered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein a...

Page 703: ......

Page 704: ......

Page 705: ......

Page 706: ......

Page 707: ...ystem where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or m...

Page 708: ...tion cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network the available IP addr...

Page 709: ... fire failure or malfunction may be caused Connect connection cables securely to the specified connectors while the power is turned OFF Imperfect connection may cause malfunction or failure When inserting removing a SD card into from the GOT turn the SD card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the SD card When removing a SD card from the GOT make sure to support t...

Page 710: ...tal pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in ...

Page 711: ... modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit Doing so may damage the unit Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak i...

Page 712: ...y be activated This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations For details on models subject to restrictions refer to the User s Manual for the GOT you are using Before transporting the GOT turn the GOT power on and check that the battery voltage status is normal on ...

Page 713: ...pecifications 3 4 3 4 Battery specifications 3 5 3 4 1 Applicable battery 3 5 3 4 2 Battery specifications 3 5 4 PARTS NAME 4 1 Front Panel 4 1 4 1 1 Name and specifications 4 1 4 2 Back Panel 4 2 4 2 1 Name and specifications 4 2 4 2 2 Opening and closing of environmental protection back cover 4 3 4 3 Top Face Interface 4 4 4 3 1 Names and specifications 4 4 INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mi...

Page 714: ...icable emergency stop SW guard cover 6 8 6 5 2 Installing procedure 6 8 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 6 9 6 6 1 Applicable Connector Conversion Box 6 9 6 6 2 Connector Conversion Box GT16H CNB 42S 6 9 6 6 3 Connector Conversion Box GT11H CNB 37S 6 24 6 6 4 Connector conversion box GT16H CNB 37S 6 29 6 7 With wall mounting Attachment 6 34 6 7 1 Applicable With wall mounting Attachment 6 34 6 7 2 Mou...

Page 715: ...y Display 10 4 10 3 1 Display operation of main menu 10 6 10 3 2 Utility basic configuration 10 8 10 3 3 Basic operation of settings change 10 9 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 11 1 Communication setting 11 1 11 1 1 Communication setting functions 11 1 11 1 2 Display operation of Communication Setting 11 1 11 1 3 Communication setting contents 11 2 11 1 4 Communication set...

Page 716: ...RAM DATA CONTROL 14 1 Data Storage Location 14 1 14 1 1 Data type and storage location 14 1 14 1 2 OS version confirmation 14 3 14 1 3 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location 14 4 14 1 4 Display file 14 4 14 2 Various Data Control 14 5 14 2 1 OS information 14 5 14 2 2 Alarm information 14 11 14 2 3 Project Information 14 17 14 2 4 Hard copy information 14 27 14 2 5 Advanced...

Page 717: ... CONTROLLER SETTING AND COMMON SETTINGS 18 1 Setting the Communication Interface 18 1 18 1 1 Setting connected equipment Channel setting 18 2 18 1 2 I F communication setting 18 12 18 1 3 Precautions 18 14 18 2 Common Settings Dedicated to Handy GOT 18 14 18 3 Writing the Communication Settings and Common Settings onto the GOT 18 15 18 3 1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT 18 15 18 3 2 ...

Page 718: ...le Computer link module 22 4 22 2 System Configuration 22 5 22 2 1 Connecting to MELSEC iQ R series 22 5 22 2 2 Connecting to QCPU Q mode 22 6 22 2 3 Connecting to LCPU 22 8 22 2 4 Connecting to QCPU A mode 22 10 22 2 5 Connecting to QnACPU QnACPU type 22 12 22 2 6 Connecting to QnACPU QnASCPU type 22 15 22 2 7 Connecting to ACPU AnCPU type 22 18 22 2 8 Connecting to ACPU AnSCPU type A0J2HCPU A2CC...

Page 719: ...necting to C controller module Q Series 23 33 23 4 9 Connecting to Ethernet module QnA Series 23 36 23 4 10 Connecting to Ethernet module A Series 23 39 23 4 11 Connecting to Ethernet module FX Series 23 43 23 4 12 Connecting to Built in Ethernet port FXCPU FX3GE 23 47 23 4 13 Connecting to Display I F CNC C70 23 49 23 4 14 Connecting to CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module 23 51 23 4 ...

Page 720: ...ting to FREQROL V500 or V500L series 25 37 25 5 6 Connecting to FREQROL E700 or sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX series 25 37 25 5 7 Connecting to FREQROL D700 F700PJ series 25 38 25 5 8 Connecting to FREQROL F700 F700P 25 39 25 5 9 Connecting to FREQROL A700 series 25 40 25 5 10 Connecting FREQROL A800 F800 series 25 41 25 5 11 Connecting sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX series 25 42 25 5 12 Connec...

Page 721: ...28 2 System Configuration 28 1 28 2 1 Direct connection to CPU 28 1 28 2 2 Ethernet connection 28 3 28 3 Connection Diagram 28 4 28 3 1 RS 232 cable 28 4 28 4 GOT Side Settings 28 5 28 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 28 5 28 4 2 Communication detail settings 28 5 28 4 3 Ethernet setting 28 6 28 5 CNC Side Settings 28 7 28 5 1 Ethernet Connection 28 7 MULTIPLE GOT CONNECT...

Page 722: ... Controller module 31 11 31 4 2 PX Developer GX Configurator 31 12 31 4 3 MT Developer MT Works2 31 13 31 4 4 MR Configurator MR Configurator2 31 14 31 4 5 FR Configurator 31 15 31 4 6 FX Configurator FP FX3U ENET L Configuration tool 31 15 31 4 7 RT ToolBox2 31 16 31 4 8 NC Configurator 31 16 31 5 GOT Side Settings 31 17 31 5 1 Setting communication interface 31 17 31 6 Personal Computer Side Set...

Page 723: ... 1 32 2 System Configuration 32 2 32 2 1 Connecting to X SEL SSEL ASEL PSEL 32 2 32 2 2 Connecting to PCON ACON SCON ERC2 32 4 32 3 Connection Diagram 32 18 32 3 1 RS 232 cable 32 18 32 3 2 RS 422 cable 32 21 32 4 GOT Side Settings 32 23 32 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 32 23 32 4 2 Communication detail settings 32 23 32 5 Robot Controller Side Setting 32 25 32 5 1 Con...

Page 724: ...85 Option board 33 37 33 2 21 Connecting to RS 422A converter 33 37 33 3 Ethernet Connection 33 38 33 3 1 System configuration 33 38 33 3 2 GOT side settings 33 40 33 3 3 PLC side setting 33 42 33 3 4 Precautions 33 43 33 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 33 43 34 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 34 1 Connectable Model List 34 1 34 2 System Configuration 34 2 34 2 1 Connecting to the THERMA...

Page 725: ...ce Communication settings 36 29 36 4 2 Communication detail settings 36 29 36 5 PLC Side Setting 36 30 36 5 1 Connecting to SU 5E 6B 36 30 36 5 2 Connecting to SU 5M 6M 36 31 36 5 3 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 series or DirectLOGIC 06 series 36 31 36 5 4 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 205 series 36 31 36 5 5 Connecting to PZ Series 36 31 36 5 6 Connecting to U 01DM 36 32 36 5 7 Connecting to D0 DCM 36...

Page 726: ...8 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 38 13 38 4 2 Communication detail settings 38 13 38 5 PLC Side Setting 38 14 38 5 1 Connecting to JW 22CU JW 70CUH JW 100CUH or JW 100CU 38 14 38 5 2 Connecting to JW 32CUH JW 33CUH or Z 512J 38 15 38 5 3 Connecting to the link unit JW 21CM 38 15 38 5 4 Connecting to the link unit JW 10CM or ZW 10CM 38 16 38 6 Device Range that Can Be Se...

Page 727: ...4 GOT Side Settings 40 16 40 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 40 16 40 4 2 Communication detail settings 40 16 40 5 Controller Side Setting 40 17 40 5 1 Connecting to LT230 LT300 Series 40 17 40 5 2 Connecting to LT400 LT830 Series 40 17 40 5 3 Connecting to DZ1000 DZ2000 Series 40 17 40 5 4 Connecting to DB1000 DB2000 Series 40 18 40 5 5 Connecting to GT120 Series 40 18 ...

Page 728: ...ecting to TS2000 TS2100 42 7 42 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 42 8 43 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 43 1 Connectable Model List 43 1 43 2 System Configuration 43 1 43 2 1 Connecting to MINAS A4 MINAS A4F MINAS A4L MINAS A5 series 43 1 43 3 Connection Diagram 43 3 43 3 1 RS 232 cable 43 3 43 3 2 RS 485 cable 43 4 43 4 GOT Side Settings 43 5 43 4 1 Setting communication interface Communic...

Page 729: ...to 252 series H series board type or EH 150 series 45 5 45 3 Connection Diagram 45 8 45 3 1 RS 232 cable 45 8 45 3 2 RS 422 cable 45 9 45 4 GOT Side Settings 45 11 45 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 45 11 45 4 2 Communication detail settings 45 11 45 5 PLC Side Setting 45 13 45 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 45 14 46 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 46 1 Connectable Model List ...

Page 730: ... 10 48 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 48 10 48 4 2 Communication detail settings 48 10 48 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 48 11 48 5 1 Connecting to PXR3 4 5 9 48 11 48 5 2 Connecting to PXG4 5 9 48 11 48 5 3 Connecting to PXH9 48 11 48 5 4 Connecting to interface converter RC 77 48 12 48 5 5 Connecting to interface converter SI 30A 48 12 48 5 6 Connecting to inte...

Page 731: ...C11 1N F3LC11 2N F3LC11 2F 50 16 50 2 9 Connecting to PC link module F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F 50 17 50 2 10 Connecting to PC link module LC01 0N LC02 0N 50 18 50 2 11 Connecting to STARDOM 50 19 50 2 12 Precautions 50 20 50 3 Ethernet Connection 50 21 50 3 1 System configuration for connecting to FA M3 M3V 50 21 50 3 2 GOT side settings 50 22 50 3 3 PLC side setting 50 23 50 3 4 Connecting to Ethernet ...

Page 732: ... Connecting to NX series 52 27 52 3 Connection Diagram 52 28 52 3 1 RS 232 cable 52 28 52 3 2 RS 485 cable 52 30 52 4 GOT Side Settings 52 36 52 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 52 36 52 4 2 Communication detail settings 52 36 52 5 Control Equipment Side Setting 52 38 52 5 1 Connecting to DMC10 52 38 52 5 2 Connecting to SDC40A 40B 40G 52 38 52 5 3 Connecting to SDC15 SDC...

Page 733: ...ce Communication settings 53 37 53 4 2 Communication detail settings 53 37 53 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 53 38 53 5 1 Connecting to H PCP J 53 38 53 5 2 Connecting to H PCP A H PCP B 53 39 53 5 3 Connecting to Z TIO Z DIO Z CT 53 40 53 5 4 Connecting to Z COM 53 41 53 5 5 Connecting to CB Series 53 42 53 5 6 Connecting to FB Series 53 42 53 5 7 Connecting to RB Series 53 43 53 5 8 Conne...

Page 734: ...422 cable 55 19 55 4 GOT Side Settings 55 24 55 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 55 24 55 4 2 Communication detail settings 55 24 55 5 PLC Side Setting 55 25 55 5 1 Connecting to Series 90 30 55 25 55 5 2 Connecting to VersaMaxMicro 55 25 55 5 3 Connecting to IC693CMM311 55 26 55 5 4 Connecting to IC697CMM711 55 26 55 5 5 Station number setting 55 26 55 6 Device Range tha...

Page 735: ...e settings 58 6 58 2 5 PLC side setting 58 7 58 2 6 Precautions 58 8 58 3 Ethernet Connection 58 9 58 3 1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 300 400 series Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE 58 9 58 3 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 1200 Ethernet connection type OP communication 58 10 58 3 3 GOT side settings 58 12 58 3 4 PLC side setting 58 14 58 3...

Page 736: ...1 Microcomputer Connection Ethernet 62 1 62 2 System Configuration 62 1 62 2 1 For the microcomputer connection Ethernet 62 1 62 3 Device Data Area 62 2 62 3 1 D devices 62 3 62 3 2 R devices 62 6 62 3 3 L devices 62 7 62 3 4 M devices 62 7 62 3 5 SD devices 62 8 62 3 6 SM devices 62 11 62 4 Message Formats 62 13 62 4 1 Data format type and application 62 13 62 4 2 List of commands 62 14 62 4 3 Fo...

Page 737: ...DBUS TCP equipment 64 1 64 3 GOT Side Settings 64 2 64 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 64 2 64 3 2 Communication detail settings 64 2 64 3 3 Ethernet setting 64 3 64 4 PLC side setting 64 3 64 5 Device Range that Can Be Set 64 4 64 6 Example of Connection 64 5 64 6 1 Connecting to SCHNEIDER PLC Modicon Premium series and Modicon Quantum series 64 5 64 6 2 Connecting to Y...

Page 738: ...A 32 ...

Page 739: ...ed in CD ROM SH 080871ENG 1D7MC5 GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080861ENG 1D7MB1 GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080863ENG 1D7MB3 Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Setting available functions o...

Page 740: ...eviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT155 GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT157 GT156 GT155 GT145 GT1455 Q Abbreviation of GT1455 QTBDE GT1455 QTBD GT1450 Q Abbreviation of GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QMBD GT1450 QLBDE GT1450 QLBD GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455 Q GT1450 Q GT1275 GT127...

Page 741: ... 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z 1 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 3 Interface converter unit GT15 75IF900...

Page 742: ...For GT14 GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSGB GT14 50PSCW GT14 50PSGW For GT12 GT11 70PSCB GT11 65PSCB For GT11 GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW GT11H 50PSC For GT10 GT10 50PSCB GT10 50PSGB GT10 50PSCW GT10 50PSGW GT10 40PSCB GT10 40PSGB GT10 40PSCW GT10 40PSGW GT10 30PSCB GT10 30PSGB GT10 30PSCW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSCB GT10 20PSGB GT10 20PSCW GT10 20PSGW Protective cover for oil GT05 90PCO GT05...

Page 743: ...tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C GPPW E EV SW D5F GPPW E type software package GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN VIEWER E type software package PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SW DNC MTW2 ...

Page 744: ...al Systems Co Ltd SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co Ltd PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller...

Page 745: ...ter Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 5 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the button when settings are completed 5 3 2 Communication detail settings 1 Bus Q 2 Bus A QnA POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings ...

Page 746: ...onfiguration of equipment connected to GOT is shown The configuration of equipment connected to GOT is shown The configuration of the GOT connected to equipment is shown The configuration of the GOT connected to equipment is shown RS422 connection diagram 2 RS 422 connector conversion Cable QCPU GOT Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion ...

Page 747: ...4 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 44 1 45 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 45 1 46 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 46 1 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 47 1 48 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 48 1 49 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 49 1 50 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 50 1 51 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 51 1 52 CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 52 1 53 CONNECTION TO RK...

Page 748: ......

Page 749: ...LLER 32 1 Connectable Model List 32 1 32 CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 32 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series name Model Clock Communication type Refer to X SEL XSEL J RS 232 32 2 1 XSEL K XSEL KE XSEL KT XSEL KET XSEL P XSEL Q XSEL JX XSEL KX XSEL KTX XSEL PX XSEL QX SSEL SSEL ASEL ASEL PSEL PSEL PCON PCON C RS 232 32 2 2 PCON CG PCON CF PCON CY P...

Page 750: ...l Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series name Connector conversion cable 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number X SEL Teaching connector RS 232 CB ST E1MW050 1 or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 Controller X SEL General RS232C port connector RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 4 6m SSEL ASEL PSEL CB SEL SJ002 RS 232 CB ST E1MW...

Page 751: ...CONTROLLER 32 2 System Configuration 32 3 3 When using the external cable GT11H C 1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation For details of the product contact IAI Corporation X SEL SSEL ASEL PSEL GOT External cable PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series name Communication type X SEL Teaching connector RS 232 GT11H C60 3m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 G...

Page 752: ...cation cable RS232 conversion adapter Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series name PCON ACON SCON ERC2 NP PN specifications 3 CB RCA SIO050 5m 1 RCB CV MW 0 3m 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 Controller ERC2 SIO specifications 2 CB ERC2 SIO020 1 CB ERC2 PWBIO 1 or CB ERC2 PWBIO RB 1 RCB CV MW 0 3m 1 6m RS232C conversio...

Page 753: ...the product contact IAI Corporation 2 Use ERC2 SE 3 Use the following models ERC2 NP ERC2 PN RS232C conversion unit Communication cable PCON ACON SCON ERC2 External cable GOT Controller External device communication cable RS232 conversion adapter External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series name PCON ACON SCON ERC2 NP PN specifications 3 CB RCA SIO050 5m 1 RCB CV ...

Page 754: ...al block Connection cable 2 Max distance SIO controller 1 Connection cable 3 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number Model Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number ERC2 NP PN specifications 2 RS 422 CB ERC PWBIO or CB ERC PWBIO RB Terminal block created by user...

Page 755: ...verter Terminal block Connection cable 2 Connection cable 3 Connection cable 1 ERC2 External cable GOT Controller Connection cable 1 1 Terminal block Connection cable 2 Max distance SIO controller 1 Connection cable 3 External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number Model Communic ation type Cable model Connect...

Page 756: ...lock Connection cable 2 Max distance SIO controller 1 External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number Model Communic ation type ERC2 NP PN specifications 2 RS 422 CB ERC PWBIO or CB ERC PWBIO RB Terminal block created by users RS422 485 connection diagram 4 or RS422 485 connection diagram 5 100m RCB TU SIO RS ...

Page 757: ...controller 1 Connection cable 4 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 5 Number of connectable equipment Series Connection diagram number Cable model Model Connection diagram number Connection diagram number Model Com munic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number PCON ACON SCON RS422 connection diagram 1 CB RCB CTL002 0 2m 1 5 1473574 4 2 RS422 connection diagram...

Page 758: ...connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 2 controllers ERC2 NP PN specifications 7 RS422 connection diagram 1 CB ERC PWBIO or CB ERC PWBIO RB Terminal block createdby users RS422 485 connection diagram 7 5 1473574 4 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 or RS422 connection diagram 3 100m RCB TU SIO RS 232 RCB CV MW 0 3m 1 CB RCA SIO050 5m 1 or RS232 connec...

Page 759: ... Series Connection diagram number Cable model Model Connection diagram number Connection diagram number Model Comm unicati on type Cable model Connection diagram number PCON ACON SCON RS422 connection diagram 1 CB RCB CTL002 0 2m 1 5 1473574 4 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 or RS422 connection diagram 3 100m RCB TU SIO RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 10 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m...

Page 760: ...pecifications 7 RS422 connection diagram 1 CB ERC PWBIO or CB ERC PWBIO RB Terminal block created by users RS422 485 connection diagram 7 5 1473574 4 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 or RS422 connection diagram 3 100m RCB TU SIO RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 10 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 16 controllers Controller Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Four way junction Conne...

Page 761: ...quipment Series Connection diagram number Cable model Model Connection diagram number Connection diagram number Model Commun ication type PCON ACON SCON RS422 connection diagram 1 CB RCB CTL002 0 2m 1 5 1473574 4 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 or RS422 connection diagram 3 100m RCB TU SIO RS 232 GT11H C60 3m RS232connection diagram 11 6m 1 GOT for 16 controllers PCON ACON ...

Page 762: ...ls ERC2 NP ERC2 PN ERC2 NP PN specifications 7 RS422 connection diagram 1 CB ERC PWBIO or CB ERC PWBIO RB Terminal block created by users RS422 485 connection diagram 7 5 1473574 4 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 or RS422 connection diagram 3 100m RCB TU SIO RS 232 GT11H C60 3m RS232connection diagram 11 6m 1 GOT for 16 controllers Controller Terminal cable Connection cable...

Page 763: ... GOT Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block Connector conversion box External cable Connection cable 1 Connection cable 1 SIO converter Controller Connection cable 1 1 Terminal block Connection cable 2 Max distanc e SIO controller 1 Connection cable 3 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Comm unicati on type Cable model Conne...

Page 764: ...ter Controller Connection cable 1 1 Terminal block Connection cable 2 Max distance SIO controller 1 Connection cable 3 External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number Model Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number ERC2 NP PN specifications 2 RS 422 CB ERC PWBIO or CB ERC PWBIO RB Terminal bloc...

Page 765: ... Connection cable 2 GOT Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block External cable Connection cable 1 Connection cable 1 SIO converter Controller Connection cable 1 1 Terminal block Connection cable 2 Max distance SIO controller 1 External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number Model Communication type ERC2 N...

Page 766: ... TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG TXD RXD RTS CTS SG EMGOUT EMGIN Vcc ENBTBX DSR DTR IAI robot controller side External cable GT11H C 37P side Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 7 12 13 18 19 6 20 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG TXD RXD RTS CTS SG EMGOUT EMGIN Vcc ENBTBX DSR DTR IAI robot controller side External cable GT11...

Page 767: ... External cable GT11H C side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SD RD ER SG DR RS CS 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 SIO converter side Connector conversion box side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RD SD ER SG DR RS CS External cable GT11H C 37P side SIO converter side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS...

Page 768: ...ctor For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 IAI Robot Controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the IAI Robot Controller For details refer to the IAI Robot Controller user s...

Page 769: ... SGB SIO converter side TB1 Link connection terminal block SIO converter side TB2 Power emergency stop terminal block 1 2 3 4 0V FG Junction box 4D side E CON connector plug Model 1473562 4 1 2 3 4 Terminal block User preparing Signal name SGA Orange Red1 SGB Orange Black1 GND Terminating resistor 220Ω 1 4W Junction box 4D side E CON Connector Plug Model name 1473562 4 SGA SGB 0V SIO converter sid...

Page 770: ...obot controller goes through the SIO converter The distance from the robot controller to the SIO converter must be 100m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Ca...

Page 771: ... completed POINT POINT POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 18 1 2 I F communication setting 32 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 IAI X SEL Controller 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed u...

Page 772: ...ected equipment Default 38400bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment Default 8bit 7bit 8bit Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications Default 1bit 1bit 2bit Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed during communication Default None Non...

Page 773: ... of X SEL after the PC software for X SEL is connected In this case adjust the communication setting of the GOT to the setting of the PC software Mode switch 1 X SEL K type a When setting the mode switch to MANU Connect the GOT to the following teaching connector b When setting the mode switch to AUTO Connect the GOT to the following general RS232C port connector 1 The teaching connector and gener...

Page 774: ...PC software Transmission speed setting Set the transmission speed from the setting tool PC software 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side Specify the transmission speed to match the transmission speed of the GOT Parameter Parameter name Set value I O parameter 90 Usage of SIO channel 0 opened to user 2 IAI protocol B fixed I O parameter 91 Station code of SIO cha...

Page 775: ...ntroller of which data is to be changed 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the robot controller of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the...

Page 776: ... value set with batch write When Clear 4 is set to the command trigger the communication with the controller is not performed and the set value is initialized When an unsupported set value is input to the command trigger the following error is displayed in the system alarm 315 Device writing error Correct device Device reserved for system use Devices of Reserved for system uses are devices with in...

Page 777: ... memory cassette equipped with a clock is required The C200H CPU01 CPU02 CPU03 does not support the clock function 7 The C200HE CPU11 does not support the clock function 8 For the 20 points PLC module of CP1E N type only the direct CPU connection is available 9 Not compatible with the redundant Ethernet Series Model Clock Communi cation type Refer to SYSMAC CPM CPM1 RS 232 33 2 1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C...

Page 778: ...OT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C adapter 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number CPM2A CQM1 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C CPM1 CIF01 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 6m 1 GOT for 1 RS 232C adapter CPM2C CPM2C CIF01 V1 ...

Page 779: ...ng the external cable GT11H C 1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation For details on the product contact OMRON Corporation RS232C adapter CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C adapter 1 Communication type CPM2A CQM1 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CP...

Page 780: ... type Cable model Connection diagram number CPM1A CQM1 CIF01 RS 232 GT09 C30R20102 25S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CPM2C CPM2C CN111 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 OMRON connection cable CPM1A Connection cable External cable GOT PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipm...

Page 781: ...rnal cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Serial communication board 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number CQM 1H RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CQM1 SCB41 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 serial com...

Page 782: ... diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CQM1 SCB41 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 serial communication board RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 9 13m OMRON connection cable CQM1H Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Nu...

Page 783: ...ING CONTROLLER 33 CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 33 2 Serial Connection 33 7 3 When using the external cable GT11H C 1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation For details on the product contact OMRON Corporation OMRON connection cable CQM1H External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model OMRON connection cable 1 Communication type CQM 1H CQM1 CIF02 R...

Page 784: ...37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 RS 422A converter CJ1H CJ1G CJ1M CJ2H CJ2M CPU1 CJ2M CPU3 CJ1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU41 V1 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 port of a serial communicati on module CJ1W SCU41 V1 CJ1W SCU31 V RS 422 GT09 C30R40101 9P 3m GT09 C100R40101 9P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C...

Page 785: ...M CJ2H CJ2M CPU1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for1 PLC CJ1W CIF11 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 11 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 RS 422A converter CJ1H CJ1G CJ1M CJ2H CJ2M CPU1 CJ2M CPU3 CJ1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU41 V1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 port of a serial communicati on module CJ1W SCU...

Page 786: ...CJ1H CJ1G CJ1M CJ2H CJ2M CPU1 CJ2M CPU3 CJ1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU41 V1 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 port of a serialcommunication module CJ1W SCU41 V1 CJ1W SCU31 V RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 9 13m CJ1H CJ1G CJ1M CJ1W SCU21 CJ1W SCU41 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 po...

Page 787: ...able equipment Model Option board 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number CP1E RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CP1H CP1L CP1E CP1W CIF01 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 RS 232C option board CP1W CIF11 CP1W CIF12 RS 422 GT09 C30R40103...

Page 788: ...P1W CIF12 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 12 13m 1 GOT for 1 RS 422A 485 option board CJ Unit Adapter Serial communication module CP1H Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model CJ unit adapter 1 Serial communication ...

Page 789: ...Number of connectable equipment Model CJ unit adapter 1 Serial communication module 1 Communicat ion type Cable model Connection diagram number CP1H CP1W EXT01 CJ1W SCU21 CJ1W SCU41 CJ1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU41 V1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 port of a serial communicati on module CJ1W SCU41 CJ1W SCU41 V1 CJ1W SCU31 V1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 8 GT11H C30 37...

Page 790: ... GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC C200HS C200H C200HX C200HG C200HE C200H LK201 V1 RS 232 GT09 C30R20103 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 rack type host link unit C200H LK202 V1 RS 422 GT09 C30R40102 9P 3m GT09 C100R40102 9P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30...

Page 791: ...Model Rack type host link unit 1 Communication type C200HX C200HG C200HE RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC C200HS C200H C200HX C200HG C200HE C200H LK201 V1 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 9 6m 1 GOT for 1 rack type host link unit C200H LK202 V1 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 6 13m Commu...

Page 792: ...ble equipment Model Communication board 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number C200HX C200HG C200HE 2 C200HW COM02 C200HW COM05 C200HW COM06 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 port of a serial communicati on module C200HW COM03 C200HW COM06 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 8 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Communication boa...

Page 793: ...erial communication module RS 422A converter 1 Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number CS1H CS1G CS1D RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CS1W SCU21 CS1W SCU21 V1 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 serial communicati on module CJ1W CIF11 RS ...

Page 794: ...SCU21 V1 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 serial communication module CJ1W CIF11 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 12 13m 1 GOT for 1 RS 422A converter Serial communication board CS1H CS1G CS1D Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT...

Page 795: ...cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Serial communication board 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number CS1H CS1G CS1D CS1W SCB21 CS1W SCB41 CS1W SCB21 V1 CS1W SCB41 V1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 serial communicati on board CS1W SCB41 CS1W SCB41 V1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 8 GT11H C30 37...

Page 796: ...pment Model Rack type host link unit 1 Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number C1000H C2000H C500 LK201 V1 RS 232 GT09 C30R20103 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 port of a rack type host link unit RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Rack type host link unit C1000...

Page 797: ...e Number of connectable equipment Model Rack type host link unit 1 Communication type C1000H C2000H C500 LK201 V1 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 9 6m 1 GOT for 1 port of a rack type host link unit RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 6 13m OMRON SYSMAC Communication driver CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 Connection cable Connector conversion ...

Page 798: ...nection diagram number CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m G...

Page 799: ...RON PLC side Connector conversion box side External cable GT11H C 37P side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OMRON PLC side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG FG SD RD RS CS FR ER SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG FG SD RD RS CS FR ER SG External cable GT11H C side...

Page 800: ...side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable d OMRON PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the OMRON PLC For details refer to the OMRON PLC user s manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 5 6 8 20 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS FG SD RD RS SG CS ER OMRON PLC side Connector conversion box side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD...

Page 801: ...am 2 RS422 connection diagram 3 RS422 connection diagram 4 RS422 connection diagram 5 1 6 2 7 3 4 5 8 9 8 6 2 1 4 5 SDA SDB RDA RDB RSA CSA SG RSB CSB FG RDB RDA SDB SDA RS CS OMRON PLC side Connector conversion box side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 6 2 1 4 5 FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG RDB RDA SDB SDA RS CS External cable GT11H C 37P side OMRON PLC side Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK...

Page 802: ...RSB CSB FG RDB RDA SDB SDA RS CS OMRON PLC side Connector conversion box side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 6 2 1 4 5 FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG RDB RDA SDB SDA RS CS External cable GT11H C 37P side OMRON PLC side Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 8 6 2 1 4 5 FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG RDB RDA SDB SDA RS CS External cable GT11H C side ...

Page 803: ...side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box c External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable d OMRON PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the OMRON PLC For details refer to the OMRON PLC user s manual 3 Connecting te...

Page 804: ...y s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change...

Page 805: ...ettings have been changed as follows CPM2A The communication condition switch to individual Other PLC CPU Front panel DIP switch SW5 to OFF Model Refer to PLC CPU CPM2A 33 2 12 CQM1 CQM1H CS1 CJ1 CJ2 33 2 13 CP1H CP1L CP1E 33 2 13 C200Hα 33 2 12 CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 33 2 14 RS 232C adapter CPM1 CIF01 CPM2C CIF01 V1 33 2 12 Connection cable CQM1 CIF01 33 2 15 CQM1 CIF02 CPM2C CN111 Rack type ho...

Page 806: ...er customized DIP switch OFF SW7 Type specification for simplified backup OFF SW8 OFF DIP switch inside battery compartment Switch Description Setting SW1 Enable disable write to user memory UM OFF SW2 Enable disable automatic transfer of user program at power ON OFF SW3 Programming console message display language Japanese English OFF SW4 Peripheral port communication condition OFF SW5 RS 232C co...

Page 807: ...ion slot used at the time of communication with GOT 3 Setting on the CP1H CP1L 33 2 14 Connecting to CV500 CV1000 CV2000 or CVM1 Setting DIP switches Set the DIP switches 1 Host link RS 422 232 switch 2 DIP switches Setting PLC system settings Make the PLC system settings 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 2 Set the same transmission speed as that of the GOT side 3 Set ...

Page 808: ...ting to rack type host link unit Switch setting on C200H LK201 V1 Set the switches accordingly 1 Setting station No SW1 SW2 Set the station No within the range of 00 to 31 Set the station No according to the Host Address on the GOT side 2 Setting transmission speed SW3 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown Device name Set value DM...

Page 809: ...ansmission speed of the GOT 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 3 Setting command level parity transmission code SW4 4 Setting the 1 1 1 N procedure switch 5 Setting the terminating resistor connection switch Setting Contents of setting Comman d level Parity Transmissi on code 2 fixed Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled Even ASCII 7 bits 2 stop bits Switch No Set value 1 OFF 2 ...

Page 810: ... 422 communication RS 232 down RS 422 up Setting Internal up Setting Attached down Setting 0V up In operation Receiving Transmitting Transmission error Mode selection Host link Local Front Rear 6 7 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Switch No Setting Description 8 ON Run 7 OFF 6 OFF 5 Set the station No within the range of 00 to 31 For details refer to the following manual User s Manual for...

Page 811: ... set values to devices of each PLC CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or DM monitor 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 2 Set the same transmission speed as that of the GOT side 3 Set the host link station No according to the Host Address setting on the GOT side Device name Set value Port 1 Port 2 DM m DM m 10 8000H fixed The settings are Port setting A...

Page 812: ...ation No according to the Host Address setting on the GOT side DIP switches Set value No Item SW1 RS 422 485 cable 2 wire 4 wire type switching 4 4 wire type SW2 Terminator ON OFF 1 no terminating resistor attached COMO3 A RS422 485 RDY COMA A COMO6 A RS422 485 B RS232 RDY COMA COMB A SW2 SW1 Side view indicated by A 2 4 1 ON C200HW COM3 C200HW COM6 Device name Set value Port 1 Port 2 D32000 D3201...

Page 813: ...he DIP switches 33 2 21 Connecting to RS 422A converter Setting DIP switches Set the DIP switches DIP switches Set value Name Item WIRE 2 wire 4 wire type switch 4 4 wire type TERM Terminator ON OFF switch OFF no terminating resistor OFF SCB41 V1 2 ON TERM 4 WIRE PORT2 RS422 RS485 RDY COMM1 COMM2 TERM WIRE Switch No Setting Description 1 ON Enable Terminating resistance selection 2 OFF 4 wire type...

Page 814: ...n cable Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable 1 Connector conversion box External cable 6 GOT model Maximum segment length Number of connectable equipment Series Ethernet module 3 Cable model CS1H CS1G CS1D CS1W ETN21 10BASE T Shielded twisted pair cable STP or Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP Category 3 4 and 5 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable STP Category 5 and 5e G...

Page 815: ... 33 3 Ethernet Connection 33 39 3 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation For details on the product contact OMRON Corporation 4 If it is connected to devices other than the GOT using the connection the number of connectable GOTs decreases For details refer to the OMRON PLC user s manual 5 There is no restriction for the number of GOTs However if the number of GOTs increases the communication be...

Page 816: ...t setting must be set to different station numbers 33 3 2 Ethernet setting 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 127 GOT PLC No 3 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 254 GOT IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connect...

Page 817: ...ility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated wi...

Page 818: ...e refer to the following manual OMRON PLC user s Manual 3 Set the same lowermost bit of the IP address setting as that of the node setting switch of the module 4 Set the same GOT Port No Communication In Communication detail settings as that of Port No of the Ethernet setting 5 Set the same lowermost bit of the GOT IP address in Communication detail settings as that of GOT PLC No 6 Set the same lo...

Page 819: ...IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the system The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmissio...

Page 820: ...33 44 33 CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 33 4 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 821: ...8 CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 39 CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 34 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 34 1 Connectable Model List 34 1 34 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 34 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model Communication type Refer to THERMAC NEO E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN RS 232 34 2 1 INPANEL NEO E5ZN RS 232 34 2 2 ...

Page 822: ...e equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number E5AN E5EN RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT E5AN E5EN Connection cable External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagra...

Page 823: ...ction cable 1 Connection cable 2 E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN Connector conversion box External cable GOT Communication driver OMRON THERMAC INPANEL NEO Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distan...

Page 824: ...ction cable 2 External cable Interface converter Connection cable 1 E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communication type E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN RS485 connection diagram 1 500m K...

Page 825: ...Communication driver OMRON THERMAC INPANEL NEO Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT E5ZN E5ZN Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Mo...

Page 826: ...erface converter Connection cable 2 External cable Interface converter Connection cable 1 External cable GOT E5ZN E5ZN Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communication type E5ZN RS485 connection diagram 1 500m K3SC 10 RS 232 GT11H C30...

Page 827: ... 13 11 12 OMRON temperature controller side Connector conversion box side External cable GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG SD RD SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 OMRON temperature controller side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG SD RD SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 11 12 13 External cable GT11H C si...

Page 828: ...onnector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 OMRON temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the OMRON temperature controller For details refer to the user s ...

Page 829: ... which will be terminating resistors Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 500m or less 2 OMRON temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the OMRON temperature controller For details refer to the user s manual of the OMRON temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 OMRON temperature controller side The ...

Page 830: ...mperature controller 3 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 4 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3...

Page 831: ... value of the temperature controller from the GOT set CMWT Communication write to ON in advance 34 5 3 Connecting to interface converter K3SC 10 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the DIP switch of the temperature controller 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Set to Without Settings by DIP switch 1 Transmission speed settings Model Refer to Temperature contr...

Page 832: ...ation will be the station No of the temperature controller 3 All station specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation For write in operation all station will be a target For read out operation only one station will be a target Setting item Set value Switch No 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Data bit 7bits OFF 8bits ON Stop bit 2bits OFF 1bit ON Parity Even OFF OFF Odd O...

Page 833: ...es Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 34 7 Precautions Station number setting of the temperature controller system Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No 1 station GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or Broadcast by GOT clock control will be disabled Cutting the portion of mult...

Page 834: ...34 14 34 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 34 7 Precautions ...

Page 835: ...CHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 35 CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 35 1 Connectable Model List 35 1 35 CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 35 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Model Clock Communication type Refer to KV 5500 KV 5000 RS 232 35 2 1 RS 422 RS 485 Ethernet 35 3 1 KV 3000 RS 232 35 2 2 RS 422 RS 485 Ethernet 35 3 1 KV 1000 RS 232 35 2 3 RS 422 RS 485 Ethernet 35 3 1 ...

Page 836: ...LC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distanc e Number of connectable equipment Model Multi communication unit 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number KV 5500 KV 5000 KV L20V port 1 RS 232 GT09 C30R21102 9S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 multi communicati on unit KV L20V port 2 RS 232 GT09 C30R...

Page 837: ...External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Multi communication unit 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number KV 5500 KV 5000 KV L20V port 1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 multi communicati on unit KV L20V port 2 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 8 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37...

Page 838: ... box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number Conversion connector 1 KV 3000 RS 232 GT09 C30R21101 6P or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC OP 26487 1 OP 26486 6m KV 3000 Connection cable External cable GOT PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total dista...

Page 839: ...of connectable equipment Model Multi communication unit 1 Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number KV 3000 KV L20V port 1 RS 232 GT09 C30R21102 9S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 multi communicati on unit KV L20V port 2 RS 232 GT09 C30R21103 3T 3m or RS232 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m RS 422 GT09 C30R41101 5T...

Page 840: ...00 External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Multi communication unit 1 Communication type KV 3000 KV L20V port 1 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 6m 1 GOT for 1 multi communication unit KV L20V port 2 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 9 6m RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m R...

Page 841: ...00 1000 Communication driver KV 1000 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number Conversion connector 1 KV 1000 RS 232 GT09 C30R21101 6P or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1...

Page 842: ...GT09 C30R21102 9S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 multi communicati on unit KV L20R KV L20V port 2 RS 232 GT09 C30R21103 3T 3m or RS232 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m RS 422 GT09 C30R41101 5T 3m GT09 C100R41101 5T 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Multi comm...

Page 843: ...1 Product manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION For details of the product contact KEYENCE CORPORATION Multi communication unit KV 1000 External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Multi communication unit 1 Communication type KV 1000 KV L20R KV L20V port 1 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 6m 1 GOT for 1 multi communi...

Page 844: ...ber of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number Conversion connector 1 KV 700 RS 232 GT09 C30R21101 6P or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC OP 26487 1 OP 26486 6m KV 700 Connection cable External cable GOT PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communic...

Page 845: ...munication unit KV 700 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Multi communication unit 1 Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number KV 700 KV L20R KV L20 KV L20V port 1 RS 232 GT09 C30R21102 9S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37...

Page 846: ... L20R KV L20 KV L20V port 1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 multi communicati on unit KV L20R KV L20 KV L20V port 2 RS 232 GT09 C30R21103 3T 3m or RS232 connection diagram 8 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Multi communication unit KV 700 External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model T...

Page 847: ...rsion box side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 External cable GT11H C 37P side 1 2 3 4 5 6 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 5V 5V RD SG SD SG KEYENCE PLC side Modular 6 pin Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 6 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 5V 5V RD SG SD SG External cable GT11H C 37P side KEYENCE PLC side Modular 6 pin ...

Page 848: ...side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable d KEYENCE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the KEYENCE PLC side module For details refer to the KEYENCE PLC user s manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 5 4 1 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SD RD SG KEYENCE PLC side terminal block Connector conversion box side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 FG Shield SD TXD ER D...

Page 849: ... side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box c External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable d KEYENCE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the KEYENCE PLC side module For details refer to the KEYENCE PLC user s manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 1 2 3 SDA RDA RSA CSA ...

Page 850: ...e Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 9600bps 9600...

Page 851: ...ssion speed as that of the GOT side 3 Set the station No according to the host address on the GOT side 2 Setting DIP switches Set the DIP switches a When using KV L20R or KV L20 RS232 RS422 RS485 switch For port 2 For KV L20R For KV L20 Model Refer to PLC CPU KV 3000 35 17 KV 1000 35 17 KV 700 35 17 Multi communication unit KV L20R 35 17 KV L20 KV L20V Item Set value Transmission speed 9600 to 115...

Page 852: ...nator setting switch Set when carrying out RS 422 communication Setting When multi communication unit is a terminal When multi communication unit is not a terminal ON OFF Setting When multi communication unit is a terminal When multi communication unit is not a terminal ON OFF ON OFF Terminator setting switch Port 1 RS232 Port 2 RS232 RS422 RS485 ON OFF ...

Page 853: ...e used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION For details of the product contact KEYENCE CORPORATION 4 Use C or later version of GT11H C 37P MODBUS RTU Communication driver CPU GOT Ethernet module Connection cable Connector conversion box Ext...

Page 854: ...et the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 1 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 254 GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 0 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default G...

Page 855: ...made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 35 3 3 PLC side setting POINT POINT POINT KEYENCE PLC For details of KEYENCE PLC refer to the following manual KEYENCE PLC user s Manual Setting of KV LE21V LE20V Set the IP address and port No by the unit editor of KV STUDIO 1 Adjust the settings with the Ethernet settings of the GOT side 35 3 2 Ethernet setting Item Description ...

Page 856: ...35 4 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 ...

Page 857: ...e shows the connectable models 1 The GOT can only read the clock data In the clock setting though the adjust is available the broadcast is not available Series Model Clock 1 Communication type Refer to KOSTAC SU Series SU 5E RS 232 RS 422 36 2 1 SU 6B SU 5M RS 232 RS 422 SU 6M DirectLOGIC 05 Series D0 05AA RS 232 RS 422 36 2 2 D0 05AD D0 05AR D0 05DA D0 05DD D0 05DD D D0 05DR D0 05DR D DirectLOGIC...

Page 858: ...r SU 5E 6B general communication port RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT SU 5M 6M general communication port 1 SU 5E 6B general communication port RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m SU 5M 6M general communication port 1 SU 5M 6M general communication port 2 RS 232 Z20P Programmabl...

Page 859: ...able GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Data communications module 1 Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number SU 5E 6B general communication port RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT SU 5M 6M general communication port 1 SU 5E 6B general communication port RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P ...

Page 860: ...ral communication port RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT SU 5M 6M general communication port 1 SU 5E 6B general communication port RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 3 13m SU 5M 6M general communication port 1 SU 5M 6M general communication port 3 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diag...

Page 861: ...er 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual KOYO KOSTAC DL Communication driver Connection cable Data Communications Module SU 5E 6B SU 5M 6B Data Communications Module Connector conversion box External cable GOT SU 5E 6B SU 5M 6B PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Data comm...

Page 862: ...nection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Data communications module 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number SU 5E 6B RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 14 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 90 PLCs for 1 GOT 2 SU 5M 6M general communication port 1 SU 5M 6M general communication port 3 RS 422 RS422 connection d...

Page 863: ...ber of connectable equipment Model Serial data communication s module 1 Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number Direct LOGIC 05 communication port 1 communication port 2 RS 232 Z20P Programmable connection cable S 9CNS1 Conversion connector 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT Direct LOGIC 06 communication port 1 Direct LOGIC 06 communication port 2 RS 232 RS232 co...

Page 864: ...11 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Direct LOGIC 05 D0 DCM port 2 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 serial data communicati on module for 1 GOT Direct LOGIC 06 Direct LOGIC 05 D0 DCM port 2 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 11 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Direct LOGIC 06 D0 DCM DirectLOGIC 05 DirectLOGIC 06 External cable GOT ...

Page 865: ...1CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual KOYO KOSTAC DL Communication driver Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable D0 DCM DirectLOGIC 05 DirectLOGIC 06 DirectLOGIC 05 DirectLOGIC 06 D0 DCM GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Serial communication...

Page 866: ...ion unit D 01CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual External cable D0 DCM DirectLOGIC 05 DirectLOGIC 06 DirectLOGIC 05 DirectLOGIC 06 D0 DCM GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Serial communication module 1 Communication type Direct LOGIC 06 communication port 2 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C10...

Page 867: ...iver D2 DCM Connection cable D2 240 D2 250 1 D2 260 Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Data communications module 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number D2 240 D2 250 1 D2 260 communication port 2 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT...

Page 868: ...T D2 250 1 D2 260 communication port 2 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 11 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m D2 240 D2 250 1 D2 260 D2 DCM RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 data communication module for 1 GOT RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 8 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m D2 DCM D2 240 D2 250 1 D2 260 External cable GOT PLC Ext...

Page 869: ...per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual KOYO KOSTAC DL Communication driver Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT D2 DCM D2 240 D2 250 1 D2 260 D2 DCM D2 240 D2 250 1 D2 260 PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Data communication s module 1 Communic...

Page 870: ...f connectable equipment Model Data communications module 1 Communication type D2 250 1 D2 260 communication port 2 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 24 13m 90 PLCs for 1 GOT 2 D2 240 D2 250 1 D2 260 D2 DCM RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 21 KOYO KOSTAC DL Communication driver PZ Connection cable Connector conversion bo...

Page 871: ...PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number PZ general communication port 2 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 11 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m PZ External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model...

Page 872: ... Connection cable PZ PZ Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number PZ general communication port 2 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 22 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 90 PLCs for 1...

Page 873: ...I PLC 36 2 System Configuration 36 17 3 When using the external cable GT11H C 1 When the number of links exceeds 30 use a transmission line conversion unit D 01CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual PZ PZ External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type PZ general communication port ...

Page 874: ...ram 5 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS TXD RXD RTS 0V CTS 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 5 6 8 to 25 KOYO EI PLC side Connector conversion box side External cable GT11H C 37P side FG Shield RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS TXD RXD RTS CTS 2 0V 1 1 4 2 3 10 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 to 25 KOYO EI PLC s...

Page 875: ... with the KOYO EI PLC side For details refer to the KOYO EI PLC user s manual 36 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 Connect a terminating resistor approximately 150Ω to the PLC at a terminal station RS422 connection diagram 2 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 Co...

Page 876: ...nect a terminating resistor approximately 150Ω to the PLC at a terminal station RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG Shield O R A O BK A W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A Shield 14 16 9 10 1 to 6 8 12 13 7 15 17 18 19 20 to 22 23 11 24 25 TXD TXD RXD RXD SG RTS RTS CTS CTS 1 2 External cable GT11H C side KOYO EI PLC side RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 12 13 ...

Page 877: ...ction diagram 10 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 Connect a terminating resistor approximately 100 to 500Ω to the PLC to be a terminal RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 14 15 17 16 1 to 6 8 9 18 to 21 7 10 11 12 13 22 23 24 25 TXD TXD RXD RXD RTS RTS LG RTS RTS CTS CTS TXD TXD RXD RXD 1 2 KOYO EI PLC side Connector conversion box side RD...

Page 878: ...ission line conversion unit D 01CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG Shield 6 7 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 1 9 10 13 6 1 2 to 5 8 7 11 12 14 15 TXD3 TXD3 RXD3 RXD3 SG RTS RTS CTS CTS 1 2 KOYO EI PLC side External cable GT11H C 37P side RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG Shield O R A O BK A W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A Y R A...

Page 879: ...ble shield line 2 Connect a terminating resistor approximately 150Ω to the PLC at a terminal station When the number of links exceeds 30 use a transmission line conversion unit D 01CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual TXD TXD RXD RXD SG RTS RTS CTS CTS TXD TXD RXD RXD SG RTS RTS CTS CTS RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG Shield 6 7 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 1...

Page 880: ...esistor approximately 150Ω to the PLC at a terminal station When the number of links exceeds 30 use a transmission line conversion unit D 01CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual TXD3 TXD3 RXD3 RXD3 SG TXD3 TXD3 RXD3 RXD3 SG RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 12 13 24 25 1 to 6 8 to 11 14 to 23 7 12 13 24 25 1 to 6 8 to 11 14 to 23 ...

Page 881: ...opriate part of a cable shield line 2 Connect a terminating resistor approximately 150Ω to the PLC at a terminal station When the number of links exceeds 30 use a transmission line conversion unit D 01CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual TXD3 TXD3 RXD3 RXD3 SG TXD3 TXD3 RXD3 RXD3 SG RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG Shield O R A O BK A W R A W BK ...

Page 882: ...CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual TXD TXD RXD RXD RTS RTS SG RTS RTS CTS CTS TXD TXD RXD RXD TXD TXD RXD RXD RTS RTS SG RTS RTS CTS CTS TXD TXD RXD RXD RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG Shield 6 7 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 1 14 15 17 16 1 to 6 8 9 18 to 21 7 10 11 12 13 22 23 24 25 14 15 17 16 1 to 6 8 9 18 to 21 7 10 11 12 13 22 23 24 25 1 1 2 KOYO EI PL...

Page 883: ...ual RS422 connection diagram 23 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 Connect a terminating resistor approximately 100 to 500Ω to the PLC to be a terminal When the number of links exceeds 30 use a transmission line conversion unit D 01CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual TXD TXD RXD RXD 5V 0V 0V RTS RTS CTS CTS TXD TX...

Page 884: ...on box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 KOYO EI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the KOYO EI PLC side For details refer to the KOYO EI PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 KOYO EI PL...

Page 885: ...T POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utili...

Page 886: ...ng the CPU DIP switch 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side Specify the transmission speed to match the transmission speed of the GOT Model Refer to KOSTAC SU Series SU 5E 6B 36 5 1 SU 5M 6M 36 5 2 DirectLOGIC 05 Series DirectLOGIC 06 Series 36 5 3 DirectLOGIC 205 Series 36 5 4 PZ series 36 5 5 Model Refer to Data Communications Module U 01DM 36 5 6 D0 DCM 36 5 7...

Page 887: ...eds that can be set on the GOT side Specify the transmission speed to match the transmission speed of the GOT 36 5 5 Connecting to PZ Series Communication settings Make the following settings using the programmer system parameter setting 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side Specify the transmission speed to match the transmission speed of the GOT Item Set value ...

Page 888: ... the GOT 3 Communication and the DIP switch for a setup of a protocol SW5 Switch No Setting Contents of setting SW2 Code higher rank 101 figures 01 to 5A SW3 Code low rank 100 figures Setting item Set value Switch No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmission speed 1 9600bps OFF ON ON 19200bps ON ON ON 38400bps OFF OFF OFF Parity ODD ON NONE OFF Self diagnostic OFF OFF Response delay time 0ms OFF OFF OFF Front ...

Page 889: ...e set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive 1 Direct specification Specify the station No of the PLC to be changed when setting device Item Set value MODE HEX Protocol DirectNet Station No 1 to 90 Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Parity NONE ODD EVEN Only communication port 2 RTS On Delay Time O...

Page 890: ...36 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 ...

Page 891: ...LC 37 1 Connectable Model List 37 1 37 CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 37 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models 1 Use PC3J of the version 2 1 or later Model Model type Clock Communication type Refer to PC3JG P TIC 6088 RS 232 RS 422 37 2 1 PC3JG TIC 6125 PC3JD TIC 5642 PC3JD C TIC 6029 PC3J 1 TIC 5339 RS 232 RS 422 37 2 2 PC3JL TIC 5783 PC2J THC 2764 RS 232 RS 422 37 2 ...

Page 892: ...Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Link unit 1 Communi cation type Cable model Connectiondiagram number Cable model Connection diagram number PC3JG PC3JG P PC3JD PC3JD C PC CMP2 LINK RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT09 C30R41201 6C 3m GT09 C100R41201 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 7 G...

Page 893: ...on cable 1 GOT PLC Connection cable 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Link unit 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number PC3JG PC3JG P PC3JD PC3JD C PC CMP2 LINK RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 9 13m 10 PLCs for 1 GOT JTEKT TOYOPUC PC Communication driver Link unit ...

Page 894: ...er of connectable equipment Model Link unit 1 Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number PC3JG PC3JG P PC3JD PC3JD C RS422 connection diagram 1 500m TXU 2051 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 32 PLCs for 1 GOT PC CMP LINK 2PORT LINK RS422 connection diagram 2 PC CMP2 LINK RS422 connection diagram 3 Link uni...

Page 895: ...V FG TIP 5426 1st 2nd BATTERY START RESET 2W 4W L1RXD L1 L1RXD L2 4W 2W GOT Link unit Link unit PLC Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Link unit 1 Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number PC3J PC3JL RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 6 GT09...

Page 896: ...e model Connection diagram number PC3J PC3JL RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 6 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 9 13m 10 PLCs for 1 GOT PC CMP2 LINK RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 JTEKT TOYOPUC PC Communication driver Link unit 2 P O R T L I N K TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB A 6 D B C 4 8 F 1 0 E 2 9 7 3 5 0V FG 0V FG A B Link unit 2 P O R T L I N K TXDA TXDB RX...

Page 897: ... 2W PLC Connection cable 1 RS 232 RS 422 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Link unit 1 Cable model Connection diagram number Max distanc e Model Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number PC3J PC3JL RS422 connection diagram 1 500m TXU 2051 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 32 P...

Page 898: ...ion cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Link unit 1 Commu nication type Cable model Connectiondiagram number Cable model Connection diagram number PC2J PC2JS PC2JR PC CMP2 LINK RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT09 C30R41201 6C 3m GT09 C100R41201 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H...

Page 899: ...nit PC2J PC2JS PC2JR PC2J PC2JS PC2JR PLC Connection cable 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Link unit 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number PC2J PC2JS PC2JR PC CMP2 LINK RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 9 13m 10 PLCs for 1 GOT JTEKT TOYOPUC PC Communication drive...

Page 900: ...l cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Link unit 1 Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number PC2J PC2JS PC2JR PC CMP LINK 2PORT LINK RS422 connection diagram 2 500m TXU 2051 RS 232 RS232connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 10 PLCs for 1 GOT PC CMP2 LINK RS422 connection diagram 3 Link uni...

Page 901: ...Connector conversion box External cable Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Link unit Link unit PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR PLC Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Link unit 1 Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram numb...

Page 902: ...at ion type Cable model Connection diagram number PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR PC CMP2 LINK RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 9 13m 10 PLCs for 1 GOT JTEKT TOYOPUC PC Communication driver Link unit Link unit Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR PC2JC P...

Page 903: ...16P PC2J16PR PLC Connection cable 1 RS 232 RS 422 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Link unit 1 Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Cable model Connection diagram number PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR RS 232 RS422 connection diagram 1 500m TXU 2051 RS232connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 3...

Page 904: ...ations of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 JTEKT PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the JTEKT PLC side module For details refer to the JTEKT PLC user s manual JTEKT PLC side RS 232 RS 422 Interface converter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 2 4 7 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS NC FG FG RD TD RS 0V Connector conversion box side ...

Page 905: ...nding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS422 connection diagram 3 1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS 232 RS 422 interface converter which will be terminals 2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS422 connection diagram 4 1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS 232 RS 422 interface converter whi...

Page 906: ... be 500m or less b The length of the RS 422 cable used for connecting the connected equipment to the GOT The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 422 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of th...

Page 907: ...mmunication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click OK Item Desc...

Page 908: ... 1 Setting of the station No Set the station No between 00 and 37 Octal 2 Transmission speed settings 3 Settings of data length and stop bit length Model Refer to PLC CPU PC3JG PC3JG P PC3JD PC3JD C PC3J PC3JL PC2J PC2JS PC2JR 37 5 1 PC2JC 37 5 2 PC2J16P PC2J16RR 37 5 3 RS 232 RS 422 interface converter TXU 2051 37 5 4 Link unit PC CMP LINK 37 5 5 2PORT LINK PC CMP2 LINK Item Set value Transmissio...

Page 909: ... 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Set referring to the RS 422 connection diagram For details refer to the following 37 3 2 RS 422 cable Settings by switch Make the communication settings by each setting switch of the RS 232 RS 422 interface converter 1 Transmission speed settings 2 Mode setting switch 3 Echoback setting switch Item Set value Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps Data bit ...

Page 910: ...d module type setting switches P C C M P L I N K T X D R X D ERR CODE SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 4 SW4 3 SW4 2 SW4 1 A 6 D B C 4 8 F 1 0 E 2 9 7 3 5 A 6 D B C 4 8 F 1 0 E 2 9 7 3 5 A 6 D B C 4 8 F 1 0 E 2 9 7 3 5 LT 0V FG Transmission speed setting switch Model PC CMP2 LINK P C C M P 2 L I N K TXD RXD E RR CODE SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 4 SW4 3 SW4 2 SW4 1 A 6 D B C 4 8 F 1 0 E 2 9 7 3 5 A 6 D B C 4 8 F 1 0 E 2 9 7 3 ...

Page 911: ...n number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 37 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings GOT clock control The GOT clock function is available only for the PLC with the station number set with the host address For details of host address setting refer to the following 37 4 1 Setting communication interface Communic...

Page 912: ...37 22 37 CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 37 7 Precautions ...

Page 913: ...NECTION TO SHARP PLC 38 1 Connectable Model List 38 1 38 CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 38 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models 1 When the link unit ZW 10CM is used in JW 70CUH 100CUH the clock function is not available Model Clock Communication type Refer to JW 21CU RS 422 38 2 1 JW 22CU RS 232 RS 422 JW 31CUH RS 422 38 2 2 JW 32CUH RS 232 RS 422 JW 33CUH JW 50CUH RS...

Page 914: ...30R20601 15P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS 422 GT09 C30R40601 15P 3m GT09 C100R40601 15P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m JW 21CU JW 22CU JW 21CM RS 422 GT09 C30R40603 6T 3m GT09 C100R40103 5T 10m or RS422 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P ...

Page 915: ...xternal cable GT11H C 1 Product manufactured by SHARP Corporation For details of this product contact SHARP Corporation Link unit JW 21CU JW 22CU JW 31CU External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Link unit 1 Communication type JW 22CU RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C...

Page 916: ...am number JW 32CUH JW 33CUH RS 232 GT09 C30R20602 15P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS 422 GT09 C30R40602 15P 3m GT09 C100R40602 15P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m JW 31CUH JW 32CUH JW 33CUH JW 21CM RS 422 GT09 C30R40603 6T 3m GT09 C100R40103 5T 10m or RS422 connection dia...

Page 917: ... supporting JW 31CUH JW 32CUH or JW 33CUH Product manufactured by SHARP Corporation For details of this product contact SHARP Corporation Link unit External cable GOT JW 31CUH JW 32CUH JW 33CUH PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Link unit 1 Communication type JW 32CUH JW 33CUH RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 6m 1 GOT for 1 ...

Page 918: ...tion diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS 422 GT09 C30R40601 15P 3m GT09 C100R40601 15P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m JW 50CUH JW 70CUH JW 100CUH JW 100CU JW 10CM ZW 10CM RS 422 GT09 C30R40603 6T 3m GT09 C100R40103 5T 10m or RS422 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m...

Page 919: ...nk unit 1 Communication type JW 70CUH JW 100CUH JW 100CU RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 3 13m JW 50CUH JW 70CUH JW 100CUH JW 100CU JW 10CM ZW 10CM RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 9 13m SHARP JW Communication driver Z 512J Connection cable...

Page 920: ...ype Cable model Connection diagram number Z 512J RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Z 512J External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Z 512J RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagra...

Page 921: ... CTS SG RTS SHARP PLC side Connector conversion box side External cable GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 7 12 14 FG TXD RXD CTS SG RTS SHARP PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 7 12 14 FG TXD RXD CTS SG RTS External cable GT...

Page 922: ... 38 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 1 Connect the terminating resistor at pin 6 with pin 13 RXD only at the terminal station Valid for JW 70CUH and JW 100CUH The terminating resistor does not exist in JW 22CU and JW 100CU RS422 connection diagram 2 1 Connect the terminating resistor at pin 6 with pin 13 RXD only at the terminal station Valid for JW 70CUH and JW 100CU...

Page 923: ... and ZW 10CM Connect to either SHIELD terminal FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG 12 13 6 10 11 7 Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A RXD RD RXD RD TXD SD TXD SD SG terminating 1 resistor SHARP PLC side External cable GT11H C side RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 3 11 9 10 6 7 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 SD SD RD RD SG SG SHARP PLC side Connector conversion box...

Page 924: ...LC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 SHARP PLC side Connect the terminating resistor on the SHARP PLC side when connecting a GOT to a SHARP PLC The PLC CPUs and the modules on the PLC CPU side requiring a terminating resistor are shown below a JW 22CU Turn ON the terminating resistor setting switch SW1 on the back of JW 22CU to validate the terminating resistor b JW 70CUH and JW 100...

Page 925: ...Time of the GOT side to 30ms or more POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When...

Page 926: ...tting switch For JW 22CU only Set the terminating resistor setting switch 1 When using KV L20R or KV L20 Model Refer to PLC CPU JW 22CU 38 5 1 JW 32CUH JW 33CUH 38 5 2 JW 70CUH JW 100CUH JW 100CU 38 5 1 Z 512J 38 5 2 Link unit JW 21CM 38 5 3 JW 10CM ZW 10CM 38 5 4 System memory No Item Set value 236 Transmission speed Parity Stop bit 237 Station No 1 Station No 1 fixed Settings For RS 232 communic...

Page 927: ...SW8 The module No switch is not used for communication with the GOT 2 Terminator switch SW7 3 Station number setting switch SW1 SW2 System memory No Item Set value 234 Transmission speed Parity Stop bit 235 Station No 1 Station No 1 fixed System memory No Item Set value 236 Transmission speed Parity Stop bit 237 Station No 1 Station No 1 fixed 1 2 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D0 0 0 3 2 1 1 2 3 Transmission ...

Page 928: ...valid SW3 2 ON fixed 4 wire type SW3 3 OFF fixed Invalid SW3 4 ON fixed Even Setting 1 Contents of setting 0 19200bps 1 9600bps 2 4800bps 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side Setting Settings 4 fixed Computer link Setting Settings 4 fixed Computer link command mode Switch No Setting Settings SW1 Station No lower digit 100 digit 1 fixed SW2 Station No upper digit...

Page 929: ...ON TO SHARP PLC 39 CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 38 CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 38 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 38 17 38 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for G...

Page 930: ...38 18 38 CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 38 6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 931: ...CS 33A C5 2 RS 232 39 2 1 JCR 33A C5 2 JCD 33A C5 2 JCM 33A Series JCM 33A C5 2 RS 232 39 2 1 JIR 301 M Series JIR 301 M C5 2 RS 232 39 2 1 PCD 300 Series PCD 33A M C5 2 RS 232 39 2 1 PC 900 Series PC935 M C5 2 RS 232 39 2 1 PC955 M C5 2 PC935 M C 1 RS 232 39 2 2 PC955 M C 1 FCD 100 Series 1 FCD 13A M C RS 232 39 2 2 FCD 15A M C FCR 100 Series 1 FCR 13A M C RS 232 39 2 2 FCR 15A M C FCR 23A Series...

Page 932: ...ndicating controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Cable model Connection diagram number ACS13A JC JCM 33A JIR 301 M PCD 300 Series PC 955 M C5 PC 935 M C5 RS 232 RS485 connection diagram 1 1200...

Page 933: ... 33A JIR 301 M PCD 300 series PC 955 M C5 PC 935 M C5 GOT ACS13A JC JCM 33A JIR 301 M PCD 300 series PC 955 M C5 PC 935 M C5 Indicating controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Communicati on type Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance ACS13A JC JCM 33A JIR 301 M PCD 300 Series PC 955 M C5 PC 935...

Page 934: ... controller 1 Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FCD 100 FCR 100 FCR 23A FIR Series PC 955 M C PC 935 M C RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 indicating controller for 1 GOT External cable FCD 100 FCR 100 FCR 23A FIR series PC 955 M C PC 935 M C GOT Indicating co...

Page 935: ...oller Communication driver Connector conversion box External cable Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT DCL 33A series DCL 33A series Indicating controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram num...

Page 936: ...verter Connection cable 2 External cable External cable Interface converter Connection cable 1 GOT DCL 33A series DCL 33A series Indicating controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance DCL 33A Series RS 232 RS485 CPP 1 1200m IF 400 GT11H C30 3...

Page 937: ...T and a controller of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 Shinko Technos indicating controller controller side con...

Page 938: ...e the connector compatible with the Shinko Technos indicating controller controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 Shinko Technos indicating controller side A terminating resistor must be connected to the Shinko Technos indicating controller User s Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controll...

Page 939: ...ronment POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Desi...

Page 940: ...C Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the indicating controller 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 When setting the 95 to the station No the read out of data cannot be performed 39 5 3 Connecting to communication converter IF 400 Communication settings Make the communication settings using a setting switch 1 Adjust the settings with GOT and the ind...

Page 941: ... the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the indicating controller 3 All station specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation For write in operation all station will be a target In the WORD BIT write in operation only the indicating controller whose station No is the same as host address is applica...

Page 942: ...to the following 39 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings GOT clock control Since the indicating controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled When using the communication converter IF 400 When using the communication converter IF 400 some communication error may occur Set the number of retries...

Page 943: ...Communication type Refer to LT230 Series LT230 RS 232 40 2 1 LT300 Series LT350 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 1 LT370 LT400 Series LT450 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 1 LT470 LT830 Series LT830 RS 232 40 2 1 DZ1000 Series DZ1000 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 1 DZ2000 Series DZ2000 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 1 DB1000 Series DB1000 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 1 DB2000 Series DB2000 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 1 KP Series KP1000 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 2 KP2000 A...

Page 944: ...on type Cable model Connection diagram number LT300 LT400 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 controller for 1 GOT RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 10 controllers for 1 GOT Connection cable LT230 LT830 LT300 LT400 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 LT230 LT830 LT300 LT400 ...

Page 945: ... Model Communication type LT300 LT400 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 controller for 1 GOT RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 4 13m 10 controllers for 1 GOT Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT LT230 LT830 LT300 LT400 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB10...

Page 946: ...am number Max distance Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number LT300 LT400 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 RS422 connection diagram 1 1200m SC8 10 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 31 controllers for 1 GOT LT230 LT300 LT400 LT830 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 RS485 connection diagram 1 1200m SC8 10 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m Interface...

Page 947: ...onnector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number KP1000 KP2000 AL3000 AH3000 SE3000 KE3000 LE5100 LE5200 LE5300 JU RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 controller for 1 GOT RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT...

Page 948: ...ion diagram 4 13m 10 controllers for 1 GOT Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT KP1000 KP2000 AL3000 AH3000 SE3000 KE3000 LE5100 LE5200 LE5300 JU KP1000 KP2000 AL3000 AH3000 SE3000 KE3000 LE5100 LE5200 LE5300 JU Indicating controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable G...

Page 949: ...erface converter 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number KP1000 KP2000 AL3000 AH3000 SE3000 KE3000 LE5100 LE5200 LE5300 JU RS422 connection diagram 1 1200m SC8 10 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 31 cont...

Page 950: ...tor conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number Model Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number GT120 GT8 CDD 60mm or RS485 connection diagram 3 GT8 CDM 3m or RS485 connection diagram 4 1200m SC8 10 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 ...

Page 951: ...act CHINO corporation 2 The distance from the GOT to the interface converter Connection cable 2 External cable Interface converter Connection cable 2 GT120 GT120 Connection cable 1 External cable GOT Indicating controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Max distance Interface converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection di...

Page 952: ...connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 CHINO controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the CHINO controller side module For details refer to the user s manual of the CHINO controlle...

Page 953: ... SG of the controller and SG of the converter 4 Set the Communication Type switch of the converter to RS 422 5 For KP2000 series the terminal No differs according to the model This indicates the symbols of the position 10 third zone of the following models Model KP2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 Signal name Controller type LT300 LT400 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 KP1000 KP2000 5 JU A C F Terminal No Term...

Page 954: ...1 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG 4 RSA CSA RSB CSB 2 7 1 6 5 3 4 8 9 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG 4 SG 4 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG 4 Controller 1 Terminating resistor 100Ω 1 4W 2 Connector conversion box side Controller 1 FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG 3 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG 3 Controller 1 Terminating resistor 100Ω 1 4W 2 External cable GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SDA SDB RSA...

Page 955: ...r of the RS 422 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 CHINO controller side connector Use the connector compatible with th...

Page 956: ...following table 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the Communication Type switch of the converter to RS 485 Controller 1 Controller 1 Term RDA RDB SDA SDB 4 5 6 7 8 SA SB SA SB SG 3 SG 3 Terminating resistor 100Ω 1 4W 2 4 Interface converter SC8 10 Signal name Controller type LT230 LT300 LT400 LT830 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 KP1000 KP2000 5 ...

Page 957: ...f the converter to RS 485 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual User s Manual of the CHINO controller Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 1200m or less 2 CHINO controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the CHINO controller side module For details refer to the user s manual of the CHINO controller Con...

Page 958: ...g Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 4 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for commu...

Page 959: ... duplication of the station No with any of the other units 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 40 5 3 Connecting to DZ1000 DZ2000 Series Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters set the Key Lock setting to Lock 2 Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation 1 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 2 Adjust t...

Page 960: ...og parameters set the Key Lock setting Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation 1 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Item Set value Protocol MODBUS RTU Function COM Upper communication Station No 1 01 to 99 Transmission speed 2 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Character 2 7BIT EVEN STOP1 7BIT E...

Page 961: ...k setting Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation 1 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Item Set value Protocol MODBUS RTU Station No 1 3 1 to 31 Transmission speed 2 3 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit 2 Even Odd None Stop bit 2 1bit 2bits Transmission code Binary fixed E...

Page 962: ...ters set the Key Lock setting Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation 1 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Setting item Set value SW2 2 SW2 3 Transmission code 2 MODBUS RTU OFF Transmission speed 1 9600bps OFF 19200bps ON Transmission character structure 2 8bits Disable 1bit fixed SW3 4...

Page 963: ... the controller 3 All station specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation For write in operation all station will be a target For read out operation only one station will be a target All station specification is not available for KE3000 Do not use the all station specification for systems which include KE3000 Item Set value Transmission speed select s...

Page 964: ...h the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 40 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings GOT clock control Since the controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal ...

Page 965: ...N TO FUJI PLC 41 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 41 1 Connectable Model List 41 1 41 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 41 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to PROSEC T Series T2 PU224 RS 422 41 2 1 T3 T3H T2E RS 232 RS 422 T2N RS 232 RS 422 PROSEC V Series model 2000 S2 RS 422 41 2 2 model 2000 S2T model 2000 S2E model 3000 S3 R...

Page 966: ...T2 PU224 T3 T3H RS 422 GT09 C30R40501 15P 3m GT09 C100R40501 15P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC T2E RS 232 GT09 C30R20501 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m RS 422 GT09 C30R40502 6C 3m GT09 C100R40502 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H ...

Page 967: ...7P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC T2E RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m T2N RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 8 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m GOT PROSEC T series External cable PLC E...

Page 968: ...S2T S2E RS 422 GT09 C30R40502 6C 3m GT09 C100R40502 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC model 3000 S3 RS 422 GT09 C30R40501 15P 3m GT09 C100R40501 15P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 13m GOT PROSEC V series Connection cable External cable PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of ...

Page 969: ...CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 41 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 41 2 Serial Connection 41 5 3 When using the external cable GT11H C PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type model 2000 S2 S2T S2E RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 6 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC model 3000 S3 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m ...

Page 970: ...1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SG RXD TXD SG 5V RTS 5V TOSHIBA PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SG RXD TXD SG 5V RTS 5V External cable GT11H C side TOSHIBA PLC side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 5 12 7 8 15 6 14 13 TXD RXD SG SG SG RTS CTS TOSHIBA PLC side C...

Page 971: ...external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable d TOSHIBA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the TOSHIBA PLC For details refer to the TOSHIBA PLC user s manual RS 422 cable 1 Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 3 RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 3 11 2 10 13 1 5 4 7 12 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 T...

Page 972: ...SHIBA PLC side FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A RXA RXB TERM TXA TXB SG External cable GT11H C side TOSHIBA PLC side RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 3 11 2 10 8 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 TXA TXB RXA RXB SG R TOSHIBA PLC side Connector conversion box side FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG 2 10 3 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 973: ...x side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box c External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable d TOSHIBA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the TOSHIBA PLC For details refer to the TOSHIBA PLC user s manual 3 Connecting terminating resistors a TOSHIBA PLC side W...

Page 974: ...ce setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Trans...

Page 975: ...d as that of the GOT side Connecting to T3 or T3H Enter the transmission parameters 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side 2 Set the same transmission speed as that of the GOT side Connecting to model 2000 S2 S2T S2E model 3000 S3 Enter the transmission parameters 1 Can be used as RS 422 2 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side 3 Se...

Page 976: ... contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by TOSHIBA Corporation For details of this product contact TOSHIBA Corporation 4 There is no restriction for the number of GOTs However if the number of GOTs increases the communication becomes high loaded and it may affect the communication performance 5 Use C or later version of GT11H C 37P Ethernet TOSHIBA nv Gateway Communication d...

Page 977: ...mmunication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 41 3 2 Ethernet setting Click OK Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 254 GOT IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set th...

Page 978: ...lows 2 Operation mode setting switch 1 XX indicates the value of the station address setting switch Subnet mask 255 255 192 0 2 XX indicates the value of the station address setting switch Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 3 It can be set freely from the engineering tool for the Unified Controller nv Series and the value has precedence over the value of the station address setting switches Item Descriptio...

Page 979: ...ce communication Note that if a non existent station or a station which power is turned OFF is monitored the communication of normal stations is also delayed Redundant system When configuring a redundant system the Multicast address setting for the configured PLC pair System A Primary System B Secondary is required 41 4 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers th...

Page 980: ...41 16 41 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 41 4 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 981: ... HITACHI PLC 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 42 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 42 1 Connectable Model List 42 1 42 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 42 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models 1 Connectable to the products only which have RS 232 communication function Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to TCmini Series 1 TC3 01 RS 232 42 2 1 TC3 02 TC6 00 TC8...

Page 982: ... equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number TC3 TC6 TC8 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC GOT TC3 TC6 TC8 Connection cable External cable PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number TC3 TC6 TC8 RS 232 RS232 c...

Page 983: ...e Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number TS2000 TS2100 POD port RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 robot controller Robot controller Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Commun...

Page 984: ...XD RXD DSR SG DTR CTS RTS CD TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC side Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG CI TXD RXD DSR SG DTR CTS RTS CD External cable GT11H C side TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 2 6 5 4 8 7 9 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS N C TXD RXD N C SG DTR CTS RTS N C ...

Page 985: ...reparing a cable 1 Cable length The total distance between the GOT and a controller of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay...

Page 986: ...mmunication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the t...

Page 987: ... TC8 series No communication settings Communication is available using default value of the PLC 42 5 2 Connecting to TC6 series The setting of transmission speed is changeable Set the following Special AUX Relay A using engineering tool The communication may not work properly if the settings are made using the GOT 1 Set the same transmission speed as that of the GOT side 42 5 3 Connecting to TS200...

Page 988: ...et 42 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 ...

Page 989: ... amplifier Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable Series Clock Communication type Refer to MINAS A4 RS 232 RS 485 43 2 1 MINAS A4F MINAS A4L MINAS A5 PANASONIC MINAS Communication driver Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 MINAS GOT MINAS Connector conversion box External cable Servo amplifier Connection cable 1 Servo amplifier Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External c...

Page 990: ...ation type Cable model 1 Max dista nce Model Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number Max dista nce MINAS A4 MINAS A4F MINAS A4L RS 485 DVOP1970 0 2m DVOP1971 0 5m DVOP1972 1m MINAS A4 MINAS A4F MINAS A4L RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 2m GT11H C30 37P 3m 17m 16 servo amplifiers for 1 GOT MINAS A5 RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 1 1m MINAS A5 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 5 2...

Page 991: ...D G RS485 RS485 External cable GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 5 3 2 6 4 7 8 RXD TXD G RS485 RS485 PANASONIC servo amplifier side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 5 3 2 6 4 7 8 RXD TXD G RS485 RS485 External cable GT11H C side PANASONIC servo am...

Page 992: ...rvo amplifier side connector Use the connector compatible with the PANASONIC servo amplifier For details refer to the user s manual of the PANASONIC servo amplifier 43 3 2 RS 485 cable Connection diagram RS485 connection diagram 1 Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 1m or less 2 PANASONIC servo amplifier side connector Use the connector compatib...

Page 993: ...tings Make the settings according to the usage environment POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in commu...

Page 994: ...onnected to the GOT to 0 Set the station numbers axis numbers of other servo amplifiers connected to the GOT to other than 0 Example of RS 232 connection between GOT servo amplifier 1 Direct specification When setting the device specify the station number of the servo amplifier of which data is to be changed 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of ...

Page 995: ...esign Manual Fundamentals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 43 7 Precautions Station number setting in the servo system Configure the servo system so that there is a servo amplifier with a station number set with a host address For details of host address setting refer to the following 43 4 2 Communication detail settings Monitor speed When monitoring multipl...

Page 996: ...43 8 43 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 43 7 Precautions ...

Page 997: ... CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 44 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models 1 Any of the extension memory unit FP2 EM1 FP2 EM2 or FP2 EM3 is required 2 The clock function is available for the AFP3210C F AFP3211C F AFP3212C F and AFP3220C F Model Clock Communication type Refer to FP0 C16CT RS 232 44 2 1 FP0 C32CT FP0R FP1 C24C RS 232 44 2 2 FP1 ...

Page 998: ...ion cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FP0 C16CT FP0 C32CT FP0R Tool port RS 232 AFC8503 3m 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FP0 C16CT FP0 C32CT FP0R RS232C port RS 232 GT09 C30R20904 3C 3m or RS232 connection diagram 10 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3...

Page 999: ...GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model FP0 C16CT FP0 C32CT FP0R Tool port RS 232 AFC8503 3m 1 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 26 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FP0 C16CT FP0 C32CT FP0R RS232C port RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 12 6m Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable FP1 C24C FP1 C40C F...

Page 1000: ... GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number FP1 C24C FP1 C40C Tool port RS 232 AFP15205 0 5m AFP8550 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FP1 C24C FP1 C40C RS232C port RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 8 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m FP1 C24C FP1 C40C FP peripheral devi...

Page 1001: ...tact Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable FP2 FP2SH PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FP2 FP2SH Tool port RS 232 AFC8503 3m 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C...

Page 1002: ...model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model FP2 FP2SH Tool port RS 232 AFC8503 3m 1 GT11H C30 3m RS232 connection diagram 26 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FP2 FP2SH RS232C port RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 6m Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable FP2 FP2SH Computer communication unit Connector conversion box Exte...

Page 1003: ...anufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd For details of this product contact Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd Connection cable FP2 FP2SH Computer communication unit External cable GOT PLC Computer communication unit 1 Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FP2 FP2...

Page 1004: ...nection cable 1 RS422 232C conversion adapter 1 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number FP3 FP5 RS 232 AFP5520 0 5m AFP8550 GT09 C30R20901 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 RS...

Page 1005: ...eripheral device connection cable 1 RS422 232C conversion adapter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FP3 FP5 RS 232 AFP5520 0 5m AFP8550 GT11H C30 3m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 RS422 232 conversion adapter Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connector conversion box External ca...

Page 1006: ...LC Computer communication unit 1 Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FP3 RS 232 AFP3462 RS232 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 computer communicati on unit FP5 RS 232 AFP5462 RS232 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m External cable FP3 FP5 Computer communicat...

Page 1007: ...10 S FP peripheral device connection cable RS422 232C conversion adapter Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC FP peripheral device connection cable 1 RS422 232 conversion adapter 1 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram...

Page 1008: ... GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FP10 S RS 232 AFP5520 0 5m AFP8550 GT11H C30 3m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 RS422 232 conversion adapter Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable FP10 S Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box Exter...

Page 1009: ...LC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type FP10 S RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable FP10 S Computer communication unit Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Computer communication unit 1 Connection cable Connector conversion box E...

Page 1010: ...External cable GOT PLC Computer communication unit 1 External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type FP10 S RS 232 AFP3462 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 6m 1 GOT for 1 computer communication unit Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable FP M C20TC FP M C32TC Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Conn...

Page 1011: ...act Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 FP M C20TC FP M C32TC External cable GOT PLC Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FP M C20TC FP M C32TC Tool port RS 232 AFC8503 3m 1 RS232 connection diagram 25 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m...

Page 1012: ...r conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FP10SH RS 232 AFC85853 3m 1 GT09 C30R20902 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC Connection cable FP10SH External cable GOT PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of conne...

Page 1013: ...Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable FP10SH Computer communication unit Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Computer communication unit 1 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FP10SH RS 232 AFP3462 AFC85853 3m 1 GT09 C30R20902 9...

Page 1014: ...Communication driver Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT FPΣ PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FPΣ RS 232 AFC8503 3m 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT FP...

Page 1015: ...vices SUNX Co Ltd Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable COM port FPΣ Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model COM port 1 Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number FPΣ AFPG801 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 13 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P...

Page 1016: ...mmunication driver Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT FP X PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FP X RS 232 AFC8503 3m 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT FP...

Page 1017: ...nication cassette 1 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communicati on type Cable model Connection diagram number FP X RS 232 AFPX COM1 RS232C one channel type RS232 connection diagram 13 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC AFPX COM2 2 RS232C two channel type RS232 connection diagram 16 GT11H CNB 37S ...

Page 1018: ...assette FP X External cable GOT PLC Communication cassette 1 External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type FP X RS 232 AFPX COM1 RS232C one channel type GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 14 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC AFPX COM2 2 RS232C two channel type GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 17 6m RS 422 AFPX COM3 RS485 RS422 o...

Page 1019: ...TS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 2 4 7 5 6 8 20 FG RD SD RS SG CS DR CD ER External cable GT11H C 37P side PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD ER External cable GT11H C side PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 1020: ...S SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG SD RD RS CS SG External cable GT11H C side PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG SD RD RS CS SG Connector conversion box side PLC side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 S R G SD RD SG External cable GT11H C...

Page 1021: ...al ports S1 and R1 S2 and R2 constitute the serial port respectively Use one of the serial ports Connector conversion box side PLC side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RS SD RD CS SG External cable GT11H C 37P side PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SD RD RS CS SG External cable GT11H C side PLC side FG Shield SD T...

Page 1022: ...R DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SD RD SG External cable GT11H C side PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A SD RD SG External cable GT11H C 37P side PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SD RD SG External cable GT11H C 37P side PLC side FG Shield S...

Page 1023: ...2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC side connector Use the connector applicable to the PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC For details refer to the PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC user s manual 44 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 3 External cable GT11H C 37P side PLC side AFC8...

Page 1024: ...ctor For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC side connector Use the connector applicable to the PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC For details refer to...

Page 1025: ...ication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 P...

Page 1026: ...e 1 Communication settings Set the communication settings for the COM 1 port and COM2 port to connect GOT 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side Set the same transmission speed of the GOT 2 Set the COM2 port only 2 Switch setting on the Communication cassette AFPX COM3 Set the switch on the back Item Set value Transmission speed 1 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps...

Page 1027: ...S PLC 46 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 44 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 44 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 44 31 44 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubis...

Page 1028: ...44 32 44 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 44 6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 1029: ...table Model List 45 1 45 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 45 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to Large sized H Series H 302 RS 232 RS 422 45 2 1 H 702 H 1002 H 2002 H 4010 H 300 H 700 H 2000 H 200 to 252 Series H 200 RS 232 45 2 2 H 250 H 252 H 252B H 252C H series board type H 20DR RS 232 45 2 2 H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR...

Page 1030: ...ent serial port module 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number H 302 2 H 702 2 H 1002 2 H 2002 2 H 300 H 700 H 2000 RS 232 GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC H 4010 RS 232 Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 Specified transmission speed 19200bps GT09 C30R20402 ...

Page 1031: ...ion cable GOT External cable PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Intelligent serial port module 1 Communicati on type Cable model Connection diagram number H 302 2 H 702 2 H 1002 2 H 2002 2 H 300 H 700 H 2000 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC H 4010 RS 232 Specified transmission speed 4800bps RS232 c...

Page 1032: ... 702 2 H 1002 2 H 2002 2 H 300 H 700 H 2000 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC H 4010 RS 232 Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 Specified transmission speed 19200bps GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 Specified transmission speed 38400bps 3 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection...

Page 1033: ...le GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number H 200 1 H 250 1 H 252 1 H 252B 1 H 20DR H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR H 20DT H 28DT H 40DT H 64DT HL 40DR HL 64DR RS 232 GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC H 252C 1 2 RS 232 Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT09 C30...

Page 1034: ...odel Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number H 200 1 H 250 1 H 252 1 H 252B 1 H 20DR H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR H 20DT H 28DT H 40DT H 64DT HL 40DR HL 64DR RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC H 252C 1 2 RS 232 Specified transmission speed 4800bps RS232 connection diagram 2 Specified transmission speed...

Page 1035: ...ies board type EH 150 GOT External cable PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type H 200 1 H 250 1 H 252 1 H 252B 1 H 20DR H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR H 20DT H 28DT H 40DT H 64DT HL 40DR HL 64DR RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC H 252C 1 2 RS 232 Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT11H C30 3m GT11H ...

Page 1036: ...1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG External cable GT11H C side HITACHI IES PLC side NC SD RD RS CS RV1 ER RV2 DR PHL SG FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG NC SD RD RV2 DR SG CS RV1 ER RS PHL ER FG CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 7 9 5 6 4 8 14 ...

Page 1037: ...he connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 HITACHI IES PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI IES PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI IES PLC user s manual 45 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 3 RDA RDB SDA SDB R...

Page 1038: ...on Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 HITACHI IES PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI IES PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI IES PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 HITACHI IES PLC side When connecting an intelligent serial...

Page 1039: ...s of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 18 1 2 I F communication setting 45 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 HITACHI HIDIC H 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equi...

Page 1040: ...ed equipment Default 19200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment Default 7bit 7bit fixed Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications Default 1bit 1bit fixed Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed during communication Default Even Even fixed Retr...

Page 1041: ...ries with the connected PLC Connecting to the intelligent serial port module 1 For transmission control procedure1 2 For transmission control procedure2 Item Set value Transmission speed 1 2 3 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Station No 0 Data bit 7bit Stop bit 1bit Parity bit Even Control method DTR control Communication RS 232 Sum check Enable Protocol transmission control procedure 1 Item Set ...

Page 1042: ...t 45 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 ...

Page 1043: ...CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 46 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 46 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 46 1 Connectable Model List 46 1 46 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 46 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to S10V LQP510 RS 232 RS 422 46 2 1 LQP520 S10mini LQP800 RS 232 RS 422 46 2 2 LQP000 LQP010 LQP011 LQP...

Page 1044: ... diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 communicati on module LQE565 RS 422 GT09 C30R41301 9S 3m GT09 C100R41301 9S 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m LQP510 RS 422 GT09 C30R41301 9S 3m GT09 C100R41301 9S 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 G...

Page 1045: ...mmunication type LQP510 LQP520 LQE560 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 communication module LQE565 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 3 13m LQP510 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 3 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC HITACHI S10mini S10V Communication driver Communication module S10mini Connect...

Page 1046: ...nication module 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number S10mini LQE560 LQE060 LQE160 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 communication module LQE565 LQE165 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Communication module S10mini GOT External cable PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of co...

Page 1047: ...l distance between the GOT and a controller of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 HITACHI PLC side connector Use ...

Page 1048: ...wing 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 HITACHI PLC side connector Use the connector supporting the HITACHI PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI PLC user s manual Connector conversion box side SDA RDA RSA CSA SG SDB RDB RSB CSB RD H SD H ATT H SG...

Page 1049: ... settings Make the settings according to the usage environment POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in c...

Page 1050: ...of communication module 2 Avoid duplication of the channel No Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting switch 1 Settings of the channel No and the protocol Model Refer to Communication module LQE560 46 5 1 LQE060 LQE160 LQE565 LQE165 Item Set value Channel No setting 1 2 0 to 3 Protocol setting H 7338 protocol Transmission speed 19200bps fixed Data bit 8bit Fixed Parit...

Page 1051: ...TO HITACHI IES PLC 46 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 46 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 46 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 46 9 46 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 ...

Page 1052: ...46 10 46 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 46 6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 1053: ...C 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 47 1 Connectable Model List 47 1 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 47 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to MICREX F F55 RS 232 RS 485 47 2 1 F70 RS 232 RS 485 47 2 2 F120S RS 232 RS 485 47 2 3 F140S F15 S MICREX SX SPH SPH200 RS 232 RS 485 47 2 4 SPH300 SPH2000 SPH3000 ...

Page 1054: ...iver RS 232C interface card MICREX F55 Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C interface card 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number F55 NV1L RS2 RS 232 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C3...

Page 1055: ...ric Co Ltd 2 The distance from GOT to RS 232C 485 interface capsule Connection cable External cable RS 232C interface card MICREX F55 GOT External cable PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C interface card 1 Communication type F55 NV1L RS2 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 RS 232C interface card RS 232C 48...

Page 1056: ...l cable RS 232C 485 interface capsule MICREX F55 Connection cable T link GOT External cable PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C 485 interface capsule 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number F55 FFK120A C10 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 RS 232C 485 interface capsule RS 232...

Page 1057: ...face capsule RS 232C 485 interface capsule MICREX F55 T link MICREX F55 T link Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C 485 interface capsule 1 Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number F55 FFK120A C10 RS 485 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m ...

Page 1058: ...ace capsule Connection cable External cable RS 232C 485 interface capsule RS 232C 485 interface capsule MICREX F55 T link MICREX F55 T link Connection cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C 485 interface capsule 1 Communication type F55 FFK120A C10 RS 485 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS485 connection diagram 3 13m 1 GOT for...

Page 1059: ...e MICREX F70 Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model General purpose interface module 1 Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number F70 NC1L RS2 RS 232 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 G...

Page 1060: ...ection cable T link GOT Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C 485 interface capsule 1 Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number F70 FFK120A C10 RS 232 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1...

Page 1061: ... using the external cable GT11H C 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 The distance from GOT to RS 232C 485 interface capsule Connection cable External cable RS 232C 485 interface capsule MICREX F70 T link GOT External cable PLC External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C 485 interface c...

Page 1062: ...x External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C 485 interface capsule 1 Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number F70 FFK120A C10 RS 485 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m or RS485 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m...

Page 1063: ...d RS 232C 485 interface capsule MICREX F70 T link RS 232C 485 interface capsule MICREX F70 T link Connection cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C 485 interface capsule 1 Communication type F70 FFK120A C10 RS 485 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS485 connection diagram 3 13m 1 GOT for up to 6 PLCs RS 232C 485 interface capsul...

Page 1064: ...T model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model General purpose interface module 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number F70 NC1L RS4 RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for up to 31 PLCs general purpose interface modules Connection cable MICREX F70 General purpose interface module General purpose interfac...

Page 1065: ...td FUJI MICREX F Communication driver General purpose interface module MICREX F 120S 140S 15 S Connector conversion box External cable Connection cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model General purpose interface module 1 Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number F120S F140S F15 S FFU120B R...

Page 1066: ...nal cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model General purpose interface module 1 Communication type F120S F140S F15 S FFU120B RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 general purpose interface module RS 232C 485 interface capsule MICREX F 120S 140S 15 S Connection cable T link Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection ca...

Page 1067: ...oduct contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 The distance from GOT to RS 232C 485 interface capsule Connection cable External cable RS 232C 485 interface capsule MICREX F 120S 140S 15 S Connection cable T link External cable GOT PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C 485 interface capsule 1 Communicat ion type Cable model Connection dia...

Page 1068: ...S PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232C 485 interface capsule 1 Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number F120S F140S F15 S FFK120A C10 RS 485 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m or RS485 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m ...

Page 1069: ... Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 The distance from GOT to RS 232C 485 interface capsule Connection cable External cable T link RS 232C 485 interface capsule RS 232C 485 interface capsule T link Connection cable GOT MICREX F 120S 140S 15 S MICREX F 120S 140S 15 S PLC External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model RS 232...

Page 1070: ...Number of connectable equipment Model General purpose interface module 1 Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number F120S F140S F15 S FFU120B RS 485 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m or RS485 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 1 GOT for up to 31 PLCs general purpose interface modules Connection cable General purpose ...

Page 1071: ...external cable GT11H C 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd Connection cable General purpose interface module General purpose interface module GOT MICREX F 120S 140S 15 S MICREX F 120S 140S 15 S PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model General purpose interface module 1 Communication type F12...

Page 1072: ...odel Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model General purpose interface module 1 Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number MICREX SX SPH RS 232 NP4H CB2 2m 1 NW0H CNV 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 5m 1 GOT for 1 General purpose communication module NP1L RS1 NP1L RS2 NP1L RS3 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for Communication p...

Page 1073: ...neral purpose interface module 1 Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number MICREX SX SPH NP1L RS1 NP1L RS2 NP1L RS3 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for Communication port of general purpose communication module NP1L RS1 NP1L RS4 RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 6 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m NP1L RS5 RS 485 RS485 connection dia...

Page 1074: ...GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD ER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 PLC side External cable GT11H C side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD ER Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 PLC side GOT side D sub 9 pin NC RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR S...

Page 1075: ... of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less b Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box c External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable d FUJI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI PLC sid...

Page 1076: ...urn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Connector conversion box side RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG 2 7 1 6 5 3 4 8 9 PLC side 1 PLC side 1 2 2 PLC side 1 External cable GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG RDA RDB S...

Page 1077: ...rminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Make sure to pull the cable shield line into inside the connector cover and treat the line end for obtaining shield effect RS485 connection diagram 6 1 Turn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Make sure to pull the cable shield line into inside the connector cover and treat the line end f...

Page 1078: ...m 9 1 Turn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Make sure to pull the cable shield line into inside the connector cover and treat the line end for obtaining shield effect External cable GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 PLC side 1 terminal block External cable GT11H C side FG Shield SD...

Page 1079: ...and controllers of RS 485 cable must be 13m or less b Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box c External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable d FUJI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with ...

Page 1080: ...Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment For FUJI MICREX F 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 9600bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with t...

Page 1081: ...NICATION SETTING 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Item Description Range Transmission Speed 1 Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 38400bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data Bit 1 Set this item when change the data lengt...

Page 1082: ...C1L RS4 Connecting to NC1L RS4 FFU120B Connecting to FFU120B RS 232C 485 interface capsule FFK120A C10 Connecting to FFK120A C10 Item Set value MODE Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 1 8bits 7bits Parity bit 1 Even or Odd Done None Stop bit 1 1bit 2bits Initializing method By switch Character configuration switches Ope...

Page 1083: ...ng RS 485 station No switches c Connecting terminating resistors Turn ON OFF the terminating resistor using RS 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switch d Setting of Transmission speed Stop bit Data bit Parity bit Initializing method Make the settings using the character configuration switches Item Set value MODE Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format Transmission speed 1 ...

Page 1084: ...nsequence format RS 232C 1 1 and RS 485 1 N Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 485 1 N Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 1 8bits 7bits Parity bit 1 Even or Odd Done None Stop bit 1 1bit 2bits Initializing method By switch Station No 1 2 0 to 99 Terminating resistor 3 ON OFF T link channel switch FUJI PLC user s Manual T link terminating resistor MODE...

Page 1085: ...ing RS 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switch d Setting of Transmission speed Stop bit Data bit Parity bit Initializing method Make the settings using the character configuration switches Item Set value MODE Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 1 8bits 7bits Parity bit 1 Even or Odd Done None Stop bit 1 1bit 2bits Initial...

Page 1086: ...e which will be a terminal Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive a Direct specification Specify the station No of the PLC to be changed when setting device Switch Item Set value MODE switch MODE 1 to 3 1 RS485 station...

Page 1087: ... for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Use C or later version of GT11H C 37P 4 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd Ethernet FUJI Gateway Communication driver Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable Ethernet interface module MICREX SX SPH PLC Connection cable 1 Connector...

Page 1088: ... IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Ethernet Download Port No 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway 1 Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected Only for conn...

Page 1089: ...station numbers Communication detail settings 3 Make sure that the port No is equivalent to Self port reference No in the PLC 251 Setting the IP address and self port reference No POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For detail...

Page 1090: ...ddress and self port reference No Set the IP address and self port reference No using a peripheral tool of the PLC 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Ethernet setting 2 Make sure that Self port reference No 251 is equivalent to the port No in the GOT Ethernet setting Item Set value Range IP Address 1 PLC side IP address Subnet Mask PLC side setting Default Gateway IP Address Self port referen...

Page 1091: ...ntals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 47 5 Precautions Station No settings of the PLC side In the system configuration the PLC with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following Communication detail settings System configuration of the PLC side GOT can communicate in a system configu...

Page 1092: ...47 40 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 47 5 Precautions ...

Page 1093: ...tem Sacom corp For details of the product contact System Sacom corp 4 The distance from the converter to the GOT Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to Micro Controller X PXR3 RS 232 48 2 1 PXR4 PXR5 PXR9 PXG4 RS 232 48 2 2 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 FUJI PXR PXG PXH Communication driver Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 PXR9 PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 PXR9 Connector convers...

Page 1094: ... 1 Interface converter Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communicatio n type Cable model Connection diagram number PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 PXR9 RS485 connection diagram 1 500m RC 77 1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT RS485 ...

Page 1095: ...OT PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable Temperature controller Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 RS 232 ZZPPXH1 TK4H4563 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT GOT P...

Page 1096: ...ox External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Model Cable model Connection diagram number PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 RS485 connection diagram 1 500m RC 77 1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT RS485 connection diagram 4 500m K3SC 10 2 RS 23...

Page 1097: ...act SYSMEXRA CO LTD 2 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation For details on the product contact OMRON Corporation Interface converter Connection cable 1 PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max dis...

Page 1098: ...R SG DSR RTS CTS NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Interface converter side RC 77 External cable GT11H C side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG CD RXD TXD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Interface converter side RC 77 Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A Connector conversion box side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS...

Page 1099: ...FUJI temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the FUJI temperature controller Connector conversion box side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS NC FG SG RD SD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 6 5 Interface converter side K3SC 10 Connector conversion box side GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SD TX...

Page 1100: ...ing on the model Refer to the following table 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Turn ON the terminating switch of an interface converter which will be a terminal 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Signal name Model of temperature controller PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No ...

Page 1101: ...t FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 500m or less 2 FUJI temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the FUJI temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 FUJI temper...

Page 1102: ...ged on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 5 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this...

Page 1103: ...ith any of the other units 3 Set as necessary 2 RS 232 communication settings PC loader communication 48 5 3 Connecting to PXH9 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 1 RS 485 communication settings 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 2 RS 232 communication setti...

Page 1104: ... AUTO AUTO DCE DTE switching DCE RS 422 485 switching RS 485 Terminating resistor selection OFF Setting item Set value Switch No 1 2 3 4 Transmission speed 9600bps ON ON OFF 19200bps OFF OFF ON 38400bps ON OFF ON MANUAL AUTO AUTO ON Terminating resistor selection switch RS 422 485 switch RS 485 communication setting switch DCE DTE switch DCE DTE RTS DTR RESET BIT RATE MANUAL AUTO MONITOR 1 2 3 4 5...

Page 1105: ... communication settings by operating the DIP switch of the temperature controller 1 Adjust with GOT and temperature controller settings Settings by DIP switch 1 Transmission speed settings Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps Terminating resistor selection 1 ON OFF Setting item Set value Switch No 1 2 3 4 2 5 6 2 7 8 Transmission speed 9600bps ON OFF ON ON Terminating resistor selection 1 Ena...

Page 1106: ...pecification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 200 to 215 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller Setting item Set value Switch No 4 5...

Page 1107: ...erature controller with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 48 4 2 Communication detail settings FIX processing of temperature controller The temperature controller power must not be turned off during the FIX processing Otherwise data within the non volatile memory will corrupt and the temperature controller will ...

Page 1108: ...48 16 48 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 48 7 Precautions ...

Page 1109: ...CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 49 1 Connectable Model List 49 1 49 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 49 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Model Clock Communication Refer to GL120 RS 232 RS 422 49 2 1 GL130 GL60S RS 232 RS 422 49 2 2 GL60H GL70H MP920 RS 232 RS 422 49 2 3 MP930 CP 9300MS CP 9200 H PROGIC 8 MP940 RS 232 RS 422 49 2 4 CP 9200SH RS 232 49 2 5 CP 317 MP2200 R...

Page 1110: ...ance Number of connectable equipment Model MEMOBUS module 1 Communicat ion type Cable model Connection diagram number GL120 GL130 RS 232 GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC JAMSC 120NOM27100 RS 422 GT09 C30R40201 9P 3m GT09 C100R40201 9P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P ...

Page 1111: ...ternal cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model MEMOBUS module 1 Communication type GL120 GL130 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC JAMSC 120NOM27100 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 3 13m 1 GOT for 1 MEMOBUS module YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Communication driver GOT MEMOBUS Module G...

Page 1112: ...f connectable equipment Model MEMOBUS module 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number GL60S GL60H GL70H JAMSC IF60 JAMSC IF61 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 MEMOBUS module JAMSC IF612 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m GOT MEMOBUS Module GL60S GL60H GL70H External cable PLC External cable G...

Page 1113: ...nnector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communica tion module 1 Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number MP 920 MP 930 RS 232 GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CP 9200 H PROGIC 8 Connecting ...

Page 1114: ...6m CP 9300MS CP 9300MC compatible non compatible RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 8 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m MP 920 connecting to 217IF 217IF RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 communicati on module RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Communications Module MP 920 930 CP 9300MS 9200 H PROGIC 8 External cable GOT PLC Ext...

Page 1115: ...C Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number MP 940 RS 232 GT09 C30R20204 14P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 10 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS 422 GT09 C30R40202 14P 3m GT09 C100R40202 14P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C...

Page 1116: ... C GOT MP 940 External cable PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type MP 940 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 12 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 9 13m ...

Page 1117: ...cations Module CP 9200SH CP 317 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication module 1 Communica tion type Cable model Connection diagram number CP 9200SH CP 317 CP 217IF CN1 connection RS 232 GT09 C30R20203 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 16 GT11H ...

Page 1118: ...ation GOT Communications Module CP 9200SH CP 317 External cable PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication module 1 Communication type CP 9200SH CP 317 CP 217IF CN1 connection RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 communication module CP 217IF CN2 connection RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection d...

Page 1119: ...n speed selectable in the GOT is 57600bps YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Communication driver Communications Module MP2200 MP2300 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication module 1 Communica tion type Cable model Connection diagram number MP2...

Page 1120: ...0bps the maximum transmission speed selectable in the GOT is 57600bps Communications Module MP2200 MP2300 External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication module 1 Communication type MP2200 MP2300 MP2300S 217IF 01 218IF 01 218IF 02 2 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 communication module 217I...

Page 1121: ...RXD DSR GND DTR RTS CTS EST External cable GT11H C 37P side YASKAWA PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR GND EST DTR External cable GT11H C side YASKAWA PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR GND EST DTR Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A ...

Page 1122: ...ternal cable GT11H C side YASKAWA PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG TXD RXD RTS OP CTS DSR GND PWR DTR Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A Connector conversion box side YASKAWA PLC side NC RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 12 14 2 6 Clamped by hood TXD RXD RTS GND CTS External cable ...

Page 1123: ...H C 37P side YASKAWA PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 FG TXD RXD RS CS DSR SG CD DTR External cable GT11H C side YASKAWA PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 FG TXD RXD RS CS DSR SG CD DTR Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A GOT side YASKAWA PLC side ...

Page 1124: ...e For details refer to the user s manuals for YASKAWA PLC RS 422 cable 1 Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 3 Connector conversion box side RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 2 9 3 6 1 4 8 7 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 SDA SDB RDA RDB PGND SG YASKAWA PLC side Receiving side termination Receiving side termination External cable GT11H C 37P sid...

Page 1125: ... 5 4 8 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 TX TX RX RX TXR RXR SG YASKAWA PLC side 1 1 External cable GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG 2 1 3 4 7 6 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YASKAWA PLC side RV RX NC RXR TX TX TXR SG 1 1 External cable GT11H C side FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG 2 1 3 4 7 6 5 8 Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A YASKAWA PLC s...

Page 1126: ... PLC side Receiving side termination Sending side termination Connector conversion box side RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 10 11 12 13 9 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 YASKAWA PLC side TX TX RX RX RX RXR TX GND RX TXR VCC TX 1 1 External cable GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG 6 3 4 7 5 1 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YASKAWA PLC side RX RX RX R...

Page 1127: ...g terminating resistors a YASKAWA PLC side When connecting a YASKAWA PLC to a GOT connect a terminating resistor to the YASKAWA PLC if required YASKAWA PLC user s Manual 49 2 8 GOT side settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the ch...

Page 1128: ...ription Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 19200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment Default 8bit 8bit fixed Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications Default 1bit 1bit fixed...

Page 1129: ...03 0003 NL 2 0002 0002 NL 2 0001 0001 NL 2 0000 0000 NL 1 IF SB000001 true One scan at startup Source Dest Source Dest Source Dest Source Dest Source Dest Source Dest 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 32767 DW00008 DW00009 DW00010 DW00011 DW00012 DW00013 STORE STORE STORE STORE STORE STORE 0009 0009 NL 2 0008 0008 NL 2 0007 0007 NL 2 Source Dest Source Dest Source Dest 00000 00000 00000 DW00014 DW0002...

Page 1130: ...ete or abnormal completion coil Error turns on at the completion of processing Receive message abort coil Communication device type Dev Typ 5 217IF Communication protocols Pro Typ 1 MEMOBUS Line number Cir No 1 For 217IF any of 1 to 16 set in 2 Transmission buffer channel number Ch No 1 Always 1 for 217IF Checking the normal completion Does the normal completion coil turn on Checking the abnormal ...

Page 1131: ...es For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 4 Use C or later version of GT11H C 37P Communications Module MP920 MP2200 MP2300 CP 9200SH CP 312 CP 317 Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable Ethernet YASKAWA Gateway Communication driver PLC Connecti...

Page 1132: ... 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 64 GOT IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Defa...

Page 1133: ...ddress and the Node Port Remote Station s Port Number as the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side For the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side refer to the following 49 3 2 Ethernet setting Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk N W No Set the network No of th...

Page 1134: ... Range of 218IF 02 1 to 20 Local Port 10500 256 to 65534 Node IP Address 1 GOT side IP address Node Port 1 GOT side port No Connection Type UDP recommended UDP TCP Protocol Type Extended MEMOBUS Extended MEMOBUS MEMOBUS MELSEC None MODBUS TCP Code BIN RTU BIN ACII Node Name Remote Station s Name Arbitrary Up to 32 one byte characters 16 two byte characters SW2 N O 10 100 F H INIT TEST ON OFF Displ...

Page 1135: ...are required Ladder program to receive messages Continued to next page Sets parameters in the first scan after startup Low speed scan DWGL SB000003 High speed scan DWGH SB000001 STORE STORE STORE STORE STORE STORE END_FOR 0009 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest DW00012 Write range LO 3 2 2 2 1 2 0008 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest DW00011 Sets the holding register offset 0007 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest DW00010 Sets the i...

Page 1136: ...534 Dest DW00013 Increments the normal pass counter Dest DW00024 0013 0013 NL 2 0014 0014 NL 1 0015 0015 NL 1 0016 0017 NL 1 0017 0018 NL 1 0018 0019 NL 2 0019 0020 NL 2 0020 0021 NL 1 0012 0012 NL 2 0011 0011 NL 2 0010 NL 2 DB000211 true MSG RCV Execute SB000004 Abort DB000400 Dev Typ 00006 Busy DB000210 Complete DB000211 Error DB000212 Pro Typ 00001 Cir No 00001 Ch No 00002 Param DA00000 END_IF ...

Page 1137: ...ange for the holding registers 4 When connecting to multiple GOTs set channel numbers individually for each GOT 5 Set the Dev Typ of the message receive function MSG RCV to 00016 for the built in MP2300S Ethernet connection or the Ethernet port connection of 218IF 02 STORE STORE STORE STORE END_IF END Stores the data size Stores the remote CPU Stored the data address Source DW00007 Dest DW00032 St...

Page 1138: ...t the values above for the address so that the GOT communicates with the programmable controller correctly For the Host Address setting on the GOT side refer to the following 49 3 2 Ethernet setting Item Set value Module Type CP 218 CPU Number 01 Circuit Number 01 Hot Swapping Item CNO 03 CNO 04 CNO 05 Local Port 10500 10501 10030 Node IP Address 1 192 168 001 018 192 168 001 020 192 168 001 073 N...

Page 1139: ...with the GOT1000 series the ladder program to receive messages is required When connecting the CP 9200SH CP 312 or CP 317 series with multiple GOTs ladder programs to receive messages for each GOT are required Ladder program to receive messages Continued to next page FSCAN L ONCOIL 1 0000 SB000003 SB000004 1 0002 IFON 2 0003 FOR I 00000 to 00031 by 00001 3 0007 00000 DW00000 001 044 2 0009 FEND DW...

Page 1140: ...tandard system functions ONCOIL EXECUTE BUSY DB 210 1 0024 SB000004 FIN FOUT DB000210 009 ONCOIL ABORT COMPLETE DB 211 1 0026 SB000004 FIN FOUT DB000211 010 039 DEV TYP ERROR DB 212 1 0028 00006 FIN FOUT DB000212 011 041 PRO TYP 1 0029 00001 FIN CIR NO 1 0030 00001 FIN CH NO 1 0031 00003 FIN PARAM 1 0032 DA00000 DB 211 1 0039 DB000211 036 DW 024 1 0040 INC DW00024 DB 212 1 0041 DB000212 038 1 0042...

Page 1141: ...en setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the system The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the ...

Page 1142: ...49 34 49 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 49 4 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 1143: ... 50 1 50 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 50 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to FA M3 F3SP05 RS 232 RS 422 50 2 1 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP22 0S F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 FA M3V F3SP76 7S F3SP71 4S FA500 FA500 RS 232 RS 422 50 2 2 STARDOM NFCP100 RS 232 50 2 3 N...

Page 1144: ...port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable or the SIO port adapter cable Communication driver YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM GOT Conversion cable FA M3 M3V Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Conversion cable 1 Communica tion type Cable model Connection diagram numb...

Page 1145: ...uct contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2 CPU port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable 3 SIO port adapter cable 4 Including the length of the CPU port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable or the SIO port adapter cable GOT Conversion cable FA M3 M3V Connection cable External cable PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Conversion cable 1 Communication ...

Page 1146: ...PC link module 1 Communica tion type Cable model Connection diagram number F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F RS 232 GT09 C30R20302 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PC link module F3SP76 7S F3SP71 4S F3LC12 1F F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP20 F3S...

Page 1147: ...rporation GOT PC link module FA M3 M3V Connection cable External cable PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model PC link module 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F RS 2...

Page 1148: ...ctable equipment Model PC link module 1 Communication type F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 6m 1 GOT for 1 PC link module F3SP76 7S F3LC12 1F F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3...

Page 1149: ...dule Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable FA500 PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series PC link module 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FA500 LC01 0N LC02 0N RS 232 GT09 C30R20205 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PC lin...

Page 1150: ...able equipment Series PC link module 1 Communication type FA500 LC01 0N LC02 0N RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 9 6m 1 GOT for 1 PC link module LC02 0N RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 6 13m Communication driver YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM STARDOM GOT Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable 1 C...

Page 1151: ...7P 1 Connect the connection cable to the COM port of the PLC 3 When using the external cable GT11H C STARDOM GOT Connection cable External cable PLC Connection cable 1 External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number STARDOM RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC STARDOM GOT Extern...

Page 1152: ...DSR RS RTS CS CTS SD RD SG External cable GT11H C 37P side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YOKOGAWA PLC side 2 3 5 SHIELD FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG RD SD SG External cable GT11H C side YOKOGAWA PLC side 2 3 5 SHIELD FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG RD SD SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A Connector conversion box side 1 2 ...

Page 1153: ...er to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box c External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable d YOKOGAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA PLC side module For details refer to the YOKOGAWA PLC user s manual Connector conversion box side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 YOKOGAWA PLC...

Page 1154: ...DA RDB CSA CSB SG RDB RDA SDB SDA SG SHIELD External cable GT11H C side YOKOGAWA PLC side FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG RDB RDA SDB SDA SG SHIELD Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A Connector conversion box side 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 YOKOGAWA PLC side RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG SDB SDA RDB RDA SG FG R R External cable GT11H C 37P side 1 2 3 4 5...

Page 1155: ...ing 6 6 Connector Conversion Box c External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable d YOKOGAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA PLC side module For details refer to the YOKOGAWA PLC user s manual 3 Connecting terminating resistors a YOKOGAWA PLC side When connecting a PLC...

Page 1156: ...tting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission sp...

Page 1157: ...C12 1F LC01 0N 50 2 10 LC02 0N STARDOM 50 2 11 Item Set value Communication mode 1 Set the communication mode of the CPU transmission speed and data format Set the transmission speed and data format according to settings of the transmission speed data length parity and stop bit on the GOT side Item Transmission speed and data format Transmis sion speed Data Bit Parity Stop Bit Communication mode 0...

Page 1158: ... Turn off all the unused switches Setting 1 Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 6 19200bps STATION NO TERMINATOR 2 SD A OFF 4 WIRE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SD B RD A SD B SG SHIELD 3 A 1 With right side cover removed Side view indicated by A 2 4 A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 O F F F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 2N F3LC11 2F For the F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 2N 1 With right s...

Page 1159: ...e transmission speed of the GOT 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 2 Data format switch SW2 Set the character length parity stop bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side 3 Module function switch SW3 Setting 1 Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 7 19200bps 9 38400bps A 57600bps C 115200bps A 1 With right side cover removed Side view ...

Page 1160: ...mat setting switch Set the data length parity stop bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side 3 Station No switch LC02 0N only Setting 1 Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 6 19200bps Switch No Description Setting 1 Data bit ON 8bits OFF 7bits 2 Parity ON done OFF none 3 ON even OFF odd 4 Stop bit ON 2bits OFF 1bit 5 Checksum ON done OFF none 6 End character spe...

Page 1161: ...he settings as default if not listed on the communication setting items Communication setting items in the table shows the names on the FCX Maintenance Page 1 Adjust the settings with GOT communication settings 50 2 5 Communication detail settings 4 Select Reboot Online Mode on the Reboot screen of the FCX Maintenance Page to set the online mode Defining Logic POU Define Logic POU using Logic Desi...

Page 1162: ...oading the project 1 Execute Build Make Same as when pressing the function key F9 2 Download after confirming that the compile error does not occur Select Download in the project control dialog displayed when Online Project control is selected 3 When the download is completed start STARDOM 50 2 12 Precautions Device range When performing monitoring with the GOT connected to a YOKOGAWA PLC and sett...

Page 1163: ...de connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 Use C or later version of GT11H C 37P PC link FA M3 module FA M3 M3V Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable Ethernet YOKOGAW...

Page 1164: ...cription Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 64 GOT IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 1165: ...WA PLC For details of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manuals YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual 50 3 4 Connecting to Ethernet interface module F3LE01 5T F3LE11 0T Switch settings of Ethernet Interface Module Set the switches accordingly POINT POINT POINT Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet interface module on the base unit 1 IP address switch Set the IP address with eight He...

Page 1166: ...t Hex rotary switches on the side of the base unit 2 Condition setting switch Set the data format write protection or operation mode with the DIP switch on the side of the base unit l Switch No Description Set value 1 Data code OFF ASCII 2 Write protect OFF not protect 3 Reserved ON not available OFF always 4 5 6 7 Line processing on TCP timeout 1 OFF close the line 8 Operation mode OFF normal ope...

Page 1167: ...twork before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting PLC No When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each PLC No to the GOT 50 3 2 Ethernet setting 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 0 18 when using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When connecting to the multiple n...

Page 1168: ...50 4 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 ...

Page 1169: ...ROLLER 51 1 Connectable Model List 51 1 51 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 51 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to GREEN UT320 RS 232 RS 485 51 2 1 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT420 UT450 UT520 UT550 UT551 UT750 UP350 UP351 UP550 UP750 UM330 UM331 UM350 UM351 US1000 UT100 UT130 RS 232 51 2 2 UT150 UT152 UT155 U...

Page 1170: ...ries GREEN Series Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 Converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communica tion type Cable model Connection diagram n...

Page 1171: ...The distance from the GOT to the interface converter Connection cable 2 External cable RS232C RS485 converter GREEN Series GREEN Series Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 Converter 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max...

Page 1172: ...s GREEN Series Connection cable 1 External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 Converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communication type UT320 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT420 UT450 UT520 UT550 UT551 UT750 2 UP350 UP351 UP550 UP750 2 UM330 UM331 UM350 UM351 US1000 RS485...

Page 1173: ...on cable to the standard RS 485 communication interface Connection cable GOT GREEN Series GREEN Series Connector conversion box External cable Temperature controller Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number UT320 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT420 UT450 UT520 UT550 UT551 UT7...

Page 1174: ...xternal cable Temperature controller Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number UT320 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT420 UT450 UT520 UT550 UT551 UT750 1 UP350 UP351 UP550 UP750 1 UM330 UM331 UM350 UM351 US100 RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 3 4 wire type GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37...

Page 1175: ... System Configuration 51 7 3 When using the external cable GT11H C 1 Connect the connection cable to the standard RS 485 communication interface Connection cable GOT GREEN Series GREEN Series Temperature controller External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type UT320 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT420 UT450 UT520 UT550 UT551 UT750 1 UP350 UP351 UP550 UP750 1 ...

Page 1176: ...able GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number UT100 RS485 connection diagram 6 1200m ML2 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CN...

Page 1177: ... Yokogawa Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2 The distance from the GOT to the interface converter Connection cable 2 External cable RS232C RS485 converter UT100 Series UT100 Series Connection cable 1 External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectab...

Page 1178: ...ernal cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 Converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communica tion type Cable model Connection diagram number UT2000 RS485 connection diagram 7 1200m ML2 RS 232 GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m or RS...

Page 1179: ...s UT2000 Series Connection cable 1 External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 Converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communication type UT2000 RS485 connection diagram 7 1200m ML2 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m Up to 16 temper...

Page 1180: ...ble equipment Series Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number UT2000 RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 9 4 wire type GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 10 temperature controllers for 1 GOT UT2000 Series UT2000 Series External cable GOT Temperature controller External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communication type U...

Page 1181: ... optional suffix code LP 5 The distance from the GOT to the interface converter Connection cable 2 External cable YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Communication driver RS232C RS485 converter UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 Converter 1 Connection cable 2...

Page 1182: ...ble RS232C RS485 converter UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 Converter 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 5 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communicati on type Cable model Connection diagram number...

Page 1183: ...l suffix code is C4 4 When the suffix code is 1 in type 2 with the optional suffix code LP 5 The distance from the GOT to the interface converter Connection cable 2 External cable RS232C RS485 converter UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series Connection cable 1 External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 Converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 5 Number of conn...

Page 1184: ...le equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number UT32A UT35A UT55A UT75A UP35A UP55A UM33A 1 RS 485 GT09 C30R40303 6T 3m GT09 C100R40303 6T 10m or RS485 connection diagram 2 4 wire type GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 10 temperature controllers for 1 GOT UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series Connection cable GOT External cable T...

Page 1185: ...OKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 51 2 System Configuration 51 17 3 When using the external cable GT11H C 1 When the suffix code is 1 in type 2 without the optional suffix code LP UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series GOT External cable Temperature controller External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type UT32A UT35A UT55A UT75A UP35A UP55A UM33A 1 RS 4...

Page 1186: ...tor Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 YOKOGAWA temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the YOKOGAWA temperature controller Connector conversion box side CD ...

Page 1187: ...ovided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 4 When the suffix code is 1 in type 3 except 1 or 6 in type 2 5 When the suffix code is 1 or 2 in type 2 without the optional suffix code LP 6 For standard when the suffix code is 1 in type 3 except 3 in type 2 for detail when the optional suffix code is CH3 7 For stan...

Page 1188: ... code LP 6 For standard when the suffix code is 1 in type 3 except 3 in type 2 for detail when the optional suffix code is CH3 7 For standard when the suffix code is 2 in type 2 for detail when the optional suffix code is CH4 Signal name Model of temperature controller GREEN Series UTAdvanced series UT UP UM US UT32A UP35A UM33A UT35A UT55A 4 UP55A 6 UT55A 5 UP55A 7 UT75A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin ...

Page 1189: ...suffix code is CH4 RS485 connection diagram 6 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Turn on the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Signal name Model o...

Page 1190: ...esistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line TX TX RX RX SG 3 4 2 1 5 6 6 4 3 5 2 6 4 3 5 2 TX TX RX RX SG RDA RDB SDB SDA SG GND Temperature controller Temperature controller RS23C RS485 interface converter 2 Terminating resistor 220Ω 1 4W 1 3 3 Temperature controller RX RX TX TX SG 1 6 2 7 5...

Page 1191: ...the GOT The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 485 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 YOKOGAWA temperatur...

Page 1192: ...ity refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 9600bps 4800bps 96...

Page 1193: ...ing setting switches 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units Settings by switch 1 Settings of the transmission speed and the parity Make those settings by operating the communication setting Rotary switch Name Series name model name Refer to Temperature controller GREEN 51 5 1 UT100 51 5 2 UT2000 51 5 3 UTAdvanced 51 5 4 Interface c...

Page 1194: ...g the communication setting DIP SW 2 A setting of the transmission speed Make this setting by operating the timer change over time Rotary switch Switch position Communication mode ON PC link communication mode Switch position Station No 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 A 11 B 12 C 13 D 14 E 15 F 16 Item Set value Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data bit 1 7bits 8bits Parity ...

Page 1195: ... to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller 3 All station specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation For write in operation all station will be a target In the WORD BIT write in operation only the temperature controller whose station No is the same as host address is applicable 51 4 2 Commu...

Page 1196: ...ation number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 51 4 2 Communication detail settings GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock function will be disabled Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT i...

Page 1197: ...ONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 52 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Continued to next page Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to DMC DMC10 RS 232 52 2 1 DMC50 RS 485 52 2 2 SDC SDC15 RS 232 52 2 3 SDC25 SDC26 SDC35 SDC36 SDC20 RS 232 RS 485 52 2 4 SDC21 SDC30 RS 232 RS 485 52 2 5 SDC31 SDC40A RS 232 RS 485 52 2 6 SDC40B SDC40G SDC45 RS 232 52 ...

Page 1198: ...ctable Model List Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to NX NX D15 RS 232 RS 485 MODBUS 52 2 10 NX D25 NX D35 NX DX1 NX DX2 NX DY NX S01 NX S11 NX S12 NX S21 NX D15 Ethernet MODBUS 52 2 10 NX D25 NX D35 NX DX1 NX DX2 NX DY NX S01 NX S11 NX S12 NX S21 ...

Page 1199: ...munication driver Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable Interface converter DMC10 DMC10 GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communicati on type Cab...

Page 1200: ...nal cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communication type DMC10 RS485 connection diagram 1 500m CMC10L RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m Up to 15 temperature controllers for 1 GOT AZBIL SDC DMC Communication driver Connection cable COM module Temperature controller COM module T...

Page 1201: ...T to the interface converter Connection cable External cable Connection cable COM module Temperature controller COM module Temperature controller External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable COM module 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Model Communicat ion type DMC50C X RS485 connection diagram 7 DM...

Page 1202: ...le 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communica tion type Cable model Connection diagram number SDC15 SDC25 26 SDC35 36 RS485 connection diagram 1 500m CMC10L RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m Up ...

Page 1203: ...poration For details on the product contact Azbil Corporation 2 The distance from the GOT to the interface converter Connection cable 2 External cable Connection cable 1 External cable Interface converter SDC15 SDC25 26 SDC35 36 SDC15 SDC25 26 SDC35 36 GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model...

Page 1204: ...ntroller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communicat ion type Cable model Connection diagram number SDC20 21 RS485 connection diagram 2 500m CMC10L RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3...

Page 1205: ...ion cable 1 Interface converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communica tion type SDC20 21 RS485 connection diagram 2 500m CMC10L RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT SDC20 21 Connection cable Connector conversion box Exte...

Page 1206: ...tor conversion box External cable Temperature controller Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number SDC20 21 RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 3 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 10 temperature controllers for 1 GOT SDC20 21 ...

Page 1207: ...ON TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 55 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 52 CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 52 2 System Configuration 52 11 3 When using the external cable GT11H C SDC20 21 SDC20 21 Connection cable GOT Temperature controller External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type SDC20 21 RS 485 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS485 connection diagra...

Page 1208: ...ontroller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communicat ion type Cable model Connection diagram number SDC30 31 RS485 connection diagram 2 500m CMC10L RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P ...

Page 1209: ...ance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communication type SDC30 31 RS485 connection diagram 2 500m CMC10L RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT SDC30 31 SDC30 31 Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable Temperature controller Connection cable Connec...

Page 1210: ...able GT11H C SDC30 31 SDC30 31 Connection cable GOT Temperature controller External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type SDC30 31 RS 485 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS485 connection diagram 5 13m Up to 10 temperature controllers for 1 GOT ...

Page 1211: ...Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable Interface converter SDC40A 40B 40G SDC40A 40B 40G GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communicat ion type Cab...

Page 1212: ...istance Model Communic ation type SDC40A 40B 40G RS485 connection diagram 2 500m CMC10L RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT Connector conversion box External cable GOT SDC40A 40B 40G Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equ...

Page 1213: ...nnection diagram 3 6m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT External cable GOT SDC40A 40B 40G SDC40A 40B 40G SDC40A 40B 40G Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number SDC40A 40B 40G RS...

Page 1214: ...1H C SDC40A 40B 40G SDC40A 40B 40G External cable GOT Temperature controller External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type SDC40A 40B 40G RS 485 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS485 connection diagram 5 13m Up to 10 temperature controllers for 1 GOT ...

Page 1215: ...onnection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable Interface converter Control equipment Control equipment GOT Control equipment Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communicat ion type Cab...

Page 1216: ...ernal cable Connection cable 1 External cable Interface converter Control equipment Control equipment GOT Control equipment Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communic ation type SDC45 46 CMS MQV MPC MVF RX RS485 connection diagram 2 500m CMC10L RS 232 GT11...

Page 1217: ... cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable Interface converter Control equipment Control equipment GOT Control equipment Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communica tion type Cable model ...

Page 1218: ...of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communic ation type CMF050 CML PBC201 VN2 AUR350C AUR450C CMC10B RS485 connection diagram 2 500m CMC10L RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m Up to 31 control equipment for 1 GOT GOT Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable Control equipment Control equipment Control equ...

Page 1219: ...uipment Control equipment Control equipment Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number CMF050 CML PBC201 VN2 AUR350C AUR450C CMC10B RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 4 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 10 control equipment for 1 GOT GOT Connection cable Control eq...

Page 1220: ...2001 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m Up to 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT SCU module RS 232 SCU module RS 422 RS485 connection diagram 3 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Connection cable External cable GOT AHC 2001 communication unit Temperature controller Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT mode...

Page 1221: ...tance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication module Communication type AHC2001 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 6m Up to 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT SCU module RS 232 SCU module RS 422 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m RS485 connection diagram 5 13m Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable AHC 2001 communication ...

Page 1222: ...ion module Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number AHC2001 SCU module RS 422 RS485 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 31 temperature controller for 1 GOT Connection cable GOT AHC 2001 communication unit AHC 2001 communication unit Temperature controller External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equi...

Page 1223: ...2 10 Connecting to NX series Use a MODBUS R RTU or MODBUS R TCP communication driver to connect the GOT to NX series For the MODBUS R RTU or MODBUS R TCP connection refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION For the valid devices refer to the following Technical News List...

Page 1224: ...ng table The numbers in of the following table correspond to optional function models Connector conversion box side Interface converter CMC10L 1 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS NC FG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 3 2 7 5 CS SD RD RS SG External cable GT11H C 37P side Interface converter CMC10L FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 2 5 9 8 SD RD SG CS R...

Page 1225: ...onnector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 AZBIL control equipment side connector Use the connector compatible with the AZBIL control equipment side module For details refer to the user s manual of the AZ...

Page 1226: ...converter has a built in terminating resistor set the terminating resistor of GOT to Enable For details of terminating resistor settings refer to the following 52 5 5 Connecting to CMC10L Signal name Model of control equipment DMC10 SDC15 SDC25 26 SDC35 36 AUR350C AUR450C Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No DA 4 16 22 DA DB 5 17 23 DB SG 6 18 24 SG Control equipment side Control equipment side Interface c...

Page 1227: ...control equipment which will be a terminal 3 Connect FG grounding to the single sided end of a cable shield line Signal name Model of control equipment SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A 40B 40G 02 04 09 03 06 08 040 041 045 446 546 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59 RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60 SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57 SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58 SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61 FG...

Page 1228: ... SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A 40B 40G 02 04 09 03 06 08 040 041 045 446 546 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59 RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60 SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57 SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58 SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61 FG 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 External cable GT11H C 37P side Control equipment side Control equipment side SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB FG RDA RDB ...

Page 1229: ...ll be a terminal 3 Connect FG grounding to the single sided end of a cable shield line Signal name Model of control equipment SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A 40B 40G 02 04 09 03 06 08 040 041 045 446 546 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59 RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60 SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57 SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58 SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61 FG 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3...

Page 1230: ...troller side RS 485 terminal port 1 Temperature controller side RS 485 terminal port 1 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB RDA1 RDB1 SDA1 SDB1 SG1 1 6 2 7 5 3 4 8 9 6 7 4 5 8 6 7 4 5 8 2 2 RDA1 RDB1 SDA1 SDB1 SG1 Terminating resistor 150Ω 1 2W 1 Connector conversion box side SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB FG RDA1 RDB1 SDA1 SDB1 SG1 2 3 6 7 10 4 8 5 9 1 6 7 4 5 8 6 7 4 5 8 2 2 RDA1 RDB1 SDA1 SDB...

Page 1231: ...ication converter The length of the RS 485 cable must be 500m or less b The length of the RS 485 cable used for connecting the connected equipment to the GOT The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 485 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable ...

Page 1232: ...etting differ depending on the system configuration When connecting to the temperature controller via COM module Specify the station No of the COM module When connecting to the temperature controller directly Specify the station No of the temperature controller 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the ...

Page 1233: ...ment refer to the following manual User s Manual of the AZBIL control equipment 2 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 3 Precedence in co...

Page 1234: ...the key or Smart Loader Package SLP C35 of the temperature controller 1 Set the same transmission speed as that of the GOT side 2 Set to CPL 3 Do not set to 0 4 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units Model Refer to Control equipment DMC10 52 5 1 DMC50 52 5 6 SDC15 SDC25 26 SDC35 36 52 5 3 SDC20 21 52 5 4 SDC30 31 52 5 4 SDC40A 40B 40G 52 5 2 SDC45 46 52 5 7 CMS CMF...

Page 1235: ...rol equipment 1 Set the same transmission speed as that of the GOT side 2 The sum of data length parity bit and stop bit Settings by switch 1 Setting DIP switches a Transmission speed settings b Frame length settings c Connecting terminating resistors 2 Mode selector switch settings Set the switch to TERMINAL Item Set value Transmission speed 1 9600bps Data bit 8bits Parity bit Disable Stop bit 2b...

Page 1236: ... by operating the key of the control equipment 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Do not set to 0 3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units 52 5 10 Connecting to MQV Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the control equipment 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Do not set to 0 3 Select the station address without...

Page 1237: ... 2 Do not set to 0 3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units Settings by switch 1 Transmission speed settings Set the communication condition switch 2 Communication condition selection Set the communication condition switch 3 Station address setting Set the station address switch Item Set value Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication condition s...

Page 1238: ...Loader Package SLP CM1 of the control equipment 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Do not set to 0 3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units Station address setting Set the station address switch Item Set value Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps Communication condition selection 1 8 bit data length Even parity Stop bit 1 8 bit data length Non parity Stop b...

Page 1239: ... 15 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the control equipment of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No shown in the table below on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the control equipment 1 Altho...

Page 1240: ...ol Since the control equipment does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system For deta...

Page 1241: ...ication type and communication protocol MODBUS For the detailed model names of RKC temperature controllers refer to the following catalog Catalog of RKC temperature controllers Series Model name 1 Clock Communication type Refer to SR Mini HG H PCP J RS 232 RS 422 53 2 1 H PCP A RS 232 RS 422 53 2 2 H PCP B SRZ Z TIO RS 232 RS 422 53 2 3 Z DIO Z CT CB CB100 RS 232 53 2 4 CB400 CB500 CB700 CB900 FB ...

Page 1242: ...GOT Temperature controller Connection cable Conversion connector 1 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communica tion type Cable model Connection diagram number Model H PCP J RS 232 W BF 28 0500 0 5m 1 W BF 28 1000 1m 1 W BF 28 3000 3m 1 or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 temperature controller for 1 ...

Page 1243: ...sion connector 1 External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number Model H PCP J RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT W BF 02 0500 0 5m 1 W BF 02 1000 1m 1 W BF 02 3000 3m 1 FAX067 1 GT11H C30 37P 3m RS232 connection diagram 13 6m RS 422 RS422 connection diagram ...

Page 1244: ...able 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 1 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number H PCP J RS 422 W BF 02 0500 0 5m 2 W BF 02 1000 1m 2 W BF 02 3000 3m 2 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 10 temperature con...

Page 1245: ...istance from the GOT to the temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable 2 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC Connection cable 1 External cable GOT H PCP J COM PORT1 COM PORT1 COM PORT2 H PCP J Temperature controller Connection cable 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 1 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Ca...

Page 1246: ...CP A H PCP B RS 232 W BF 28 0500 0 5m 1 W BF 28 1000 1m 1 W BF 28 3000 3m 1 or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT W BF 02 0500 0 5m 1 W BF 02 1000 1m 1 W BF 02 3000 3m 1 FAX067 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m H PCP A H PCP B Modular...

Page 1247: ... Conversion connector 1 External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type H PCP A H PCP B RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT FAX067 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 14 6m RS 422 GT16H C30 3m GT16H C60 6m GT16H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 3 13m Connection cable 2 Con...

Page 1248: ...e 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number H PCP A H PCP B RS 422 W BF 02 0500 0 5m 1 W BF 02 1000 1m 1 W BF 02 3000 3m 1 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 10 temperature controllers for 1...

Page 1249: ...ction cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable Interface converter SRZ SRZ GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connectiondiagram number Max distance Model Communica tion type Cable model Connectiondiagram number SRZ RS485 conn...

Page 1250: ...cation type SRZ RS485connection diagram 1 1200m CD485 V 1 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 9 6m Z TIO Up to 16 Z DIO Up to 16 Z CT Up to 16 Total of Z TIO Z CT and Z DIO Up to 31 for 1 GOT COM COM Terminating resistor GOT Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Z COM Z TIO Z DIO Z CT Z COM Z TIO Z DIO Z CT Connector conversion box External cable Z COM Con...

Page 1251: ...r 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Terminating resistor 1 Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Commun ication type Cable model Connection diagram number Z COM W BW 02 W BF 02 0500 0 5m W BF 02 1000 1m W BF 02 3000 3m 1 or RS422connection diagram 4 1200m COM A RS 232 RS232connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m...

Page 1252: ...on type Terminating resistor 1 Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number Z COM RS 422 W BW 02 W BF 02 0500 0 5m W BF 02 1000 1m W BF 02 3000 3m 1 or RS422 connection diagram 4 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 10 Z COMs for 1 GOT Z TIO Up to 16 Z DIO Up to 16 Z CT Up to 16 Total of Z TIO Z CT an...

Page 1253: ...T model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Communic ation type Terminating resistor 1 Cable model Connection diagram number Z COM RS 422 W BW 02 W BF 02 0500 0 5m W BF 02 1000 1m W BF 02 3000 3m 1 or RS422 connection diagram 4 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 3 13m Up to 10 Z COMs for 1 GOT Z TIO Up to 16 Z DIO Up to 16 Z CT Up to 16 Total of Z ...

Page 1254: ...r Connection cable 1 Interface converter Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number CB RS485 connection diagram 1 1200m CD485 V 1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 8 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT C...

Page 1255: ... 1 Connection cable 2 Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Communicat ion type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number FB400 FB900 RS 232 1 RS232 connection diagram 10 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 temperature controller for 1 GO...

Page 1256: ...Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FB400 FB900 RS 232 1 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 3m RS232 connection diagram 12 6m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT RS 422 1 RS422 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 8 13m Up to 10 temperature controllers for 1 GOT Connector conversion box External cable GOT Connection cable 1 FB series ...

Page 1257: ...ection cable 3 External cable External cable GOT Connection cable 1 FB series FB series Connection cable 2 Connection cable 3 Interface converter Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Max distance 3 Interface converter 2 Connection cable 3 External cable GOT model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connect...

Page 1258: ...n cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communica tion type Cable model Connection diagram number FB100 FB400 FB900 RS485 connection diagram 1 1200m CD485 V RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m Up...

Page 1259: ...verter Connection cable 1 FB series FB series External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communication type FB100 FB400 FB900 RS485 connection diagram 1 1200m CD485 V RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagra...

Page 1260: ...face converter 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number RB100 RB400 RB500 RB700 RB900 RS485 connection diagram 1 1200m CD485 V RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 8 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT I...

Page 1261: ...ntroller Temperature controller Connector conversion box External cable GOT Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 1 Number of connectable equipment Model Communicat ion type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number PF900 901 HA400 401 HA90...

Page 1262: ... 1 GOT PF900 901 HA400 401 HA900 901 MA900 901 AG500 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 5 RS422 connection diagram 7 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 10 temperature controllers for 1 GOT THV A1 RS 422 W BF 02 0500 0 5m W BF 02 1000 1m W BF 02 3000 3m 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 10 temperature controllers for...

Page 1263: ... Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number Model Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number PF900 901 HA400 401 HA900 901 RMC500 THV A1 SA100 200 RS485 connection diagram 1 1200m CD485 V RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT THV A1 W BF 02 ...

Page 1264: ...ion cable 1 Connection cable 2 Max distance Interface converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number Model Communi cation type PF900 901 HA400 401 HA900 901 RMC500 THV A1 SA100 200 RS485 connection diagram 1 1200m CD485 V RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram...

Page 1265: ...perature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Max distance 2 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 3 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 3 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number Model Commu nication type Cable model Connection diagram number PF900 PF901 RS422 connection diagram 5 W ...

Page 1266: ...face converter 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 3 Number of connectable equipment Model Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number Model Comm unicati on type PF900 PF901 RS422 connection diagram 5 W BF 01 0500 0 5m W BF 01 1000 1m W BF 01 3000 3m 1 1000m COM A RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers f...

Page 1267: ...r Connection cable 2 External cable Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable Interface converter SRX SRX GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communica tion type Cable model Connection diagram number SR...

Page 1268: ...Connection cable 1 Interface converter Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number SB RS485 connection diagram 1 1200m CD485 V 1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 13 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m Up to ...

Page 1269: ...ed by RKC For details of the product contact RKC Connection cable 1 External cable Interface converter SB series SB series GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model Communication type SB RS485 connection diagram 1 1200m CD485 V 1 RS 232 G...

Page 1270: ...re controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 1 Number of connectable equipment Model Communica tion type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number B400 RS 422 specifications RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 5 RS422 connection diagram 6 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m 13m Up to 10 temperature controllers for 1 ...

Page 1271: ... 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller RS232 connection diagram 4 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller Connector conversion box side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS NC SD RD NC SG SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 4 5 3 6 RKC temperature co...

Page 1272: ...xternal cable GT11H C side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG NC SD SG RD NC CS 1 2 3 4 5 6 Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A RKC temperature controller side Modular connector 1 Connector conversion box side Interface converter CD485 V side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS N C CD RXD TXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS RI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1...

Page 1273: ...ersion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 RKC temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the RKC temperature controller side module For details refer to user s manual of the RKC temperature controller side External cable GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SD TXD...

Page 1274: ...to user s manual of the RKC temperature controller RS422 connection diagram 7 Connector conversion box side RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG T B T A R B R A SG SG 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 4 5 2 1 3 6 RKC temperature controller side Modular connector 1 External cable GT11H C 37P side FG Shield SDA SDB RSA RSB RDA RDB CSA CSB SG R B R A T B T A SG SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 1 4 5 3 6 RKC temperature co...

Page 1275: ...ngth of the RS 422 cable used for connecting the temperature controller to the GOT The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 422 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side ...

Page 1276: ...ctor Use the connector compatible with the RKC temperature controller side module For details refer to user s manual of the RKC temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 RKC temperature controller side The terminating resistor must be connected to the RKC temperature controller User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller Signal name Terminal No Z TIO Z CT CB100 CB400 CB500 CB90...

Page 1277: ...nication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click OK Item Descrip...

Page 1278: ...eed settings a COM PORT1 COM PORT2 b COM PORT3 Model Refer to Temperature controller H PCP J 53 5 1 H PCP A H PCP B 53 5 2 Z TIO module Z DIO module Z CT module 53 5 3 Z COM module 53 5 4 CB Series 53 5 5 FB Series 53 5 6 RB Series 53 5 7 PF900 901 53 5 8 HA400 401 HA900 901 53 5 9 AG500 53 5 10 RMC500 53 5 11 MA900 MA901 53 5 12 THV A1 53 5 13 SA100 SA200 53 5 14 X TIO module 53 5 15 Item Setting...

Page 1279: ...e temperature controller 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the unit address without overlapping with that of other units Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed data length parity bit and stop bit 1 Transmission speed settings 2 Settings of data length and parity bit SW2 Communication protocol 5 6 7 8 ON OFF OFF OFF MODBUS protocol SW3 Communication protocol 5 O...

Page 1280: ...configuration communication protocol Setting range 0 to F Unit address setting switch Item Setting range Communication speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication protocol MODBUS Data bit configuration Data bit 8bits Parity None Data bit 8bits Parity Even Data bit 8bits Parity Odd Stop bit 1bit fixed Unit address 2 0 to F Interval time 0 to 250ms Setting item Set value Switch No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Co...

Page 1281: ...lapping with that of other units Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed data bit configuration communication protocol Setting item Set value Instrument 0 CFG file ZTIO_rkc cfg Interval time 0 to 250ms Setting range 0 to F Module address setting switch 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A BCDE F Item Setting range Communication speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication protocol Host MO...

Page 1282: ...When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 3 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Data bit configuration Communication setting mode Set the communication setting mode using the operation panel of the FB series main unit For details of the communication setting mode refer to the following FB series Communication Instruction Manual Setting item Set value Instrument 0 CFG file ZC...

Page 1283: ...ion settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the device address 1 without overlapping with that of other units 3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes...

Page 1284: ...tching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 53 5 14 Connecting to SA100 SA200 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the device address 1 withou...

Page 1285: ...value is set to 0 a communication is not made 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary Item Setting range Communication speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication protocol 1 M...

Page 1286: ... Setting range Setting Unit address settings CH1 to CH8 0 to 99 1 1 Rotary switch setting SW1 and SW2 Communication speed 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 2 DIP switch setting SW3 Data bit configuration 0 to 5 Communication specifications setting RS 422A RS 485 3 DIP switch setting SW4 Terminating resistor setting With Without Item Setting range Unit address settings CH1 to CH8 The setting value ...

Page 1287: ...the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller Temperature controller Module address setting of temperature controller side GOT side Stationnumber setting Remark H PCP J H PCP A H PCP B Z TIO Z COM 0 to F Hexadecimal 1 to 16 Decimal The GOT side station number setting is the module address setting value 1 Z DIO 0 to F Hexadecimal 17 to 32 Decimal The GOT side sta...

Page 1288: ...r system Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No 01 station GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock function will be disabled Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the co...

Page 1289: ... 30 SLC500 40 SLC5 01 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 RS 232 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 MicroLogix1000 Digital CPU 1761 L10BWA RS 232 54 2 2 1761 L10BWB 1761 L16AWA 1761 L16BWA 1761 L16BWB 1761 L16BBB 1761 L32AWA 1761 L32BWA 1761 L32BWB 1761 L32BBB 1761 L32AAA MicroLogix1000 Analog CPU 1761 L20AWA 5A RS 232 1761 L20BWA 5A 1761 L20BWB 5A MicroLogix1200 1762 L24BWA RS 232 MicroLogix1400 1766 L32AWA RS 232 MicroLogix1500 1764 ...

Page 1290: ...f connectable equipment Series Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number SLC500 RS 232 GT09 C30R20701 9S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC SLC500 series Connection cable External cable GOT PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communication type Cable model Connection diagr...

Page 1291: ...ured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of this product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 2 The distance from the GOT to the adapter Connection cable External connection cable SLC500 series Connection cable DH485 network Adapter Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Serie...

Page 1292: ...MicroLogix 1000 1200 1500 series Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT AB MicroLogix Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series 2 Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number MicroLogix 1000 1200 1400 1500 RS 232 1761 CBL PM02 1 Series C or later or RS232 conne...

Page 1293: ...c For details of this product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 2 The distance from the GOT to the adapter Connection cable External connection cable 3 For MicroLogix1000 Digital CPU it is supported in the series C and later Connection cable DH485 network Adapter MicroLogix 1000 1200 1500 series Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable ...

Page 1294: ...ersion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number Control Compact FlexLogix RS 232 1747 CP3 1 1756 CP3 1 or RS232 connection diagram 10 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC Control Compact FlexLogix series Connection cable External cable GOT PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model T...

Page 1295: ...R SG DTR RTS CTS FG External cable GT11H C 37P side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CD RXD TXD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS FG External cable GT11H C side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CD RXD TXD...

Page 1296: ...le GT11H C side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 24V SG RTS RXD CD CTS TXD SG FG Connector conversion box side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 CD TXD RXD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS FG External cable GT11H C...

Page 1297: ...s when preparing a cable a Cable length The total distance between the GOT and a controller of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less b Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box c External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cab...

Page 1298: ...communication setting Communication detail settings 1 AB SLC500 AB 1 N 1 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address and host address 2 AB MicroLogix 1 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address and host address 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 1...

Page 1299: ...0bps 115200bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment Default 8bit 7bit 8bit Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications Default 1bit 1bit 2bits Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed during communication Default None None Even Odd Sum Check Type Specify the format in which the sum ...

Page 1300: ...es For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 The connectable EtherNet IP communication module differs depending on the PLC series ControlLogix5550 5555 5560 1756 ENET 10Mbps 1756 ENBT 10 100Mbps ControlLogix5570 1756 EN2TR 10 100Mbps Continued to next page EtherNet IP communication module ControlLogix CompactLogix Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Ethernet I...

Page 1301: ...the connectable GOTs for 1 PLC differs depending on the PLC series ControlLogix5550 5555 5560 When PLC GOT is N 1 the following number of the PLCs can be connected to 1 GOT TCP 128 or less When PLC GOT is 1 N the following number of the GOTs can be connected to 1 PLC TCP 64 or less recommended to 16 or less ControlLogix5570 When PLC GOT is N 1 the following number of the PLCs can be connected to 1...

Page 1302: ...tion Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 64 GOT IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to...

Page 1303: ...ess can be set for the different port No 54 3 3 PLC side setting POINT POINT POINT ALLEN BRADLEY PLC For details of ALLEN BRADLEY PLCs refer to the following manuals Manuals for ALLEN BRADLEY PLCs Parameter setting Set the following parameters with the software package manufactured by the Allen Bradley 1 For the IP address make the same setting as that of each Ethernet module set on GT Designer3 D...

Page 1304: ...ing IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 0 18 when using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub Mo...

Page 1305: ...s Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to Series90 30 IC693CPU311 RS 232 RS 422 55 2 1 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU363 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 Series90 70 IC697CPU731 RS 232 RS 422 55 2 2 IC697CPX772 IC697CPX782 IC697CPX928 IC697CPX935 IC697CPU780 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 IC697CPU788 IC697CPU789 IC697CPM790 VersaMax Micro IC200UAA003 RS 232 RS 422 55 2...

Page 1306: ...pplies 1 Model Communication Modules 1 Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU311 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CMM311 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC6...

Page 1307: ...332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU311 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CMM311 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 8 PLCs for 1 GOT IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 IC693CMM311 RS 422 IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU363 IC6...

Page 1308: ...PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 IC693CMM311 IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU363 IC693CMM311 Connection cable Series 90 30 Power Supplies Communication Modules COMM COPROC OK US1 US2 CPU 363 PORT ON OFF PS RS 232 PORT 1 RS 485 PORT 2 P1 P2 FRAME External cable GOT PLC Connection cable External...

Page 1309: ... Automation Corporation PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Power Supplies 1 Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P ...

Page 1310: ...331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU311 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CMM311 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 IC693CMM311 IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU363 IC693CMM311 PLC External cable GOT model ...

Page 1311: ... by GE Automation Corporation For details of the product contact GE Automation Corporation PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Power Supplies 1 Model Communication type IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagra...

Page 1312: ...tor conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication Modules 1 Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number IC697CPX772 IC697CPX782 IC697CPX928 IC697CPX935 IC697CPU780 IC697CPU788 IC697CPU789 IC697CPU731 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 IC697CPM790 IC697CMM711 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 PLC for...

Page 1313: ...772 IC697CPX782 IC697CPX928 IC697CPX935 IC697CPU780 IC697CPU788 IC697CPU789 IC697CPU731 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 IC697CPM790 IC697CMM711 RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT Series 90 70 Communication Modules Connection cable POWER SUPPLY LOGIC POWER PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OK RUN EN CENTRAL PROCESSOR UNIT MEM PROTECT P1 P2 P3 OK PORT 1 PORT 2 COMMUNICATION...

Page 1314: ...cation Modules 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number IC697CPX772 IC697CPX782 IC697CPX928 IC697CPX935 IC697CPU780 IC697CPU788 IC697CPU789 IC697CPU731 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 IC697CPM790 IC697CMM711 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m 8 PLCs for 1 GOT Series 90 70 Communication Modules POWER SUPPLY LOGIC POWER PROGRAMMABLE C...

Page 1315: ... 232 connection 1 When using the connector conversion box Connection cable VersaMax Micro Connector conversion box External cable GOT GE SNP X Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number IC200UAA003 IC200UAR014 IC200UDD104 IC200UDD112 IC200UD...

Page 1316: ...of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number IC200UAA003 IC200UAR014 IC200UDD104 IC200UDD112 IC200UDR001 IC200UDR002 IC200UDR003 IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 IC200UAR028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212 IC200UDR005 IC200UDR006 IC200UDR010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDR064 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 5 GT11H C30 37P ...

Page 1317: ...onfiguration 55 13 3 When using the external cable GT11H C VersaMax Micro External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type IC200UAA003 IC200UAR014 IC200UDD104 IC200UDD112 IC200UDR001 IC200UDR002 IC200UDR003 IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 IC200UAR028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212 IC200UDR005 IC200UDR006 IC...

Page 1318: ...ox External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment PLC Communica tion type Cable model Connection diagram number IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 IC200UAR028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212 IC200UDR005 IC200UDR006 IC200UDR010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDR064 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 7 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m G...

Page 1319: ...55 15 2 When using the external cable GT11H C 37P VersaMax Micro Connection cable External cable GOT PLC Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment PLC Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 IC200UAR028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212 IC200UDR005 IC200UDR006 IC200UDR010 IC200UDD064 I...

Page 1320: ...odel Total distance Number of connectable equipment PLC Communication type IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 IC200UAR028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212 IC200UDR005 IC200UDR006 IC200UDR010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDR064 RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS422 connection diagram 9 13m Up to 8 PLCs for 1 GOT ...

Page 1321: ...3 4 7 5 8 20 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS NC FG SHILD TD RD RTS SG CTS DCD DTR Communication Modules 1 4 2 3 10 5 6 7 8 9 External cable GT11H C 37P side 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 20 FG Shield RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SHLD TD RD RTS CTS SG DCD DTR Communication Modules Shield GY R A W R A W BK A PK R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A External cable GT11H C side 1 2 3 4...

Page 1322: ...ctor conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 GE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the GE PLC side For details refer to the GE PLC user s manual...

Page 1323: ...ounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 A terminating resistor should be connected to communication module at a terminal station Connector conversion box side Communication Module Communication Module SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB TERM RD B RD A SD B SD A 0V RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS B SHLD 1 6 2 7 5 3 4 8 9 24 25 13 21 9 7 10 11 22 23 1 TERM RD B RD A SD B SD A 0V RTS A CTS A RT...

Page 1324: ...hield SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB TERM RD B RD A SD B SD A 0V RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS B SHLD Shield W R A W BK A O R A O BK A PK R A GY R A Y R A GY BK A Y BK A 24 25 13 21 9 7 10 11 22 23 1 TERM RD B RD A SD B SD A 0V RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS B SHLD 24 25 13 21 9 7 10 11 22 23 1 1 1 Terminating resistor 120Ω 2 Connector conversion box side PLC PLC RT RD B RD A SD B SD A SG RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS...

Page 1325: ...1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a PLC which will be a terminal External cable GT11H C side PLC PLC RT RD B RD A SD B SD A SG RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS B 9 11 10 13 12 7 6 15 14 8 RT RD B RD A SD B SD A SG RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS B 9 11 10 13 12 7 6 15 14 8 1 Terminating resistor 120Ω 2 FG Shield SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA CS...

Page 1326: ...cable GT11H C 37P side PLC PLC RT RD B RD A SD B SD A SG RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS B SHLD 9 11 10 13 12 7 6 15 14 8 1 RT RD B RD A SD B SD A SG RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS B SHLD 9 11 10 13 12 7 6 15 14 8 1 1 Terminating resistor 120Ω 2 FG Shield SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB 1 2 3 6 7 10 4 8 5 9 1 External cable GT11H C side PLC PLC RT RD B RD A SD B SD A SG RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS B SHLD 9 11 10 13 12 ...

Page 1327: ...ce between GOT and controllers of RS 422 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 GE PLC side connector Use the connector com...

Page 1328: ...tility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click...

Page 1329: ...r and set it as 00 to 09 6 Set to 0 only when connecting to Port2 55 5 2 Connecting to VersaMaxMicro Communication settings Make the communication settings using the engineering tool 1 Set to the SNP protocol 2 Set to Slave 3 Set to Long 4 Set to 0 5 Set within the range of 00 to 31 When specifying the station No from 0 to 9 add 0 before the number and set it as 00 to 09 6 Set the same set value f...

Page 1330: ...umber setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive 1 Direct specification Specify the station No of the PLC to be changed when setting device POINT POINT POINT PLC Station NO settings Make sure to set a 2 digit number for the station No of...

Page 1331: ... TO GE PLC 55 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 55 27 55 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 55 7 Precautions GOT clock control The PLC clock data cannot be written to or...

Page 1332: ...55 28 55 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 55 7 Precautions ...

Page 1333: ...AL 62 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 63 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 56 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 56 1 Connectable Model List 56 1 56 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 56 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to K80S K7M D S DC RS 232 RS 422 56 2 1 K120S K7M D U K200S K3P 07 S RS 232 RS 422 56 2 2 K30...

Page 1334: ...le Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Cnet I F module 1 Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number K80S K120S RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT G7L CUEB RS 232 RS232 connection diagram...

Page 1335: ...he PLC Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable K80S K120S Cnet I F module External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Cnet I F module 1 Communication type K80S K120S RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT G7L CUEB RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS232 connection diagram 6 K80S K120S Cnet...

Page 1336: ...onnection cable 1 Connection cable 2 PLC Connection cable 1 Cnet I F module 1 Connection cable 2 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Model Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number K80S K120S RS422 connection diagram 4 G7L CUEC RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H...

Page 1337: ...of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd Communication driver LS Industrial Systems MASTER K K200S Cnet I F module Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Cnet I F module 1 Communicatio n type Cable model Connection diagram number K200S G6L CU...

Page 1338: ...ble GOT PLC Connection cable 1 Cnet I F module 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Model Communi cation type Cable model Connection diagram number K200S RS422 connection diagram 4 G6L CUEC RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m ...

Page 1339: ...Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 The distance from the GOT to the PLC Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable K200S Cnet I F module K200S Cnet I F module Connection cable 1 External cable GOT PLC Connection cable 1 Cnet I F module 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equi...

Page 1340: ...tor conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Cnet I F module 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number K300S G4L CUEA RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 4 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT K300S Cnet I F module Connection cable External cable GOT PLC C...

Page 1341: ...ble 2 External cable K300S Cnet I F module K300S Cnet I F module Connector conversion box External cable GOT Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 PLC Connection cable 1 Cnet I F module 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Cnet I F module 1 Communication Type Cable model ...

Page 1342: ...C Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 External cable K300S Cnet I F module K300S Cnet I F module External cable GOT Connection cable 1 PLC Connection cable 1 Cnet I F module 1 External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Cnet I F module 1 Communic ation type K300S RS422 connection diagram 4 G4L CUEA RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT1...

Page 1343: ... TXD1 5V SG SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side External cable GT11H C 37P side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS SG 5V RXD1 TXD1 RXD2 SG 5V TXD2 SG SG Shield W R A W BK A GY R A GY BK A O R A O BK A Y R A Y BK A PK R A LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side External cable GT11H C side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG Shield SD TXD ER DTR RD RXD DR DSR RS RTS CS ...

Page 1344: ... 1 1 For the system terminal connect a 120Ω 1 2W terminating resistor across RDA and RDB and across SDA and SDB respectively RS422 connection diagram 2 1 For the system terminal connect a 120Ω 1 2W terminating resistor across RDA and RDB and across SDA and SDB respectively RS422 connection diagram 3 1 For the system terminal connect a 120Ω 1 2W terminating resistor across RDA and RDB and across SD...

Page 1345: ...t be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the LS INDUSTRIAL ...

Page 1346: ...ty s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when chang...

Page 1347: ...ere is no item to be set using the hardware Set the items using the engineering software for MASTER K For the setting method of the engineering software refer to the following User s Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 56 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Desig...

Page 1348: ...56 16 56 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 56 6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 1349: ...ectable models 57 2 System Configuration 57 2 1 Connecting to Flexi Soft 1 Product manufactured by SICK Inc For details of the product contact SICK Inc Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to Flexi Soft FX3 CPU000000 RS 232 57 2 1 FX3 CPU130002 FX3 CPU320002 SICK Flexi Soft Communication driver Connector conversion box External cable GOT Flexi Soft Connection cable PLC Connection cable Conn...

Page 1350: ...ion detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 SICK Flexi Soft POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATI...

Page 1351: ...tails of SICK PLCs refer to the following manual User s Manual of the SICK PLC 57 4 1 Connecting to Flexi Soft Communication settings Communication settings are not required since the following contents are fixed 57 5 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual F...

Page 1352: ...57 4 57 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 57 5 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 1353: ...ctured by Siemens AG For details of this product contact Siemens AG Series Clock Communication type Ethernet connection type Refer to SIMATIC S7 200 RS 232 58 2 2 Ethernet OP communication 58 3 2 SIMATIC S7 300 1 RS 232 58 2 1 Ethernet FETCH WRITE 58 3 1 OP communication 58 3 2 SIMATIC S7 400 1 RS 232 58 2 1 Ethernet FETCH WRITE 58 3 1 OP communication 58 3 2 SIMATIC S7 1200 Ethernet OP communicat...

Page 1354: ...nnection cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series HMI Adapter 1 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number SIMATIC S7 300 400 MLFB 6ES7 972 0CA11 0XA0 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 HMI Adapter SIMATIC S7 300 400 series HMI Adapter External cable GOT PLC External cable GOT model Total distance Number of co...

Page 1355: ...ection cable External connection cable SIMATIC S7 300 400 series HMI Adapter Connection cable PROFIBUS Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series HMI Adapter 1 Communic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number SIMATIC S7 300 400 MLFB 6ES7 972 0CA11 0XA0 RS 232 GT0...

Page 1356: ...ATIC S7 200 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT SIEMENS S7 200 Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number SIMATIC S7 200 RS 232 6ES7 901 3BF20 0XA0 1 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XA0 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for...

Page 1357: ...ctor For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box c External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable d SIEMENS PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the SIEMENS PLC side For details refer to the SIEMENS PLC user s manual Connector conv...

Page 1358: ...d 2 Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 38400bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment Default 8bit 8bit fixed Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications Default 1bit 1bit fixed Parity Specify whether or not to perform a pa...

Page 1359: ...ttings of the GOT side For details refer to the following 58 2 4 Communication detail settings Connecting to SIMATIC S7 200 1 Communication settings Set the communication settings of PLC and PC PPI cable a PLC settings Set the communication settings of PLC by operating the SIEMENS programming tool STEP7 Micro WIN32 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Set the address without overlapping the a...

Page 1360: ... manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual At system startup 1 When powering ON the system Turn ON all PLC CPUs before turning ON the GOT If the GOT is turned ON before power up of the PLC CPUs restart the GOT 2 When powering OFF a PLC CPU at another station When a PLC CPU at another station the PLC CPU to which the HMI Adapter is not connected is turned OFF monitoring by the GOT is stoppe...

Page 1361: ...witching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of this product contact Siemens AG 4 If the number of GOTs increases the communication becomes high loaded and it may affect the communication performance 5 Use C or later versi...

Page 1362: ...able STP or Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP Category 3 4 and 5 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable STP Category 5 and 5e GT16H CNB 42S GT14H C30 42P 3m GT14H C60 42P 6m GT14H C100 42P 10m 100m 2 When PLC GOT is N 1 The following shows the number of PLCs for 1 GOT 128 or less When PLC GOT is 1 N The following shows the number of GOTs for 1 PLC 32 or less 4 recommended to 16 units or less GT16H...

Page 1363: ...mber of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of this p...

Page 1364: ...nication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 58 3 3 Ethernet setting 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 254 GOT IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set...

Page 1365: ... Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk N W No Set the network No of the connected Ethernet module Default 1 1 to 239 PLC No 1 Set the station No of the connected Ethernet module Default blank 1 to 64 Controller Type SIEMEN...

Page 1366: ... IP address Remote GOT side IP address PORT dec Local PLC side port No Remote GOT side port No Item Settings Option Mode Select Write passive Addresses IP dec Local PLC side IP address Remote GOT side IP address PORT dec Local PLC side port No Remote GOT side port No Item Settings Module Position Value in Position of the Ethernet module Module Address IP Address PLC side IP address Subnet mask PLC...

Page 1367: ...ing GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT When monitoring a nonexistent or turned off station If a time out occurs with the initial communication by monitoring a ...

Page 1368: ...58 16 58 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 58 4 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 1369: ...ONTROLLER 60 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER 61 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 62 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 63 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 59 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 59 1 59 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER For the connection to the HNC controller manufactured by Hirata Corporation please contact our company ...

Page 1370: ...59 2 59 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER ...

Page 1371: ...ION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 60 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER 61 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 62 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 63 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 60 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER 60 1 60 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER For the connection to the MURATEC controller please contact our company ...

Page 1372: ...60 2 60 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER ...

Page 1373: ...MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION 61 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 61 1 62 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 62 1 ...

Page 1374: ......

Page 1375: ... used in the microcomputer connection PLC devices are not used 61 4 Device Data Area Flow of data processing 1 When reading or writing data 1 The host sends a request message the read write command to the GOT 2 The GOT performs a read write processing to its virtual devices according to the request from the host 3 Upon completion of the processing the GOT sends a response message processing result...

Page 1376: ...errupt output from the touch switches on the GOT 2 The GOT sends the written data interrupt output to the host 1 61 5 Message Formats 2 61 4 Device Data Area 2 1 Host GOT Screen data Interrupt output 1 Screen display Device data area virtual devices 2 Interrupt D13 D13 3139H 31H output value1 output value2 39H When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 ...

Page 1377: ...Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Host Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Communication type Connection diagram number RS 232 RS 232 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 host RS 422 RS 422 connection diagram 1 GT11H CNB 37S GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H ...

Page 1378: ...cable GT11H C Host External cable GOT Host External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Communication type RS 232 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m RS 232 connection diagram 3 6m 1 GOT for 1 host RS 422 GT11H C30 3m GT11H C60 6m GT11H C100 10m RS 422 connection diagram 3 13m ...

Page 1379: ...case where the DTR DSR signal is used Connector conversion box side Host side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FG SD TXD RD RXD RS RTS SG CS CTS ER DTR Connector conversion box side Host side FG SD TXD RD RXD DR DSR SG ER DTR RS RTS CS CTS 5V CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 External cable GT11H C 37P side Host side FG Shield SD TXD...

Page 1380: ...arity A and B in signal names may be reversed depending on the microcomputer to be used Prepare a cable according to the microcomputer to be used Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 422 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Conn...

Page 1381: ...ses 3000 to 300DH of GD0 to 6 on the GOT F900 Series POINT POINT POINT Values of virtual devices inside the GOT When the GOT is turned OFF or reset values are cleared to their defaults bit devices OFF word devices 0 Values are held in the memory when project data are written to the GOT Virtual device 2 Address specification value Refer to Name Device range decimal Device type Formats 1 2 Formats 3...

Page 1382: ...an SIO error occurs and turn OFF when a request message from the host is received successfully after the error occurrence b7 turns ON about 3 seconds after the host side DTR becomes OFF and turns OFF when transmission is performed successfully to the host after the error occurrence System D4 Clock data year D5 Clock data month D6 Clock data day b15 b0 b3 Unused b4 SIO framing error b5 SIO parity e...

Page 1383: ...e time displayed on the utility Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Tuesday 04 is stored to D10 although Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display Address Description Set side D7 Clock data hour System D8 Clock data minute D9 Clock data second D10 Clock data day of week 1 D11 D12 Unused b15 b0 Data of hours 00 to ...

Page 1384: ...errupt output to the host side 1 2 The data amount number of bytes to be interrupt output is set at Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings 61 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Output value when 1 is set to Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings User D14 Output value when 2 is set to Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings Output val...

Page 1385: ...ecification method for each data format refer to the following 61 5 Message Formats Address Address specification value Formats 1 2 Formats 3 to 6 Formats 7 to 10 Formats 11 to 13 Formats 14 15 D0 0 D0 D0 0000H 8000H 8001H D1 1 D1 D1 0001H 8002H 8003H D4095 4095 D4095 D4095 0FFFH 9FFEH 9FFFH Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3 to 6 A compatible 1C frame Formats 7 to 10 Q...

Page 1386: ...ress Address specification value b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Formats 1 2 Formats 3 to 6 Formats 7 to 10 Formats 11 to 13 Formats 14 15 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 L0 8192 Same as address column on left 2 2000H A000H L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 A001H L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 L16 8193 2001H A002H L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 A003H L2039 L2038 L2037 L2036 L2035 L2034 L2033 L2032 8319 207FH A0FEH L2047 L...

Page 1387: ...ncremented at 100ms intervals after GOT is turned ON The time elapsed after GOT is turned ON is stored in 100ms units 1 When setting the LH order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings The lower and upper bits are stored in SD0 and SD1 respectively 2 When setting the HL order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings The upper and lower bits are stored in SD0 and SD1 r...

Page 1388: ... communication module attachment Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Review the contents of the message to transmit 5 Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message 61 5 2 List of commands 105 Timeout error There is no response from the GOT or the station of the specified address does not exist Check th...

Page 1389: ...8 D9000 SD0 2100H 2100H 2101H SD1 8449 D9001 SD1 2101H 2102H 2103H SD2 8450 D9002 SD2 2102H 2104H 2105H SD3 8451 D9003 SD3 2103H 2106H 3000H 2107H 3001H SD4 8452 D9004 SD4 2104H 2108H 3002H 2109H 3003H SD5 8453 D9005 SD5 2105H 210AH 3004H 210BH 3005H SD6 8454 D9006 SD6 2106H 210CH 3006H 210DH 3007H SD7 8455 D9007 SD7 2107H 210EH 3008H 210FH 3009H SD8 8456 D9008 SD8 2108H 2110H 300AH 2111H 300BH SD...

Page 1390: ...ple FFH 7FH Address Description Set side SM0 to 49 Interrupt output When the ON OFF state of SM0 to 49 is changed by a touch switch on the GOT for example the interrupt codes shown below are transmitted interrupt output to the host side 1 2 The data amount number of bytes to be interrupt output is set at Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings 61 6 1 Setting communication interface Co...

Page 1391: ...052 3 In formats 7 to 10 values are specified within a range of SM0 to 52 4 For reading or writing data in word units specify the addresses in 16 point units Example SM0 SM16 SM32 etc Address Address specification value b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Formats 1 2 Formats 3 to 6 Formats 7 to 10 Formats 11 to 13 Formats 14 15 SM7 SM6 SM5 SM4 SM3 SM2 SM1 SM0 8464 2 4 3 4 2110H 2200H SM15 SM14 SM13 SM12 SM11 ...

Page 1392: ... frame format 1 This is the basic format of the dedicated protocols 61 5 4 Format 4 A compatible 1C frame format 2 This is the appended format of the A compatible 1C frame format 1 with a block No Format 5 A compatible 1C frame format 3 This is the enclosed format of the A compatible 1C frame format 1 with STX and ETX Format 6 A compatible 1C frame format 4 This is the appended format of the A com...

Page 1393: ... devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points Reads multiple different word devices in 1 point units 64 points RW 52H 57H Random write in word units 1 Writes to multiple different bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points Writes to multiple different word devices in 1 point units 64 points TR 54H 52H Read clock data Reads the clock data of the GOT TS 54H 53H Set clock data Sets the cloc...

Page 1394: ...ltiple different word devices in 1 point and 2 point units 64 points 1402 0001 Random write in bit units Writes to multiple different bit devices in 1 point units 64 points 1402 0000 Random write in word units 1 Writes to multiple different bit devices in 16 point and 32 point units 3 64 words 1024 points Writes to multiple different word devices in 1 point and 2 point units 64 points 0406 0000 Mu...

Page 1395: ...040 points Reads word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points 1 31H Batch write w out station No Writes to bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points Writes to word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points B 42H Batch write w station No Writes to bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points Writes to word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points 3 33H Multi point write in bit units w out...

Page 1396: ...ng processing of read commands 2 During processing of write commands Response message during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 During interrupt output format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is perf...

Page 1397: ...device data to be read written Setting range 1 to 64 Data notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 5 Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data Data notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted fr...

Page 1398: ...30H 0 30H H L Number of points 0 2 30H 32H 52H 44H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 32H 03H 1BCH D100 D101 0102H 0304H Item Message Formats Request message host GOT Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed...

Page 1399: ...Response message during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 8 C 38H 43H Sum Check H L Command R D 52H 44H H L Address 8 3 38H 33H 2 32H 0 30H H L Number of points 0 2 30H 32H Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L...

Page 1400: ...e during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 5 6 35H 36H Sum Check H L Command W D 57H 44H H L Address 0 1 30H 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L Number of points 0 2 30H 32H H L Data 1 D100 0...

Page 1401: ...ssage during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 5 6 35H 36H Sum Check H L Data 1 M15 to 0 0 30H 0 30H 1 31H 0 30H H L Data 2 M31 to 16 8 38H 0 30H 0 30H 0 30H M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8...

Page 1402: ...s microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 3 5 33H 35H Sum Check H L Command R R 52H 52H H L Address 1 0 1 30H 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L Address 2 8 3 38H 33H 2 32H 0 30H Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 8 E 38H 45H Sum Check H L Data 1 D100 0 30H 6 36H 4 34H 0 30H 0 0 0 0...

Page 1403: ... execution Item Message Formats Request message host GOT Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L C 5 43H 35H Sum Check H L Address 2 8 38H 2 32H 0 30H 3 33H ...

Page 1404: ...mmunication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L A 9 41H 39H Sum Check H L Command T R 54H 52H Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L D 0 44H 30H Sum Check H L Year data 0 4 30H 34H H L Month data 0 6 30H 36H H L Day data 0 1 30H 31H H...

Page 1405: ...he time displayed on the utility Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Tuesday Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE After execution Item Message Formats Request message host GOT Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communicatio...

Page 1406: ...et to 4 byte 3139H D13 31H 39H Interrupt Interrupt output Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 Output value 1 Output value 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 3 33H Sum check C 43H 39H Output value 1 39H Output value 1 format 1 in the case of GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 in the case of GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection for...

Page 1407: ...2 bit data Error code Description Measures 06H Sum check error The sum check code created from received data differs from the sum check code in the receive data Review the contents of the message to transmit 10H Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message 61 5 2 List of commands 11H Message length error The upper li...

Page 1408: ...s converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 2 Station No Station No is used to identify the GOT with which the host communicates Setting range 0 to 31 Data notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit The GOT processes only commands whose station No matches the Host Address 0 to 31 set at Communication Detail Sett...

Page 1409: ...ransmitted from the upper digit 6 Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data Data notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 1 Read clock data TR command 2 Set clock data TS command 7 Error code This is the response message at fa...

Page 1410: ...frame format 1 Response message during faulty communication GOT host Example Format 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 Sum check is performed in this range 05H ENQ H L 9 6 39H 36H Sum Check H L Command R 52H T 54H H L Station No 0 30H 0 30H H L PLC No 0 30H 0 30H 30H Wait 0 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 9 0 39H 30H Sum Check H L Year data 0 4 30H 34H H L Month data 0 6 30H...

Page 1411: ...command the actual day of the week is Tuesday Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE Item Message Formats Request message host GOT Example Format 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 Response message during normal communication GOT host Example Format 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 Response message during faulty communication GOT host Example F...

Page 1412: ...sage to transmit 05H Overrun error The next data was transmitted from the host before GOT completes the processing of the data received Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Decrease the transmission speed 06H Character section error The character section specification error The method of specifying the character section is wrong The specified command has error The number of points o...

Page 1413: ...med in ASCII code 1 Block No network No PLC No request destination module I O No and station No Ignored in a microcomputer connection of the GOT Specify 00 The request destination module I O No is 0000 00 is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit The request destination module I O No is 4 digit 2 Station No Station No is used to identify the GOT with which the h...

Page 1414: ...points a When using random read write command When setting multiple bit accesses word accesses or double word accesses limit the total number of access points to within 64 points b When using multiple block batch read write commands When setting multiple blocks limit the total number of points of all blocks to within 64 points 7 Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies ...

Page 1415: ...o F 46H 8 38H H L PLC No 0 30H 0 30H Character A section H L Station No 0 30H 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H H L Host Address No 0 30H 0 30H H Command 9 39H L 0 30H 1 31H 1 31H H Sub command 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX H L Su...

Page 1416: ...r C section H L 0 30H 0 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H 1 H L 0 4 30H 34H H L 0 6 30H 36H H L 0 1 30H 31H H L 1 8 31H 38H H L 4 6 34H 36H H L 4 9 34H 39H H L 0 2 30H 32H H Command 0 30H 9 39H L 0 30H 1 31H H Sub command 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H Character C section 1 Sum check Frame ID No PLC No Station No Network No Request destination module I O No...

Page 1417: ...ds the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Tuesday Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display Item Message Formats Response message during faulty communication GOT host Example Format 7 QnA compatible 4C frame format 1 NAK 15H H L F 46H 8 38H H L 0 30H 0...

Page 1418: ...the message to transmit Check the devices that can be used and the device ranges 61 4 Device Data Area 7F20H Character error A character other than A to Z 0 to 9 space and control codes has been received Review the contents of the message to transmit 7F23H Communication message error EXT CR LF was not found within the upper limit of the receive buffer Check the communication cable and communicatio...

Page 1419: ...at POINT POINT POINT Data code during communication Communication is performed in ASCII code 1 Command Specifies the contents to access from the host to GOT The command is converted to a 1 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted For details of the commands that can be used refer to the following 61 5 2 List of commands 2 Station No Station No is used to identify the GOT with which the host communicat...

Page 1420: ...age format 2 Set clock data M command 6 Error code This is the response message at faulty communication appended with error contents The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of error codes generated in formats 12 and 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode refer to the following Error ...

Page 1421: ...e following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to 2004 June 1 18 46 49 Tuesday Continued to next page Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE Item Message Formats Request message host GOT Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583 OFF Partly...

Page 1422: ...Sum Check H L Station No 0 30H 0 30H 1BH ESC 41H A 0DH CR 0AH LF H L Year data 0 4 30H 34H H L Month data 0 6 30H 36H H L Day data 0 1 30H 31H H L Hour data 1 8 31H 38H H L Minute data 4 6 34H 36H H L Second data 4 9 34H 39H H L Day of week data 0 2 30H 32H 1 Following 1 03H ETX Com mand This range Sum check 02H STX H L 8 C 38H 43H Sum Check H L Station No 0 30H 0 30H 1BH ESC 41H A 0DH CR 0AH LF H...

Page 1423: ...0 to GS583 OFF Partly compatible Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583 ON Fully compatible Response message during normal communication GOT host Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Sum check is performed in this range 05H ENQ H L 9 A 39H 41H Sum Check H L Station No 0 30H 0 30H 1BH ESC 4DH M 0DH CR 0AH LF H L Year data 0 4 30H 34H ...

Page 1424: ...ity Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Tuesday Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display Item Message Formats Response message during faulty communication GOT host Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n The above is a case where the sum check error 06H ...

Page 1425: ...ing that 3139H is written to D13 and AA55H to D14 Continued to next page 3139H D13 31H 39H Interrupt output Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 in format 11 Output value 1 Output value 2 Interrupt Item Message Formats Request message host GOT Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583...

Page 1426: ...ings is set to 1 byte 2 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 2 byte 3 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 4 byte This range Sum check is performed 02H STX H L Station No 0 30H 0 30H 1BH ESC 49H I 0DH CR 0AH LF H L 9 4 39H 44H Sum Check H L 3 9 33H 39H Output value 1 03H ETX Com mand Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX H L 9 39...

Page 1427: ...error The sum check code created from received data differs from the sum check code in the receive data Review the contents of the message to transmit 10H Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message 61 5 2 List of commands 12H Message length error The upper limit of the data length that can be received by the GOT ha...

Page 1428: ...ormat 2 1 w out station No 2 w station No 2 w station No Response message during normal communication GOT host 1 During processing of read commands format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 2 During processing of write commands Response message during faulty communication GOT host During interrupt output 02H STX 0DH CR D...

Page 1429: ...ing method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following 61 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 4 Address Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following 61 4 Device ...

Page 1430: ...command w out station No read clock data G command w station No 6 Set clock data 5 command w out station No set clock data F command w station No 10 Data Specifies the data to read from write to the specified device data word unit The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 11 Write data Specifies the data to write to the specifi...

Page 1431: ...t 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Response message during normal communication GOT host format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Response message during faulty communication GOT host 02H STX 0DH CR H L Station No 1 5 31H 35H H L Address 0 30H 0 30H 8 38H H L Number of bytes 0 4 30H 34H A 41H C 43H C...

Page 1432: ...range 02H STX 03H ETX H L D 0 44H 30H Sum Check H L Station No 1 5 31H 35H H L Address 2 32H 0 30H H L Number of bytes 0 4 30H 34H A 41H 0 30H 0 30H Com mand 02H STX 0DH CR M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2 M 2 3 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 3 M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0...

Page 1433: ...R101 0064H 0065H Before execution After execution Item Message Formats Request message host GOT format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host 02H STX 0DH CR H L Station No 1 5 31H 35H H L Address 0 30H 0 30H 8 38H H L ...

Page 1434: ...ty communication GOT host 02H STX 0DH CR 42H B H L Station No 5 35H 1 31H H Address 0 30H 2 32H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Number of bytes 4 34H 0 30H Following 1 Com mand Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 5 A 35H 41H Sum Check M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2 M 2 3 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 1 0 0 ...

Page 1435: ...et to 1 by the bit pattern are turned ON Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Result 1110 1 OFF specification Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are turned OFF Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Result 0010 2 Invert specification Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are inverted Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Result 0110 3 Write specification The numerical values to write by the bit pattern are spe...

Page 1436: ... start address and end address can be specified crossing over different devices R100 0000H R50 0000H 0000H R100 1616H R50 1616H 1616H Before execution After execution Item Message Formats Request message host GOT format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Response message during normal communication GOT host Response mess...

Page 1437: ...ormat 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Response message during normal communication GOT host format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Response message during faulty communication GOT host 02H STX 0DH CR H L Station No 2 7 32H 37H G 47H Com mand Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L...

Page 1438: ...y 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE After execution Item Message Formats Request message host GOT format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host 46H F 0DH CR H L Station No 2 7 32H 37H H L Month data 0 6 30H 36H H L Day Data 0 1 ...

Page 1439: ...errupt output turn ON SM52 interrupt code output disable flag 61 4 6 SM devices To issue interrupts set the data length to 8 bits at Communication Detail Settings 61 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH 7FH 3139H D13 Interrupt Interrupt output Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 31H Output value 1 39H ...

Page 1440: ...fer to the following 61 4 5 Details and actions for errors error codes stored into SD2 When an error other than those to be stored in SD2 occurs at faulty only the NAK response is executed Precautions 1 Batch reading writing crossing over different devices When using the batch read 0 A or batch write 1 B command do not batch read write crossing over different devices This will cause an error respo...

Page 1441: ...fer to the following 18 1 2 I F communication setting 61 6 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 19200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data Bit Set this item when ...

Page 1442: ...n communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Special Interrupt Code Hex Event type 20H Base Screen 1 and Overlap Window 1 Output when the screens are switched according to the change in the switching device values assigned to 1 2 1 Base Screen or Overlap Window 1 2 switches independently without being interlocked Example of output W...

Page 1443: ...d monitor screen settings 1 Transmission settings Set the transmission settings of the GOT The transmission settings in the microcomputer connection serial are made at Detail Setting on GT Designer3 61 6 2 Communication detail settings 2 Monitor screen settings The following shows the monitor screen settings in this system configuration example a Common settings Set D20 to the screen switching dev...

Page 1444: ... Switch 2 This is a bit alternate switch for changing the state of D22 b0 5 Switch 3 This is the screen switching switch to Sample Screen 1 Touching this changes the base screen to Sample Screen 1 Sample Screen 1 123 Screen 2 Sample Screen 2 Screen 1 No Basic setting Device Style Device Communicati on format Display format Display size Number of display digits D21 Unsigned BIN16 Signed Decimal Arb...

Page 1445: ...es the current value acquisition request to device D21 Batch numerical value display read packet 3 Increments the numerical value displayed on base screen 1 The host side repeats the processing on the left as long as base screen 1 is displayed When receiving a response to reading of device D21 from the GOT Creates the next device value D21 Calculates the sum check of the send packet Issues the upd...

Page 1446: ...ndy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 61 9 Precautions GOT clock control The settings of time adjusting or time broadcast made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC Use the dedicated commands to set or read out the clock data of microcomputer ...

Page 1447: ...ponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standard The use of shielded twisted pair cable STP is recommended in environments in which the performance against noise is required 2 A length between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number o...

Page 1448: ...s of virtual devices inside the GOT When the GOT is turned OFF or reset values are cleared to their defaults bit devices OFF word devices 0 Values are held in the memory when project data are written to the GOT Virtual device 2 Address specification value Refer to Name Device range decimal Device type Format 1 2 Format 3 4 Format 5 Format 6 7 8 9 D 0 to 4095 Word 0 to 4095 8000 to 9FFFH 0000 to 0F...

Page 1449: ...ext page Address Description Set side D0 to 2 Unused D3 Communication error status Stores the communication error details of GOT b4 to 6 turn ON when an SIO error occurs and turn OFF when a request message from the host is received successfully after the error occurrence b7 turns ON about 3 seconds after the host side DTR becomes OFF and turns OFF when transmission is performed successfully to the...

Page 1450: ... is stored to D10 although Thursday THU will be displayed on the utility time display Address Description Set side D7 Clock data hour System D8 Clock data minute D9 Clock data second D10 Clock data day of week 1 D11 D12 Unused b15 b0 Data of hours 00 to 23 stored as 2 digit BCD b7 Unused b8 b15 b0 Data of minutes 00 to 59 stored as 2 digit BCD b7 Unused b8 b15 b0 Data of seconds 00 to 59 stored as...

Page 1451: ...on Set side D13 Interrupt output When data are written to D13 and D14 from a GOT touch switch for example the data of D13 and D14 are transmitted interrupt output to the host side 1 2 The data amount number of bytes to be interrupt output is set at Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Output value when 1 is set to Interr...

Page 1452: ...2 4 Message Formats Address Address specification value Formats 1 2 Formats 3 4 Format 5 Formats 6 7 8 9 D0 0 8000H 0000H D0 8001H D1 1 8002H 0001H D1 8003H D4095 4095 9FFEH 0FFFH D4095 9FFFH Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Format 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Formats 6 7 4E frame Formats 8 9 3E fram...

Page 1453: ...below 1 1 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following 62 4 Message Formats 2 For reading or writing data in word units specify the addresses in 16 point units Example M0 M16 M32 etc Address Address specification value b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Formats 1 2 Formats 3 4 Format 5 Formats 6 7 8 9 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 L0 8192 A000H 2000H Same as address column on left ...

Page 1454: ...to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings The lower and upper bits are stored in SD0 and SD1 respectively 2 When setting the HL order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings The upper and lower bits are stored in SD0 and SD1 respectively System SD2 1 Communication error status An error data error code occurred during communication is stored Host Address Communication er...

Page 1455: ...104 Communication message error EXT CR could not be found before the upper limit of the receive buffer was exceeded Check the communication cable and communication module attachment Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Review the contents of the message to transmit 5 Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in th...

Page 1456: ...2103H SD3 2107H 3001H SD4 8452 2108H 3002H 2104H SD4 2109H 3003H SD5 8453 210AH 3004H 2105H SD5 210BH 3005H SD6 8454 210CH 3006H 2106H SD6 210DH 3007H SD7 8455 210EH 3008H 2107H SD7 210FH 3009H SD8 8456 2110H 300AH 2108H SD8 2111H 300BH SD9 8457 2112H 300CH 2109H SD9 2113H 300DH Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Format 5 Digit...

Page 1457: ...bits at Communication Detail Settings 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH 7FH Address Description Set side SM0 to 49 Interrupt output When the ON OFF state of SM0 to 49 is changed by a touch switch on the GOT for example the interrupt codes shown below are transmitted interrupt output to the host side 1 2 The data ...

Page 1458: ... point units Example SM0 SM16 SM32 etc Address Address specification value b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Format 1 2 Format 3 4 Format 5 Format 6 7 8 9 SM7 SM6 SM5 SM4 SM3 SM2 SM1 SM0 8464 2200H 2110H 2 3 SM15 SM14 SM13 SM12 SM11 SM10 SM9 SM8 2201H SM23 SM22 SM21 SM20 SM19 SM18 SM17 SM16 8465 2202H 2111H SM31 SM30 SM29 SM28 SM27 SM26 SM25 SM24 2203H SM39 SM38 SM37 SM36 SM35 SM34 SM33 SM32 8466 2204H 2112...

Page 1459: ...tocol of Q QnA Series serial communication module How to set data format Set the data format at Detail Setting in GT Designer3 For details of the data format setting method refer to the following 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Type Name Description Refer to Format 1 GOT A900 series microcomputer connection ASCII This format is used when the GOT is connected to the ho...

Page 1460: ...ead clock data Reads the clock data of the GOT TS 54H 53H Set clock data Sets the clock data of the GOT Command Command name Description Max number of points processed Symbol ASCII code 0 30H Batch read w out station No Reads bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points Reads word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points A 41H Batch read w station No Reads bit devices in byte units 255bytes 204...

Page 1461: ...0001 Batch read in bit units Reads bit devices in 1 point units 64 points 0401 0000 Batch read in word units Reads bit devices in 16 point units 3 64 words 1024 points Reads word devices in 1 point units 64 points 1401 0001 Batch write in bit units Writes to bit devices in 1 point units 64 points 1401 0000 Batch write in word units Writes to bit devices in 16 point units 3 64 words 1024 points Wri...

Page 1462: ...setting of the number of interrupt data bytes refer to the following 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Message Formats Request message host GOT Response message during normal communication GOT host 1 During processing of read commands 2 During processing of write commands Response message during faulty communication GOT host During interrupt output H L Command Data...

Page 1463: ...e read written Setting range 1 to 64 In the format 1 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the format 2 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 1 digit Binary code binary and transmitted 5 Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be...

Page 1464: ... GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Command R D 52H 44H H L Address 0 1 30H 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L Number of points 0 2 30H 32H Command R D Address 00H 64H Number of...

Page 1465: ...es microcomputer connection ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Command R D 52H 44H H L Address 8 3 38H 33H 2 32H 0 30H H L Number of points 0 2 30H 32H Command R D Address 83H 20H Number of points 02H H L Data 1 M15 to 0 0 30H 0 30H 1 31H 0 30H H L 8 38H 0 30H 0 30H 0 30H M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2...

Page 1466: ... A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Command W D 57H 44H H L Address 0 1 30H 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L Number of points 0 2 30H 32H H L Data 1 D100 0 0 30H 30H 6 36H 4 34H H L Data 2 D101 0 0 30H 30H 6 36H 5 35H Command W D Addres...

Page 1467: ...ge during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Data 1 M15 to 0 0 30H 0 30H 1 31H 0 30H H L Data 2 M31 to 16 8 38H 0 30H 0 30H 0 30H M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2 M 2 3 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 3 M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0...

Page 1468: ...uter connection ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Command R R 52H 52H H L Address 1 0 1 30H 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L Address 2 8 3 38H 33H 2 32H 0 30H Command R R Address 1 00H 64H Address 2 20H 80H H L Data 1 D100 0 30H 6 36H 4 34H 0 30H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 3 M 1 4...

Page 1469: ...e host GOT format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Address 2 8 38H 2 32H 0 30H 3 33H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 3 M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H L Data 2 M15 to 0 0 ...

Page 1470: ... format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Command T R 54H 52H H L Year data 0 9 30H 39H H L Month data 1 0 31H 30H H L Day data 0 1 30H 31H H L Hour data 1 8 31H 38H H L Minute data 4 6 34H 36H H L Second data 4 9 34H 39H H L Day of week data 0 4 30H 34H Year data 09H M...

Page 1471: ...layed on the utility Example When October 01 2009 Tuesday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Thursday Thursday THU will be displayed on the utility time display Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU After execution Item Message Formats Request message host GOT format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connectio...

Page 1472: ...utput disable flag 62 3 6 SM devices 3139H D13 Interrupt Interrupt output Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 31H Output value 1 39H Output value 2 Item Message Formats Interrupt output GOT host 1 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 1 byte 2 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 2 byte 3 When Interrupt Data Byte in Comm...

Page 1473: ...nication Detail Settings when 32 bit data is set for GOT A900 series With setting LH Order the order of upper bits and lower bits are reversed when the GOT displays and writes 32 bit data Error code Description Measures 10H Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message 62 4 2 List of commands 11H Message length error ...

Page 1474: ... interrupt data bytes refer to the following 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Message Formats Request message host GOT 1 w out station No 2 w station No Response message during normal communication GOT host 1 During processing of read commands 2 During processing of write commands Response message during faulty communication GOT host During interrupt output Data C...

Page 1475: ... only commands whose station No matches the Host Address 0 to 31 set at Communication Detail Settings The message of command whose station No does not match is ignored For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 4 Address Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written In the format 3 the addre...

Page 1476: ... the format 4 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 1 digit Binary code binary and transmitted 9 Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data In the format 3 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the ...

Page 1477: ...101 3604H are stored R100 R101 3D21H 3604H Item Message Formats Request message host GOT format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication GOT host format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during faulty ...

Page 1478: ... 1 5 31H 35H H L Address 2 32H 0 30H H L Number of bytes 0 4 30H 34H A 41H 0 30H 0 30H Com mand Station No 0FH Address Number of bytes 04H A 20H 00H Com mand M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2 M 2 3 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 3 M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H L Da...

Page 1479: ...n No 15 R100 R101 0000H 0000H R100 R101 0064H 0065H Before execution After execution Item Message Formats Request message host GOT format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Data 1 R100 upper 3 D 33H 44H H L Data 2 R10...

Page 1480: ...L Data 3 M23 to 16 0 0 30H 30H H L Data 4 M31 to 24 8 0 38H 30H 1 H L Station No 1 5 31H 35H H L Address 2 32H 0 30H 0 30H H L Number of bytes 0 4 30H 34H B 42H 0 30H Following 1 Com mand M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2 M 2 3 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 1481: ... 30H H L Bit pattern1 8 38H 0 30H 1 Write specification 1 1 31H 0 30H 3 33H H L 2 32H 0 30H H L Bit pattern2 4 34H 0 30H Write specification 2 0 30H F 46 E 45H 2 2 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Source data bit pattern 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 Result write specification1 1 M 2 0 3 2 M 2 0 3 3 M 2 0 3 4 M 2 0 3 5 M 2 0 3 6 M 2 0 3 7 M 2 0 3 8 M 2 0 3 9 0 1 0 ...

Page 1482: ...1 by the bit pattern are turned ON Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Result 1110 1 OFF specification Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are turned OFF Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Result 0010 2 Invert specification Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are inverted Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Result 0110 3 Write specification The numerical values to write by the bit pattern are specified...

Page 1483: ...ollowing cases The address to specify has the start address greater than the end address Either of the start address or end address exceeds the device range that can be specified 2 Address specifying crossing over different devices The start address and end address can be specified crossing over different devices R100 0000H R50 0000H 0000H R100 1616H R50 1616H 1616H Before execution After executio...

Page 1484: ...ormat 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication GOT host format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Station No 2 7 32H 37H G 47H Com mand Station No 1BH G Com mand H L Month data 1 0 31H 30H H L Day data 0 1 30H 31H H L...

Page 1485: ...g commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When October 01 2009 Tuesday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Thursday Thursday THU will be displayed on the utility time display Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU After execution Item Message Formats Request message host GOT format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connectio...

Page 1486: ...etail Settings 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH 7FH 3139H D13 Interrupt Interrupt output Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 31H Output value 1 39H Output value 2 Item Message Formats Interrupt output GOT host 1 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 1 byte 2 When In...

Page 1487: ...ats 62 41 Error code list When faulty the error code is stored in SD2 For details of error code stored in SD2 the error contents cause and measures refer to the following 62 3 5 Details and actions for errors error codes stored into SD2 When an error other than those to be stored in SD2 occurs at faulty only the NAK response is executed Precautions 1 Batch reading writing crossing over different d...

Page 1488: ...dress Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following 62 3 Device Data Area 3 Number of points Specifies the number of device data to be read written Setting range 1 to 40H The address notated in hex...

Page 1489: ...rite in word units WD command a When writing to a word device The following shows as example of writing 0064H and 0065H to virtual devices D100 and D101 D100 D101 0102H 0304H Item Message Formats Request message host GOT Response message during normal communication GOT host Data length 00H 06H Address 64H 00H Number of points 00H 02H 1BH ESC 52H R Com mand 00H 00H 00H 00H 42H 00H B Data length 00H...

Page 1490: ...M52 interrupt code output disable flag 62 3 6 SM devices To issue interrupts in format 11 set the data length to 8 bits at Communication Detail Settings 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH 7FH 31H D13 Interrupt Interrupt output Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 1 31H Output value 1 Item Message For...

Page 1491: ...ries With setting LH Order the order of upper bits and lower bits are reversed when the GOT displays and writes 32 bit data Error code Description Measures 10H Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message 62 4 2 List of commands 12H Message length error The upper limit of the data length that can be received by the G...

Page 1492: ...ue 0 30H 0 30H H L PLC No 0 30H 1 31H H L Network No 0 30H 1 31H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 0 0 30H 30H H L H L Serial No 0 30H 0 30H 0 0 30H 30H H L H L Request type 0 30H 0 30H 5 4 35H 34H H L H L Device code 2AH D 44H H Start Device 1 31H 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H 0 30H Character A section H Sub...

Page 1493: ... code from the upper digit Transmit the data notated in hexadecimal converted to a 1 digit binary code from the upper digit PLC No Set the same number as the PLC No set in the GOT For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Transmit the data notated in hexadecimal converted to a 2 digit ASCII code from the...

Page 1494: ...ing random read write command inequalityL When setting multiple bit accesses word accesses or double word accesses limit the total number of access points to within 64 points inequalityRWhen using multiple block batch read write commands inequalityL When setting multiple blocks limit the total number of points of all blocks to within 64 points Transmit the data notated in decimal converted to a 4 ...

Page 1495: ... 18 46 49 THU Item Message Formats Request message host GOT format 6 4E frame ASCII format 7 4E frame Binary L Fixed value 0 30H 0 30H H L PLC No 0 30H 1 31H H L Network No 0 30H 1 31H H 0 30H 0 30H H Request data length 0 30H L 0 30H C 43H 0 30H H CPU monitoring timer 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Serial No 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L Request type 0 30H 0 30H H 5 35H 4 3...

Page 1496: ...H H D 44H 4 34H Character B section H L 9 39H H L 1 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L 0 30H 1 31H L 1 31H 8 38H H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 Request destination module I O No Request destination module station No H L 6 36H H L 4 34H 9 39H 4 34H H L 0 30H 4 34H Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data Second data Day of week data Data length target range End code 00H 00H 2 Year data 09H 0AH...

Page 1497: ...35H 6 36H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Serial No 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L Response type 0 30H 0 30H H D 44H 4 34H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 Request destination module I O No Request destination module station No H L PLC No 0 30H 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H Request destination module I O No Request destination module station No L ...

Page 1498: ...30H 0 30H L Response type 0 30H 0 30H H 5 35H 4 34H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H 1 Request destination module I O No Request destination module station No Character C section H L 9 39H H L 1 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L 0 30H 1 31H L 1 31H 8 38H H 1 H L 6 36H H L 4 34H 9 39H 4 34H H L 0 30H 4 34H Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data Second data Day of week data L Command 0 30H 1 31H H 0...

Page 1499: ... format 6 4E frame ASCII format 7 4E frame Binary L Fixed value 0 30H 0 30H H L PLC No 0 30H 1 31H H L Network No 0 30H 1 31H H 0 30H 0 30H H Response data length 0 30H L 0 30H 4 34H 0 30H H End code 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Serial No 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L Response type 0 30H 0 30H H D 44H 4 34H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H Request destination module I O N...

Page 1500: ... 0 30H L 1 31H 6 36H 0 30H H End code 0 30H 0 30H L 5 35H 6 36H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Serial No 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L Response type 0 30H 0 30H H D 44H 4 34H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 Request destination module I O No Request destination module station No H L PLC No 0 30H 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H Request destination ...

Page 1501: ...cessed in one communication The start address start device number to specified number of points exceeds the maximum address device number step number for each process Correct the specified number of points or the start address device number 62 3 Device Data Area When reading data which the command bit length is longer than the specification the set number of write data points differs from the spec...

Page 1502: ...GOT side Network No 1 PLC No 1 Format 8 3E frame ASCII Format 9 3E frame Binary H L PLC No 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 H Command 0 30H 4 34H L 0 30H 1 31H 1 H L Device code 2AH D 44H H Start Device 1 31H 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H 0 30H Character A section H Sub command 0 3...

Page 1503: ...e from the upper digit PLC No Set the same number as the PLC No set in the GOT For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Transmit the data notated in hexadecimal converted to a 2 digit ASCII code from the upper digit Transmit the data notated in hexadecimal converted to a 1 digit binary code from the upp...

Page 1504: ...ing random read write command inequalityL When setting multiple bit accesses word accesses or double word accesses limit the total number of access points to within 64 points inequalityRWhen using multiple block batch read write commands inequalityL When setting multiple blocks limit the total number of points of all blocks to within 64 points Transmit the data notated in decimal converted to a 4 ...

Page 1505: ...6 49 Thursday Continued to next page Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU Item Message Formats Request message host GOT format 8 3E frame ASCII format 9 3E frame Binary H L PLC No 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Request data length 0 30H C 43H H 0 30H 0 30H L...

Page 1506: ... 34H H L PLC No 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H Following 1 H D 44H 0 30H L Subheader 0 30H 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Response data length 1 31H 2 32H H 0 30H 0 30H L End code 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 31H 31H Data length target data 00H Network No PLC No 00H D0H Subheader 00H 00H 00H Request destina...

Page 1507: ...dule station No 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Response data length 1 31H 6 36H H 0 30H 0 30H L End code 5 35H 6 36H H D 44H 0 30H L Subheader 0 30H 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H H L PLC No 0 30H 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 31H 31H 1 1 H Command 1 31H 9 39H L 0 30H 1 31H H Sub command 0 ...

Page 1508: ... 30H 34H 1 H L PLC No 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H Following 1 H 5 35H 0 30H L Subheader 0 30H 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Response data length 1 31H A 41H H 0 30H 0 30H L CPU monitoring timer 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 1 H Command 0 31H 9 39H L 0 30H 1 31H H Sub command 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H 31H...

Page 1509: ...esponse message during normal communication GOT host format 8 3E frame ASCII format 9 3E frame Binary H L PLC No 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Response data length 0 30H 4 34H H 0 30H 0 30H L End code 0 30H 0 30H H D 44H 0 30H L Subheader 0 30H 0 30H 31H 31...

Page 1510: ... 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Response data length 1 31H 6 36H H 0 30H 0 30H L End code 5 35H 6 36H H D 44H 0 30H L Subheader 0 30H 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H H L PLC No 0 30H 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 31H 31H 1 1...

Page 1511: ...cessed in one communication The start address start device number to specified number of points exceeds the maximum address device number step number for each process Correct the specified number of points or the start address device number 62 3 Device Data Area When reading data which the command bit length is longer than the specification the set number of write data points differs from the spec...

Page 1512: ...ork is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway 1 Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected Only for connection via router Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Ethernet Download Port No Set the GOT port No for Ethernet download Default 5014 1024 to 5010 5014 to 65534 Except for 5011 5012 5013 and 49153 G...

Page 1513: ...ce setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Special Interrupt Code Hex Event type 20H B...

Page 1514: ...r MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 62 8 Precautions GOT clock control The settings of time adjusting or time broadcast made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC Use the dedicated commands to set or read out the clock data of microcomputer UDP IP connection When the commands are sent from multiple controllers simultaneously the GOT may not receive all the commands Retry sending the comma...

Page 1515: ...MODBUS CONNECTIONS 63 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 63 1 64 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 64 1 ...

Page 1516: ......

Page 1517: ... 2 1 Connecting to MODBUS equipment 1 When using the connector conversion box 1 The shortest specification on the MODBUS equipment side is prioritized 2 When it is less than 10 units the number of the maximum connectable units on the MODBUS equipment side will apply MODBUS RTU Communication driver GOT MODBUS equipment Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable Controller Connection c...

Page 1518: ... Connection cable External cable GOT model Total distance 1 Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number MODBUS equipment RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m 6m 1 MODBUS equipment for 1 GOT RS 422 485 RS 422 485 connection diagram 2 GT11H C30 37P 3m GT11H C60 37P 6m GT11H C100 37P 10m 13m Up to 10 MODBUS equipment for 1 GOT 2 GOT MOD...

Page 1519: ...total distance between the GOT and a controller of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 MODBUS equipment side conne...

Page 1520: ...bed in the MODBUS equipment manual 3 For the terminating resistor of MODBUS equipment refer to the manual of MODBUS equipment to be used SG RSA RSB CSA CSB RDA RDB SDA SDB 1 6 2 7 5 3 8 4 9 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDA RDB SDA SDB SG 3 MODBUS equipment side 1 2 4 1st MODBUS equipment side 1 2 4 2nd Connector conversion box side External cable GT11H C 37P side SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB 2 3 6 7 1...

Page 1521: ...m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 6 Connector Conversion Box 3 External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side refer to the following 8 2 External Cable Relay Cable 4 MODBUS equipment side connector Use the connector compatible with the MODBUS equipment side module F...

Page 1522: ...OINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or ...

Page 1523: ... selected in Device Network Set the station number of the controller to be monitored Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller Other Select this item for monitoring other controllers After selecting the item set the station number and network number of the controller to be monitored NW No For the MODBUS RTU connection set 1 For the MODBUS TCP connection set the network No Station No...

Page 1524: ...GS570 to GS576 or the GS device used for individual communication setting GS590 to GS617 is validated a When sharing communication settings between multiple channel numbers The table below shows the settings for the GS device The GS device can be changed even in the middle of the operation MODBUS RTU Communication protocol Representation on GT Designer3 Device name Function Code to be used Address...

Page 1525: ...1968 Specify the maximum number Other than above 1968 When Bit0 of GS570 is 1 the function code 0F is not used and therefore the setting of GS575 will be disabled GS576 Function Code 10 Specification for the max number of multiple holding register write times 0 100 1 to 123 Specify the maximum number Other than above 123 When Bit1 of GS570 is 1 the function code 10F is not used and therefore the s...

Page 1526: ...ut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example the faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual MODBUS communication control function on the GS device At GOT startup set MODBUS communicatio...

Page 1527: ...mit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Use the straight cable The use of shielded twisted pair cable STP is recommended in environments in which the performance against noise is required 4 Depends on the connected equipment Refer to the manual of MODBUS TCP equipment to be used 5 Use C or later version of GT11H C 37P MODBUS TCP Communication driver Hub Connection cable Connection cable Conne...

Page 1528: ...4 3 3 Ethernet setting 2 3 4 Click OK Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 247 GOT IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the de...

Page 1529: ...the Utility refer to the following manual 11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 64 4 PLC side setting For details of the MODBUS TCP equipment refer to the manual of MODBUS TCP equipment to be used Item Description Range Host The host is displayed The host ...

Page 1530: ...0 Using Function Code 10 1 Not using Function Code 10 GS571 Function Code 01 Specification for the max number of coil read times 0 1000 1 to 2000 Specify the maximum number Other than above 2000 GS572 Function Code 02 Specification for the max number of input relay read times 0 1000 1 to 2000 Specify the maximum number Other than above 2000 GS573 Function Code 03 Specification for the max number o...

Page 1531: ...environments in which the performance against noise is required 5 Use C or later version of GT11H C 37P MODBUS TCP Communication driver Ethernet module SCHNEIDER PLC Hub Connection cable Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable 4 External device Connection cable 4 Connector conversion box External cable 5 GOT model Number of connectable equipment Model Ethe...

Page 1532: ... Modicon Quantum series Set for Concept programming software Item Set value Processors Connected CPU module Memory cards Memory card to be used Module Connected Ethernet module IP Address IP address for Ethernet module Size of global address fields Setting for device points Bits Coil Input Words Input register Maintenance register Item Set value PLC Selection Connected CPU module TCP IP Ethernet N...

Page 1533: ...cation settings refer to the peripheral software manual for YOKOGAWA PLC POINT POINT POINT Connection between STARDOM and the PC for communication settings For the communication settings of STARDOM STARDOM and the PC for communication settings must be connected to Ethernet using the Resource Configurator peripheral software 1 Modbus Communication Portfolio License To set the communication settings...

Page 1534: ...d Copy a sample project POU to the new project Open SD_CMODBUSE_Sample1 mwt Right click ComEServerModbus in the Logic POU under the project tree in the SD_CMODBUSE_Sample1 project and select Copy Right click the Logic POU under the project tree in the previously created project and select Paste Double click the ComEServerModbus file in the ComEServerModbus folder For the following terminals set as...

Page 1535: ...GAWA PLCs refer to the following manual YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual Connecting to STARDOM 1 For dual redundant configuration When STARDOM is configured with a redundant system the connection is not supported 2 Not communicating with GOT and STARDOM in a specified period When the GOT does not communicate with STARDOM in a specified period during the GOT is turned on STARDOM disconnects the line for ...

Page 1536: ...m The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication per...

Page 1537: ...CONNECTIONS TO PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 65 VNC R SERVER CONNECTION 65 1 ...

Page 1538: ......

Page 1539: ...cting the GOT and PC directly with Ethernet cable a cross cable is also available 3 A length between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used Controller Software PC UltraVNC Connection type dependant Communication driver Communication driver Ethernet system Extended function OS VNC Server Hub External cable GOT Connection cable Connection cable Conn...

Page 1540: ...ttings 65 3 1 VNC R server function setting 1 Select Common Peripheral Setting VNC Server from the menu 2 Check Use VNC Server of VNC Server to set For details on the settings refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Click the button when settings are completed 65 3 2 Setting communication interface Communication settings For using the VNC server install an Ether...

Page 1541: ...ernet microcomputer To connect controllers including a PLC to the GOT by using the Ethernet connection an additional setting is required If an Ethernet communication driver other than the ones described above is used set Destination I F of Ethernet Download on the PC Data Transfer dialog box In the peripheral setting For the details of Ethernet Download refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1...

Page 1542: ...is added Jan 2015 JY997D50201 JY997D50202 G Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 126G C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series is supported MELSEC iQ F Series is supported FA Transparent Function MELSEC iQ R Series MX Component MX Sheet are supported C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series CW Configurator is supported Servo amplifier connection MELSERVO J4 A RJ compatible Apr 2015 JY997D50201 JY997D502...

Page 1543: ... in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product c Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged in the following cases Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range 1 1 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technic...

Page 1544: ...egistered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein a...

Page 1545: ......

Page 1546: ......

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for GT14

Brand: NCR Pages: 153

Brand: NCR Pages: 44

Brand: NCR Pages: 112

Brand: NCR Pages: 92

Brand: Newland Pages: 63

Brand: Chase Pages: 12

Brand: InterCard Pages: 25

Brand: IVC Displays Pages: 32

Brand: Worth Data Pages: 155

Brand: adyen Pages: 13

Brand: XAC Pages: 7

FieldPoint FP-TB-1

Brand: National Instruments Pages: 17

NA5-12*101 series

Brand: Omron Pages: 74

Brand: Tatung Pages: 84

Brand: IEI Technology Pages: 145

Brand: Janus Remote Communications Pages: 14

Brand: Crestron Pages: 6

Brand: GSM Pages: 8

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands